JP2022189976A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine permitting suitable soldering when mounting an electronic component, a connector, and the like onto a printed wiring board.

SOLUTION: A first operation hole detection sensor 951 for detecting entry into a first operation hole is connected to a main control board 61 via a first harness 951a, and a second operation hole detection sensor 952 for detecting entry into a second operation hole is connected to the main control board 61 via a second harness 952a. The main control board 61 includes: a first via hole 793s for inserting a first pin 784s used for connection of the second harness 952a, and a second via hole 793t for inserting a second pin 784t. Short-circuiting prevention holes 761, which suppress formation of a solder bridge between the first pin 784s and the second pin 784t, are provided around the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t each.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 103

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine includes a main control device that controls the main game, and a sound emission control device that outputs sound and light for effects based on commands received from the main control device. The main control device, the sound emission control device, and the like are internally provided with a substrate, and the substrate is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs and resistors, connectors, and the like on a printed wiring board. Electronic components, connectors, and the like are fixed in a state of being electrically connected to wiring formed on a printed wiring board by soldering (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-004102 A

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform soldering appropriately when mounting electronic components, connectors, and the like on the printed wiring board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which electronic parts, connectors, and the like can be suitably soldered when mounted on a printed wiring board. It is intended.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
a starting ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry section;
a specific control means having a specific substrate provided with a connection means for electrically connecting a transmission means for transmitting information of a detection result of the ball entry detection means;
with
At least a first start-up ball entry portion and a second start-up ball entry portion are provided as the start-up ball entry portion,
As the ball entry detection means, a first ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start ball entry section and a second entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section. at least ball detection means;
As the transmission means, a first transmission means for transmitting information on the detection result of the first ball entry detection means, and a second transmission means for transmitting information on the detection result of the second ball entry detection means,
As the connection means, a first connection means to which the first transmission means is connected, and a second connection means to which the second transmission means is connected,
The first connection means and the second connection means are provided individually for the specific substrate,
The connection terminals provided on the second connection means are two, a first connection terminal and a second connection terminal,
The specific substrate is
a first insertion hole through which the first connection terminal is inserted;
a second insertion hole through which the second connection terminal is inserted;
a first connection area provided around the first insertion hole;
a second connection area provided around the second insertion hole;
a predetermined insertion hole through which a predetermined terminal of a predetermined attachment component is inserted;
a predetermined connection area provided around the predetermined insertion hole;
with
The first connection terminal and the first connection region are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the first connection terminal is inserted through the first insertion hole,
The second connection terminal and the second connection region are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the second connection terminal is inserted through the second insertion hole,
The predetermined terminal and the predetermined connection area are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the predetermined terminal is inserted through the predetermined insertion hole,
In the game area, the first starting ball entry part is provided at a position where the game ball shot when the shooting operation is performed at least in the first operation mode can reach,
In the game area, the second starting ball entering portion is a position where the game ball fired when the shooting operation is performed according to the first operation mode is impossible or difficult to reach, and the second operation mode is provided at a position where the game ball fired when the shooting operation is performed by
The specific control means is
a first acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first ball entry detecting means;
a first acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the first acquisition means;
a second acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second ball entry detecting means;
a second acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the second acquisition means;
addition determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means or the second acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined added information;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information; ,
Acceptance control capable of switching the second starting ball entry section between a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter or impossible to enter, and a second state in which game balls are more likely to enter. means and
with
The acceptance control means has a first mode and a second mode in which the second state is more likely than the first mode as control modes for the second start-up ball entry section,
The special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is subject to the addition determination rather than the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is subject to the determination of addition. In the case of
The first connection region and the second connection region are formed to have a larger area than the predetermined connection region,
The first connection region is formed to have a larger area on a side different from the second insertion hole side with respect to the first insertion hole,
The second connection area is formed so that the area on the side different from the first insertion hole side is larger with respect to the second insertion hole.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to perform soldering suitably at the time of mounting an electronic component, a connector, etc. on a printed wiring board.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting a detection result of a ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various devices which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by payout side CPU. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. 9 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 11 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by management side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure handling process performed by management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specific processing performed by main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by management side CPU. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing trigger identification processing executed by the main CPU in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by a management-side CPU in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of an MPU of a main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting detection results of each entering ball detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in the twelfth embodiment; It is a front view of the game board in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) It is a perspective view of a 1st horizontal distribution nail, (b) It is a top view of a 1st horizontal distribution member, (c) It is a rear view of a 1st horizontal distribution member. (a) is a perspective view of a fixing member, and (b) is an end view of a cut surface of the first left and right dividing nail cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (a) is an end view of a longitudinal section of the first horizontal dividing nail showing a game ball colliding with the first distribution surface, and (b) a course of a game ball falling from above and colliding with the first distribution surface. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of a game ball that flows down from the upper left side and collides with the first distribution surface. (a) is an end view of a longitudinal section of the first left and right dividing nail showing a game ball colliding with the second distribution surface, and (b) a path of the game ball falling from above and colliding with the second distribution surface. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of a game ball that flows down from the upper left side and collides with the second distribution surface. (a) It is a perspective view of a 2nd left-right dividing nail, (b) It is a top view of a 2nd left-right dividing member, (c) It is a rear view of a 2nd left-right dividing member. (a) a table showing the direction of the resistance received by the game ball colliding with the first left and right dividing nail, (b) a table showing the direction of the resistance received by the game ball colliding with the second left and right dividing nail, (c) A table showing the direction of the resistance received by the game ball that collides with the obstructing nail. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a game ball positioned on the back side is guided by the left guide nail group, and (b) how a game ball positioned on the front side is guided by the left guide nail group. It is an explanatory view for explaining. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining how the game ball positioned on the far side is guided by the right guide nail group, and (b) how the game ball positioned on the near side is guided by the right guide nail group. It is an explanatory view for explaining. FIG. 32 is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged periphery of the left guiding member in another form of the thirteenth embodiment; They are a front view of the game board in which the 1st left-right distribution nail and the 2nd left-right distribution nail are provided in the upstream vicinity of the operation|movement opening, and the enlarged view near the operation opening. (a) It is a perspective view of the 1st right-and-left dividing nail, (b) It is an end view of the cut surface of the 1st right-and-left dividing nail at the time of cutting in a plane perpendicular|vertical to the surface of a game board. (a) is a perspective view of a reversing nail, (b) is an end view of a cut surface when the reversing nail is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (c) is a game ball that collides with the first reversing surface. (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball that collides with the second reversing surface. FIG. 21 is a front view of a game board in a fourteenth embodiment, and an enlarged view of the vicinity of the upstream part of the left guide nail group. (a) is a perspective view of the front and rear distribution nail, (b) is a plan view of the front and rear distribution member, (c), (d) the front and rear distribution nail when cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board is an end view of a cut surface of the . (a) is a perspective view of a rear nail, and (b) and (c) are end views of a cut surface of the rear nail cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (a) An explanatory view for explaining the course of a game ball positioned on the back side of the game area in the left guide nail group, and (b) the course of the game ball positioned on the front side of the game area in the left guide nail group. It is an explanatory view for explaining. (a) It is a plan view of the front priority member in another form of the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the path of the game ball in the left guide nail group including the front priority member. FIG. 20 is a front view of a game board and an enlarged view of the periphery of a repulsion nail in a fifteenth embodiment; (a) It is an exploded perspective view of a repulsion nail, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a repulsion nail. (a) is an end view of the cut surface when the repulsion nail is cut on a plane perpendicular to the plane of the game board; (c) is an end view of the cut surface when the repulsion nail is cut on a plane perpendicular to the plane of the game board, and (d) is an explanatory view for explaining the path of the game ball colliding with the low repulsion member. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of a game ball that collides with the high repulsion portion of the repulsion nail, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball after colliding with the low resilience member of the repulsion nail. It is an explanatory diagram for. FIG. 22 is a front view of a game board in the sixteenth embodiment; (a) is a perspective view of the front and rear distribution table, (b) is a plan view of the front and rear distribution table, and (c) and (d) are cases in which the front and rear distribution table is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. is an end view of a cut surface of the . It is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged left central portion. FIG. 32 is a front view of a game board in another form of the sixteenth embodiment; (a), (b) It is the front view of the game board which shows the front-back distribution stand and the circumference|surroundings of a left-hand guide nail group by enlarging. (a) It is a perspective view of the front and rear distribution table provided with a groove that guides the game ball on the far side to the farthest side and a groove that guides the game ball on the front side to the farthest side, (b) the far side. It is a perspective view of the front and rear distribution table provided with a groove that guides the game ball to the frontmost side and a groove that guides the game ball on the front side to the innermost side. It is a front view of the game board in the seventeenth embodiment, and an enlarged view of the vicinity of the position change passage. (a) is a perspective view of the passage forming member, (b) is a front view of the passage forming member, and (c) and (d) are cut surfaces when the passage forming member is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. is an end view of the. (a), (b) is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged downstream periphery of the position change passage. (a), (b) is an end view of a cut surface when the passage forming member for replacement is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a front view of the game board in the eighteenth embodiment. (a) It is an exploded perspective view of a guide member, (b) It is a left side view of a guide member. It is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (a), (b) is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged downstream periphery of the guide passage. It is an end view of a cut surface when the replacement guide member is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. (a) is an end view of the cut surface when the guide member is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board in another form of the eighteenth embodiment; It is an end view of a cut surface when cutting a guide member. (a) is a surface view of the main control board showing an enlarged part of the main control board in the nineteenth embodiment, and (b) is a surface view of the main control board showing an enlarged periphery of the one-row connector. . (a) A perspective view of a single-row connector, (b) a perspective view of a two-pole connector, and (c) a perspective view of a two-row connector. (a) is a perspective view showing an enlarged part of the back surface of the printed wiring board, and (b) a vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged view around a via hole of the printed wiring board cut along a plane perpendicular to the front surface. FIG. 2 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view showing the periphery of a pin of a printed wiring board cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface; (a) is a rear view showing an enlarged part of the main control board, and (b) a rear view of the printed wiring board showing an enlarged rear surface area for one row before the first row connector is attached. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jet of molten solder, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the jet hits the back surface of a printed wiring board. (a) A vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board for explaining a state in which the second pin, the third pin, and the fourth pin of the one-row connector are in contact with the jet; FIG. 4C is a vertical cross-sectional view of the printed wiring board for comparison showing how the second pin of the connector comes out of contact with the jet; (c) the third pin of the first row connector comes out of contact with the jet; FIG. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining the state; (a) A vertical cross-sectional view of the printed wiring board for comparison showing a state in which the third pin of the one-row connector is out of contact with the jet; (b) the fourth pin of the one-row connector is a jet; FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the comparative printed wiring board shown for explaining the state of being released from the contact state with, (c) a state in which a solder bridge is formed between the third pin and the fourth pin of the first row connector; 1 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board showing . FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the printed wiring board for explaining a solder fillet formed around the fourth pin of the one-row connector; (a) is a backside view of the printed wiring board showing an enlarged 2-pole back area before the 2-pole connector is attached, and (b) an enlarged 2-row back area before the 2-row connector is attached. 2 is a back view of the printed wiring board shown in FIG. (a) is a backside view of a printed wiring board showing an enlarged one-row backside region provided with inclined short-circuit prevention holes in another form of the nineteenth embodiment; (b) an enlarged one-row backside region; FIG. 2C is a rear view of the printed wiring board shown in FIG. 1C, and FIG. (a) is a backside view of the printed wiring board showing an enlarged rear surface area for one row in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) a vertical cross-sectional view of the printed wiring board showing an enlarged periphery of pins of the one-row connector. is. (a) is a backside view of a printed wiring board showing an enlarged one-row backside region in which six separate short-circuit prevention holes are formed in another form of the twentieth embodiment; (b) two three-direction views; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the printed wiring board showing an enlarged rear surface region for one row in which a separate short-circuit prevention hole is formed; FIG. 20 is a rear view of a printed wiring board showing an enlarged rear surface region for one row in which a group of short-circuit prevention holes for suppressing occurrence of solder bridges is formed in the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 22 is a front view of a game board in the twenty-second embodiment; (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining a connection mode between the first working opening detection sensor and the second working opening detecting sensor and the main control board, and (b) the first working opening area and the second working opening area. 2 is an enlarged rear view of the printed wiring board; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration inside the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, a solenoid 27c is driven and controlled to shoot a game ball.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one each.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 , one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and sent to the special electric prize winning device 32 When one game ball is entered, 15 prize balls are paid out.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the game ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four at maximum, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the design display device 41, when the fluctuation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the pattern is displayed according to it A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. The symbols are scroll-displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scroll display is first started in all symbol rows, and the scroll display is switched to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row→lower symbol row→middle symbol row. The game ends with the design still displayed. Then, for example, in a game cycle in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset activated line on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41 .

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. will be Also, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined result is displayed and the game is completed. times. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

When a big win is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball entering any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowed into the game area PA is any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a It will be discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball into. A game ball entering any one of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are led to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are led to the discharged ball recovery section (not shown). is recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the discharge passages 42 to 48, respectively. These discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general prize winning openings 31 are provided as already explained, there are discharge passage portions 42 to 44 corresponding to each of these four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general prize winning port 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning hole detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball entering the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage part 42, and enters the general winning hole 31 on the right side. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. FIG. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is formed so as to join the two general prize winning openings 31 on the right side at a midway position. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one exit side area by joining the entrance side areas in the middle. doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44 . A game ball that enters one of the two right-side general winning holes 31 is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44. - 特許庁

A fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. It is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operation opening detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball entering the second operation opening 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. It is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a while it is passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is present corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the out port 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

A game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to a main controller 60 which will be described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main controller 60. FIG. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when no game ball is detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 bulging forward and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. It should be noted that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the means for traces, there is a configuration of a connecting portion that inseparably connects a plurality of case bodies that constitute the board box 60a and that requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon separation, and an adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is affixed so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 60a is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 78 for controlling the launching of game balls is provided. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the elements described above, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used exclusively for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to retain data, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64 .

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the game ball entry mode in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main side CPU 63 . Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is grasped according to the grasped ball entering history.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main controller 60 . A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67 , and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67 .

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to various sensors such as various incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. As already explained, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating opening detection sensor 47a, an outlet opening detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball is entering each ball-entering section. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operation port 33, and various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the second operation port 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, a game ball entering a prize ball corresponding ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball among the ball entry portions. be. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the open/close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34, A figure unit 37 and a general figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, but all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the driving control of the special electric driving unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the main side CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 37a is performed in main side CPU63 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to set the general electric accessory 34a to the open state is specified, the main side CPU 63 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a. Also, when the winning prize to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure reservation display unit 37b in the main side CPU63 is executed, and when winning to the through gate 35 occurs, or when variable display is started in the normal pattern display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b.

The blackout monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78 and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 .

The power/emission control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Electric power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60 . The power/shooting control device 78 is responsible for controlling the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and controls the display control device 82. is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery Draws by Main Side CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the special figure display section 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning generation, the big winning type counter C2 used when judging the big winning type, and the pattern display device 41 fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 are determined. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the general electrical open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The pending storage area 65a comprises a pending area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In addition, a combination of each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of reservation area RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. .

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and the start of one game round. At that time, the success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 will be described. For example, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the general electric reservation area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the general electric role item 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation in which the game ball is continuously shot in the same manner in the game area PA, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electric open state in the general electric open lottery using the general electric accessory open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). , in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electrical role 34a is in the open state when the general electrical open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the open time for one time is set longer. It is In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the The duration of one display on the display section 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is won in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to be in the electric power open state per unit time is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric power open state is increased. In addition, after one general electric open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next general electric open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 35, it is executed in the universal diagram display unit 38a In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, in the high-frequency support mode, it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than in the low-frequency support mode, or is set so that the average reserved time is shorter. good too. In addition, the number of open times is increased, the open time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured after one electric power open lottery is performed and the next electric power open lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the main ROM 64 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is twenty. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are (1) the aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first prize after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

As a aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of winning of the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end thereof is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times as an upper limit.

Here, the round game is continued until one of the following conditions is satisfied: elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration time, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32. It is a game to play. In addition, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of the result of the big win triggered by the shift. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set by differentiating the opening duration from opening to closing of the special electric prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short-time mode, in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. It is

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the shooting cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and one time in the short-time mode. When the opening is performed for the first time, it is expected that no prize will be won to the special electric prize winning device 32, or if there will be a prize, it will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric winning device 32, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, and is not limited to the above value, and is arbitrary is.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. And, as such a distribution destination, a low probability jackpot result, a low prize winning high probability jackpot result, and a maximum profit jackpot result are set.

A low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The result of the low winning high probability jackpot is that the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery results in the win/fail lottery result in winning the big win state, and the game shifts to the big win state accordingly.

The maximum profit jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery results in the win/fail lottery result in winning the big win state, and the game shifts to the big win state accordingly.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state is not the open/close execution mode, but the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as the game result, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the low winning high probability jackpot result is not set. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be less than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the maximum profit jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the low prize winning high probability jackpot result. , and "15 to 29" corresponds to the maximum winning jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing a variable display of symbols, and the symbol display device 41 in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined big win result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed with respect to the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. , the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win symbols.

In the advance notice display, the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows after the symbol variability display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or in a part of the symbol rows and a plurality of symbols are displayed. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. It also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern row in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in a game cycle corresponding to a big hit result in which the same combination of symbols is not stop-displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 is executed when the reach display corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 81 . In this case, the sound emission control device 81 determines that the game round corresponding to one of the jackpot results is more likely to cause the notice display than the game round corresponding to the result of losing, and that the notice display with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. Lottery processing for advance notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main side CPU 63 determines the display continuation time in the special figure display unit 37a and the display continuation time of the design in the design display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and further whether or not the power failure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Determine (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Further, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output process for outputting various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). The details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the main side CPU 63 does not start the processing for advancing the game until this situation is reached.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is performed. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S112 to S115 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S113, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S114, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S115, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed and then an infinite loop is performed. Become. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S203, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred. In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S209). In the ball-entering detection process, signals received from the ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the out port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball-entering detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (step S211). In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is shot at 0.6 sec which is a predetermined shooting cycle. In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a is checked, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is checked. I do.

After that, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs in a situation where the number of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, The numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point is stored in the pending storage area 65a in chronological order as pending information. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the reservation information is not during the game rotation and the opening and closing execution mode and the reservation information is stored, it is determined whether or not the reservation information corresponds to the jackpot winning. processing, and when it corresponds to the winning of the jackpot, a distribution determination processing of deciding which jackpot result the reservation information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control processing, not only the winning judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing, but also if the holding information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, it is determined whether the holding information corresponds to reach occurrence Along with executing a reach determination process to determine, a process of selecting the duration of the game round using the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, a variation command containing information on the duration corresponding to the result of each process, and a type command containing information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a Start variable display. Upon receiving the variation command and the type command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 to start the game play effect corresponding to the contents of these commands. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to start the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, by determining whether or not the duration of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. judge. When it is the end timing, a process for ending the game round is executed in a state in which the display corresponding to the game result is performed. In this case, when the current game cycle corresponds to the occurrence of any of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the special figure display part 37a, and the current game round is displayed. When the game round corresponds to the result of losing, the pattern corresponding to the result of losing is stopped and displayed in the special figure display part 37a. Also, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Upon receiving the final stop command, the sound emission control device 81 terminates the presentation for the current game round in the display emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 . Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command, the pattern display device 41 terminates the effect for the current game cycle.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of starting, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Moreover, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and when the round game is finished, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command that indicates that the round game is terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the open/close execution mode to the display control device 82 . The display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to execute the effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated, the success/fail lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is terminated correspond to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Execute the process to become the mode.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the general figure general electric control process is performed (step S214). In the general map general electric control process, when the prize to the through gate 35 is generated, the processing for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side is executed, and when the reservation information on the general map side is stored Then, open determination is performed for the reservation information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed. In this case, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, corresponding processing is executed, and if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, corresponding processing is executed. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is set, the low-frequency support mode is set even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, while setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b , Set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information related to the normal map display unit 38a in the normal map reservation display unit 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main side CPU 63 controls the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through hole. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a to the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

The main side CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the number of signals to be input to the input port 63a is limited to eight types by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the entering ball detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special train detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working opening detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working opening detection sensor 47a, and the The sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a detects the passage of the game ball by outputting a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, stores "1" in the corresponding bit. store the information of In other words, in a situation in which the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, "0" information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is stored. In the detected state, "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the entering ball detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a to the management IC 66. is a flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 10 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10-ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). . The second output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the second bit D2 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). . The third output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the third bit D3 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and further 1 is added to the value of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S313). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game in the open/close execution mode. By confirming that the special electric prize flag is set to "1" in the special electric prize control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), entry of one game ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 is confirmed. It specifies that a ball has been generated, and subtracts 1 from the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the possible number of hits is executed, the special electric winning prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 15 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Furthermore, 1 is added to the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the first operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0" do. The fifth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating opening detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and a one prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state where information "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 has changed to the state where information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Furthermore, the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the second operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35 . By confirming that "1" is set to the gate winning prize flag in the general pattern general electric control processing (step S214) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), the general general pattern stored in the general electric reservation area 65c On the condition that the number of pending information on the side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, the processing of storing the numerical information of the current public electric utility item open counter C4 in the public power holding area 65c as the holding information on the public power map side. to run. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general/universal electric power control processing (step S214), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as already explained, when one game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, In the situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball, the main side CPU 63 identifies that one game ball has been detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices communicating with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 has an MPU 91 . The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for memory retention, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92 .

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for memory retention (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout-side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and takes a shorter time to read than the payout-side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93 .

The payout side CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main side CPU 63 . When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game balls can be paid out normally, and if it is specified that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side RAM 94 To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where unpaid prize ball number information is stored. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be performed normally. When the main side CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 notify that the game balls cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 so that A state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a payout device 76 are states in which game balls cannot be normally dispensed. does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the tank is full when the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor is cancelled. It specifies that the full tank state is canceled when the tank is full.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout-side CPU 92 identifies the state of no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is cancelled. Determine that the ballless state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout abnormal state occurs when the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor in spite of driving and controlling the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is specified that the abnormal payout state is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. , the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The dispensing side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and when receiving the open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. Identify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to have changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. Identify that the main body 12 is in the open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the full-tank process is executed (step S401). In the full-tank process, as already explained, based on the detection result of the full-tank detection sensor, it is specified whether the tank is full or not, and if the tank is full, processing for stopping the payout of game balls. is executed, and a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

After that, a ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the no-ball processing, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor. While executing, it transmits a command indicating that there is no ball to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the abnormal payout monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the abnormal payout state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the abnormal payout state exists, the process of stopping the payout of game balls is executed. At the same time, it transmits to the main side CPU 63 a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95. If the front door frame 14 is open, A front door opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 while executing processing for stopping the payout of game balls. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, a game ball is detected. , and transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main side CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. - 特許庁Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the undistributed prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), game balls are paid out by the payout device 76 Payout control processing for controlling the execution of is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it does, 1 is subtracted from the value of prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S409).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97 . The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of which are A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92 . Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output

One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95 and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96 . More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92 . The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97 . As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open can be externally output to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

More specifically, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 extending from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 . The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the main body. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the body on the external terminal plate 97 . This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that one game cycle has ended. Information indicating that and a predetermined number (for example, 100) game balls from the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). Information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls are put out in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97 . for example,
・Ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 until 100 game balls are discharged Ball rate (hereinafter referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in open/close execution mode ・Ball output rate in high-frequency support mode "S")
・ BS x “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34”
・The number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1דNumber of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33”+S2דNumber of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34”)
etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Structure for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65 and a management IC 66. FIG. The MPU 62 also has an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from equipment outside the MPU 62 . The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 via the internal bus 103 . Through the input port of the I/F 101, detection results from sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, commands from the payout side CPU 92, etc. are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and command contents. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as already described. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for a special electric as a result of execution of various processes by the main side CPU 63, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of execution of various processes by the CPU 63 , when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 , the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101 .

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided on the surface of the MPU 62 so that the terminal portion for connection is exposed. . However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect a reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminals 102 . However, the invention is not limited to this, and an opening is formed in the substrate box 60a for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60. The configuration may be such that a reading device can be electrically connected to the terminal 102 .

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111 , a management side CPU 112 , a management side ROM 113 , a management side RAM 114 , an RTC 115 , a correspondence memory 116 , and a history memory 117 . These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be bidirectionally communicable.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main side CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the terminal 102 for reading. Various signals from the main side CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111 , and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111 . The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62 .

The management-side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management-side CPU 112 . The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (ie, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside for storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 .

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is capable of constantly measuring date information and time information and outputting the measured date information and time information according to instructions from the management side CPU 112 . In addition, the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. Correspondence memory 116 stores information about correspondence between buffers 122a to 122p provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111 and types of signals input to buffers 122a to 122p. used for The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of game balls received from the main side CPU 63 through the management side I/F 111 . The details of the contents of history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. As shown in FIG.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p. is at LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at HI level. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. A first signal of HI level is output for a specific period when a ball is detected. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the second signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and one game is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a second signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the third signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a third signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level fourth signal when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. to output a fourth signal of HI level over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, a HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. When the ball is detected, it outputs a sixth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth buffer 122f is receiving the HI level sixth signal.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level seventh signal when no new game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. HI level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth buffer 122h receives an eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in the non-opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the opening/closing execution mode.

The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is set.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues to output the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. and output.

An output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p to make the management side CPU 112 recognize the timing of outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. FIG. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW-level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI-level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the 16th buffer 122p is receiving the HI level output instruction signal.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o are capable of inputting signals from the main side CPU 63, but normal signals are not input in this pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p larger than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It becomes possible to divert the management IC 66 to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 . Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the signal paths 118k to 118o are not formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked may be employed.

It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the management side CPU 112 can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . Details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of various signals in a state where operating power is being supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. As shown in FIG. Correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence with first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111. is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general prize winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 are displayed. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. Stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information (15 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32. Stored. Information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one ) are also stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (one ) are also stored. Information indicating the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

Information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h by the management CPU 112. FIG. Information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the eleventh buffer 122k, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112 . The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112. FIG. The fifteenth correspondence relationship area 123o stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. , the management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. It is a configuration that As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the signal is output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is output at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management side CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting for inputting the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. FIG. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal to be reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other types of pachinko machines using the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of such signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set with serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing correspondence relationship information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10), First, date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written. After that, the correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relation memory 116, and the read correspondence relation information is stored in the area for storing the correspondence relation information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written.

More specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of ball entry corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect game balls entering the general winning hole 31, so these first to third winning holes Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is the general prize winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball-entering part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the It is read out from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information of the type of ball entering portion is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 as it is.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and tenth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the high frequency support mode. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in a situation in the opening/closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. When the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level ninth signal in a situation other than the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal in a situation in the high frequency support mode. , the management-side CPU 112 determines that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and terminates the high-frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that When the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. When the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 . Further, when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 .

The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the 10 business days in which game balls are continuously shot from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, the history information storage area 125 for 600,000 or more pieces is provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124 . The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117 . Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of "0" to be written. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information in the last order is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the use area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of pieces of history information that can be stored exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, and a trigger for storing history information occurs, the history information storage area 125 in which the old pieces of history information are stored is overwritten with new pieces of history information in order. Become.

Also, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to "0" and the pointer information of "0" is written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has been read once from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognition output counter counts the remaining required number of times of information output for making the management side CPU 112 recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63 . Since fifteen buffers 122a to 122o of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to signal type recognition as already described, "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which kind of signals the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for this command output. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management side CPU 112 recognize which kind of signal 122o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. becomes possible and the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. Also, the period during which the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are corresponded so that the first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer. Recognition setting of the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read. read a type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls; if the output counter for recognition is "11", read out a type identification command indicating that it is the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls; If the output counter for recognition is "10", it is the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is "8", the type identification command indicating that the open/close execution mode is read. If the output counter for recognition is "7", it is the high-frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "6", read the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14. If the output counter for recognition is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read out the type identification command indicating that the

After that, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification type command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification type command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the period during which the identification type command output state and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 stores the corresponding identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Stores information about

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S506). When the value of the output counter for recognition is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the output counter for recognition after subtracting 1 is executed (steps S503 and step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S506: YES), output processing of an identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification end command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period during which the identification end command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is performed. is started, the combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the type of signal is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer.

Thereafter, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 stores the type identification received this time. Stores the signal type information set in the command. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S605).

When a negative determination is made in step S603, or when the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and under the condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, a history setting process is executed for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, details of which will be described later. In step S608, although the details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

FIG. 19 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. FIG. 19(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. b) shows the period in which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level, and FIG. FIG. 19D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the identification start command output using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 19(a). be. At the timing t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at timing t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of . In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management processing (FIG. 18) to enter the identification state. After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 19(a). At the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 19(d). In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls is stored in the first correspondence area 123 a of the correspondence memory 116 . After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

After that, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, similarly to timing t4 to timing t6, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed between timing t16 and timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. At the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 19(c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

As described above, the ninth signal is used to allow the management side CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output. Clearly to the management side CPU 112 that the command is being output even in a configuration in which the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used. It is possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the management output process is executed at step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The managed object counter specifies whether or not there is a managed object that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. In addition, it is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed for any of the managed objects. In one management output process, the management targets for which the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to change the signal output state to the management CPU 112 are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items including whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened/closed. Therefore, the managed counter is first set to "10".

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S702). If it is not HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more, so that there are seven entering ball detection sensors 42a to be managed corresponding to the value of the managed object counter. to 48a (step S703).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is determined. is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "7". If it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a , it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". If the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " 1” is set. As already described, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S708).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to LOW level (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more and the current managed object is any of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the managed object counter among the first to seventh signals It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed after switching the output state of the corresponding signal from LOW level to HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 18) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This period allows the management CPU 112 to reliably identify the state. If the value of the managed object counter is "3" and the current managed object is in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed object counter is "2". When the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is "1", and the current management target is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is closed. If there is an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to LOW level ( step S710).

If a negative determination is made in step S704, if the process of step S706 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S707, if the process of step S708 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S709, or step When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the process after step S702 is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new value of the managed object counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 . Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, if the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

When the value of the check target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 by executing the writing process as described above , in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the combination of the relationship information indicating that it is either of the above is stored as history information. Also, if the value of the check target counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Then, the combination of the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S802, or when the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is checked in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value. It is determined whether or not correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding relationship areas 123h to 123j are filled with information indicating the open/close execution mode, Since either the information indicating that there is one or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, and end information is stored as history information. state. After that, similar to step S805, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S806, when a negative determination is made in step S807, or when the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S812). When the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the process after step S802 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22(a) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22(b) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 22(c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 22(d) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 22E shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117. FIG.

At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 22(a). Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 22(e). After that, at the timing of t2, the signal that was switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 22(a). However, this signal is a signal that is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the LOW level switching is not a target for storing history information. As shown in e), no history information is written.

After that, at each of timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14, as shown in FIG. 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 22(e).

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a hole is during the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t8 at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is included in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a ball during the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t12 at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Accordingly, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 indicates that the front door frame 14 is open. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into one is during the opening of the front door frame 14 .

Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to reading terminal 102 of MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, this data output process is terminated. In this case, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be restarted in order to execute the data output process. Therefore, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since the power operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the rear surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 needs to be It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 by pressing to expose the rear surface of the back pack unit 15.例文帳に追加Under these circumstances, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the game hall to read the history information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102. (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to check both control information and history information, and if control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device will send the control information confirmation A signal is transmitted, and when the confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history are separate may be employed. In this case, when a reading device for checking the control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the reading device, and the reading for history checking is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S902, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64 and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether or not the control information is legitimate or normal. It is possible to do

When a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is being input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. The processing will be described later in detail.

When the process of step S903 or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it continues (step S905: YES), it waits in step S905. As a result, until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output processing is terminated.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 is switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1001: YES), the process for outputting the history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball entering the general winning opening 31 is counted. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the winning ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 is counted. The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out exit that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 was open 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information, which is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1002 and the number of entering balls at the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 is defined as the number of entering balls K1, and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entering balls calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2, the difference between the number of entered balls calculated in step S1004 and the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 is defined as the number of entered balls K3, The difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1007 and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of entering balls K4, and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is defined as the number K5 of entering balls.
・ First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening 33" + K5 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operation port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio "D1")
・Second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K2 entering general winning hole 31/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Ratio of the total number of game balls K3 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Fourth parameter: total number of game balls K4 into the first operation port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D2")
· Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”). After that, the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are used to extract all the history information that is the object of the calculation this time. Calculate the time (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. FIG. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the first output process.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the start information are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the end information, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 that occurred in the open/close execution mode , the number of balls entered into each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1011). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 stores the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the open/close execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is not stored. If the history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating holes 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in step S1007, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls entering K11. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1012 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1011. 32 is defined as the number of hit balls K13, and the difference between the number of hit balls in the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1012 and the number of hit balls in the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of hit balls K13. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entering balls K14.
11th parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
・Twelfth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 entering general winning port 31/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) The ratio of the total number of game balls K13 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 14th parameter: The total number of game balls K14 into the first operation port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D12")
· Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Second operation opening 34" 18th parameter: K13 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32'' / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x ``For winning to general winning port 31 "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) After that, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and end information are stored, the out exit 24a that occurred in the high-frequency support mode, general The number of balls entering each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1015). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the entirety of the consecutively numbered pointer information. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence relationship information indicating that the high-frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-frequency support mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 that stores RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 that is set is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 generated in the state where the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered into each of the second working openings 34 (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of hits is the same as in step S1007, except that the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls entering K21. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1016 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. 32 is defined as the number of balls entered, and the difference between the number of balls entered through the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entered through the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of balls entered into the ball K23. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entering balls K24.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
22nd parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 K22/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 24th parameter: total number of game balls K24/discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D22")
· 25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . After that, clear processing is executed (step S1019). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, the player can enter any of these ball entering parts The game is played while expecting that the game ball will enter the ball. In this configuration, the entry of a game ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section) occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 . As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering portion or the frequency of entering the ball, and the managed information is used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which a game ball enters each history target ball entering section. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information.

All the ball-entering units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are subject to execution of history information storage processing and are subject to management using history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball-entering frequency for any history-targeted club by using the history information. In addition, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering section to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry portion, which triggered the storage of the history information. Thus, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game ball into the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 stores not only the history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry portion, but also the history information indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and whether the high frequency support mode is in progress. and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between each of these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entering section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device, which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, it is possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry section using the read history information.

A reading terminal 102 is provided in the MPU 62 , and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Either the program or the history information is specified as the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 , and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102 . As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 102 is also used, only necessary information can be read.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration regarding the selection of information to be externally output.

An MPU 62 having a main-side ROM 64 storing programs in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to concentrate the signal paths for the reading terminal 102 within the MPU 62 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102 difficult.

A main side CPU 63 that executes processing for paying out a game ball based on entry of a game ball into one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. Separately, a management side CPU 112 is provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing the history information in the history memory 117 . As a result, it becomes possible to manage the manner of entry of game balls into the respective history object entry sections while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from excessively increasing.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62 . This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

The main side CPU 63 stores the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a in each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, the respective signal paths), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to

The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened. are transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the respective signal paths), thereby simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management side CPU 112. becomes possible.

The master side CPU 63 transmits to the management side CPU 112 correspondence relation information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66 . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main side CPU 63 and the history target ball entry section. It is possible to make it

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116 , and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116 . As a result, every time the main side CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. no longer need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main side CPU 63. FIG.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is As a result, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball-entering club corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target ball entry section by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth, eleventh to eighteenth, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. As a result, it is possible to externally output various parameters that are results of calculation using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to each of the conditions of the open/close execution mode and the condition of the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117 . As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and held is erased by overwriting. can be made difficult to occur.

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102 , history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, when reading various parameters to analyze the manner in which a game ball enters the game area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that is the basis for calculating the various parameters.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 transmits output instruction information, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters. , and various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operating power is started, and the reading device is electrically connected. is specified, information of an output instruction is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where the main CPU 63 or the like is executing the process for starting the supply of operating power, that is, before the main CPU 63 starts the normal process for advancing the game, various The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, thereby reducing the processing load of the management IC 66. can be reduced.

History information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which an external output corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is performed through the external terminal plate 97. . As a result, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entering section and the frequency of entering the ball.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Also, the configuration of processing executed by the main CPU 63 to allow the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, these signals are input to different buffers. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as the high-frequency support mode signal. , the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

The 13th buffer 122m receives an open/close execution mode signal, the 14th buffer 122n receives a high frequency support mode signal, the 15th buffer 122o receives a door open signal, and the 15th buffer 122o receives a door open signal. The input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 operates these 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each is input to. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l whose signal types are to be recognized, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1101). After that, an identification start signal output process is executed (step S1102). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the output frequency information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output frequency information is set in the output frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( step S1103). The number-of-outputs counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is output by the main CPU 63 .

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to the signal type is determined. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l are grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry portion corresponding to the types of the signals.

In step S1103, when the value of the output counter for recognition is one of "12", "11" and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a corresponding to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out. is set to "0". Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball-entering portion does not exist and is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0".

After that, output processing of a start opportunity signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level, the output of the start trigger signal is started. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output counter in step S1103, The process advances to step S1106. In step S1106, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the type identification signal is started to be output by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or when the affirmative determination is made in step S1108, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S1109). In the output process, by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level, the output of the termination trigger signal is started. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1110), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S1111: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is finished (step S1201: YES), the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). After that, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S<b>1204 , it is determined whether or not a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 . If the type identification signal has been received (step S1204: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1205). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63 by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception count counter. Stores the value that is specified. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set with "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set with is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the area 123f. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S1208).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the processes after step S1204 are executed. Run. If the identification end signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1209: YES), the history setting process in step S1210 and the external output process in step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory . 28(a) shows the period during which the output state of the first signal is HI level, FIG. 28(b) shows the period during which the output state of the second signal is HI level, and FIG. ) shows the period during which the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(d) shows the period during which the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 28(f) shows the period during which the output state of the high-frequency support mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 28(g) shows the timing for adding 1 to the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114, and FIG. The timing at which the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S1207) is shown.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. , the open/close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of an identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. After that, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management processing (FIG. 27), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 28(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(a) from timing t3 to timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(b) from timing t5 to timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 28(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(c) from timing t8 to timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t9, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 28(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ” information.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(a) from timing t11 to timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the second timing is shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(c) from timing t25 to timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t26, as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information "10 ” information.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 28(c), 28(d) and 28(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are LOW. level to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 27), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 28(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the entering ball section that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are a plurality of types of ball-entering parts with the same number of winning balls, the history information cannot distinguish between the ball-entering parts. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one for each of the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 . This makes it possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information even with the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the second embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, "15" is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to confirmation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door As for the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to this information without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. It's becoming In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a is the information that requires the main side CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a-118g to the management side CPU 112. Become. When the management side CPU 112 recognizes the correspondence information, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the trigger for executing various parameter calculations using history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 131 in addition to the above. In this embodiment, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time when a calculation trigger occurs, as will be described in detail later. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131 . Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

Calculation triggers for various parameters occur before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to differentiate the timing of calculating various parameters from the timing of outputting them to the reading device, thereby distributing the processing load.

In addition, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also various parameters for multiple calculation triggers can be stored together. It is possible to store. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and a ninth buffer is input. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main side CPU 63 to provide the management side CPU 112 with a trigger for calculating various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, similarly to the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the signals. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for executing calculation of various parameters by the management side CPU 112 in response to occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing power failure information storage processing executed by the main side CPU 63 . The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level. Thereafter, after the power failure processing is executed in step S1303, an infinite loop is entered and the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The power failure handling process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1401: YES), in steps S1402 to S1406, the external output in the first embodiment Similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . Further, in step S1407, similarly to step S1007 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated while the front door frame 14 is open. In step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the process for external output (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24). Then, information on the calculation result of step S1408 and information on the calculation result of step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S1411, similarly to step S1011 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various types of balls entered during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S1412, the first Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S1414 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131 . In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, in step S1415, similarly to step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various types of incoming balls during the high-frequency support mode is calculated, and in step S1416, the above-described Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in Embodiment 1, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131 . In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds. After that, an infinite loop is established, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an external output process executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1501: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . In this case, if only the various computation results corresponding to one occurrence of the computation trigger are stored in the computation result memory 131, only the various computation results corresponding to the one occurrence of the computation trigger will be read by the reader. When the memory 131 for operation results is read and various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple operation triggers are stored, the various operation results corresponding to the multiple occurrences of the operation trigger are read by the reading device. .

Thereafter, history information output processing is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it is possible for the operator using the reader to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clear processing is executed (step S1504). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, in the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". As a result, the computation result memory 131 is initialized.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written to the calculation result memory 131 . As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read by a reading device, the various parameters can be collectively read out for a plurality of business days.

When various parameters are written into the computation result memory 131, information that enables specification of the timing at which the various parameters are computed is written into the computation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters were calculated.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the trigger are written in the calculation result memory 131 . This makes it difficult for new history information to be written to history memory 117 when the maximum number of history information that can be stored has already been stored in history memory 117 .

Further, the information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be externally output. . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information to be output to the outside.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within the reference range (step S1603). In particular,
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) are set as parameters to be determined as to whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1603.

Note that the predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as predetermined parameters. for example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number K2 of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, it may be determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range. Alternatively, only predetermined parameters to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated in various calculation processes in step S1602.

If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131 when the predetermined parameters are not within the reference range. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to keep the history thereof in the calculation result memory 131 while suppressing the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 131 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, or if the process of step S1604 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S1605). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After executing the processing of step S1605, an infinite loop is entered, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced, and the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 35(a) is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main side CPU 63. FIG. Note that the trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, addition processing of the entering ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is management output process (FIG. 20), based on the number of times step S705 is executed. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S1703). If it is "500" or more (step S1703: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

FIG. 35(b) is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the calculation process is a process executed instead of the power failure handling process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 18). The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described fifth embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters. The configuration that is different from the fifth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). When a negative determination is made in step S1901, 1 is added to the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1902). The continuation counter counts the period during which a game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying in .

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). If the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set so that The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main CPU 63 should measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, if the process of step S1904 is executed, or if the process of step S1905 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" ( Step S1906: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the operation instruction signal to HI level.

It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the instruction reference value (step S1908). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and an operation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop when the game is started. As a result, it becomes possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being executed from the calculation target of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive the various parameters in the situation in which the game is being executed.

It should be noted that the RTC 115 may be used to measure whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed, instead of using the measurement counter.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that of the above-described first embodiment, and the occurrence or non-occurrence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. It is performed independently by the management side CPU 112 instead of . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the arithmetic processing is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting processing (FIG. 21).

Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be processed is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, addition processing of the incoming ball counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is is specified based on the number of times the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball's entry is stored in the history setting process. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2003). If it is "500" or more (step S2003: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2005). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless computation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number. In other words, the management side CPU 112 independently determines the calculation timing of various parameters. As a result, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced because it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the processing for determining the trigger for calculating various parameters.

<Eighth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 (see FIG. 29), as in the third embodiment. When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation results into the calculation result memory 131 . Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, and a high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating completion, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . sent to.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that it corresponds to one of the ball-entering sections. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode, and the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14. , information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13th correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2101, "13" is set to the check target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level (step S2102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 . Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and 1 is added to the numerical information. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, state information transfer processing is executed (step S2109). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. It is determined whether or not. Then, the status information is written in the management side RAM 114 .

After that, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2110). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, after executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 in step S2109 is read. Then, when the state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored, the history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. While writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. Also, if the state information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is on is stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is on is written. 125 and adds 1 to the pointer information to be written. When the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, when a negative determination is made in step S2106, or when the process of step S2110 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2112). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the process after step S2102 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of pieces of history information that can be stored in the history memory 117 is exceeded and the various parameters cannot be calculated accurately.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information, which has already been the object of computation of various parameters, from becoming the object of computation of various parameters again.

Moreover, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the status information transfer process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141 , a first status area 142 , a second status area 143 and a third status area 144 . Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144, respectively. The second counters 141b to 144b of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the outlet 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the results of ball entry into either the port 33 or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, eighth to eighth signals corresponding to state information such as whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state are input. 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S2201 "10" is set in the check target counter. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counters are buffers to which status information signals are input (step S2202). Specifically, information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal switches from HI level to LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the second state information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 111 . , and when the output state of the ninth signal switches from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and the third state information is erased from the management-side RAM 114 when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the data is stored in one of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, which corresponds to the current value of the check target counter and to which a signal of information different from the status information is input. is changed from "0" to "1", the output state of the input signal from the main side CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, one is added to the counter value corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth total counters 141a to 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is subject to addition, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is subject to addition. .

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is added, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is Subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is Subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding counter for the third state is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the area 144 for the third state of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is Subject to addition.

If the process of step S2203 is executed, if the determination is negative in step S2204, if the determination is negative in step S2210, or if the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this way, the information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored. A process of calculating the number of game balls entering the game ball, a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, and a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 such as step S1005. The calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34, such as step S1006, are not required. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31, such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c 31, it is necessary to perform processing for summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. In addition, the number of balls that occur when the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls that occur in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment. Similarly, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls that occurred in the high-frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 being opened from the number of balls that occurred in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the storage means for storing history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117 unlike the first embodiment. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main side RAM65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I/F 111, and when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the entry history, and Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131 . When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, while various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, the entry history stored in the main side RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process in this embodiment executed by the main side CPU 63 . The ball-entering detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 as a history of winning balls. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is maintained even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 (step S2303).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2305). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2306).

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state where the information "0" is stored to the state where the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2308). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, one game is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electric winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S2311). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S2312). The special electric prize counter is a counter for storing the number of winning balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 as a history of winning balls. The value of the special electric prize counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the special electric winning counter is stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main side RAM 65 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2315). Also, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2316). The first actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first actuation opening 33 as the entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is is stored. Then, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2319). Also, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2320). The second actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second actuation opening 34 as the entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the second operation counter is stored. After that, 1 is added to the value of the one-ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 changes from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the outlet detection sensor 48a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as a history of entered balls. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. retained.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the seventh bit D7 is switched to the state in which the information "1" is stored, one game is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2325).

By executing the ball-entering detection process as described above, the ball-entering history to the out-port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is It is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No output is required. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

In this embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads out the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main side RAM 65, read out the number of balls entered, read out the number of balls entered into the first working port 33 from the first operation counter of the main side RAM 65, read out the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 from the second operation counter of the main side RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read out from the out counter of the main side RAM 65 . Then, the first to eighth parameters described in the first embodiment are calculated using the read numbers of entering balls. However, the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured separately. Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated while including the number of balls that occur when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, since the number of hit balls in the open/close execution mode and the number of hit balls in the high-frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first to eighteenth and twenty-first parameters described in the first embodiment are to the 26th parameter are not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131 . Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

Instead of the management IC 66 independently accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of hits stored as the history of hits in the main RAM 65 is transmitted to the management IC 66 under transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entry history to each ball entry section. ing. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. In addition to the MPU 62 , the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 151 . The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63 . The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and uses information on the history of ball entry into each ball-entering section read out from the history memory 117 to calculate various parameters. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The notification light emitting portion 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control device 60. The board box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting portion 151 can be seen from the outside of the board box 60a. A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that visual confirmation can be made from the outside. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 can be visually checked, so that the notification light emitting unit 151 can be operated without opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the .

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signals are input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121 . In other words, no signals related to ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 outputs to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first buffer counter 152a. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the second buffer counter 152b. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third buffer counter 152c. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the fifth buffer counter 152e. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh buffer counter 152g. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of hitting a ball into one are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level (step S2402). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first buffer 122a is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, addition processing of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S2403). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152 a to 152 o of the history memory 117 . For example, if the check target counter value is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is subject to addition, and if the check target counter value is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is subject to addition.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, or when the process of step S2403 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2405). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the process after step S2402 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 114 store the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152b. Among 152o, the number of counters to be output of the frequency information is set in the management side CPU 112 (step S2502). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, as already described, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, so in step S2502 "7" is set in the output target counter. .

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read out (step S2503). Of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value is read out (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a-123o becomes the object of reading the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counter 152a-152o reads the number of times information. Be eligible. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the target of reading the correspondence information, and the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the target of reading the frequency information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a becomes the target for reading the frequency information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read out in step S2503 and the number of times information read out in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number-of-times information about the correspondence information to be output this time.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output object counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2507). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the process from step S2503 onwards is executed for the output target corresponding to the new value of the output target counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, it is determined whether or not a trigger for calculating various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the output port 24a, the general winning port 31, and the special electric winning as in the fifth embodiment. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the parameter management process is executed first after the supply of operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, various parameters can be calculated by turning the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 off once and then turning it on again. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2601, as will be described later, a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the entry state of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the manner in which the game balls enter the game area PA by generating a calculation trigger each time the total number of game balls entering the game ball reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. becomes.

If a calculation trigger has occurred (step S2601: YES), the entry history is read out from the entry history storage target counter among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117. FIG. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is to be read, by the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64. FIG.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read out in step S2602 and information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the program and data stored in the main ROM 64 to read out the ball entry history read in step S2602, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the first operation port 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two operation ports 34 corresponds, and it is possible to specify information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602. .

Specifically, various parameters calculated in step S2603 are:
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "For winning to general prize opening 31 "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the first range (step S2604). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are within the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2604. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, setting processing of the first notification state is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to set the first notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters 2 range, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to set the second notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 151 emits yellow light.

A negative determination in step S2606 means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emitting state.

The light emission state set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 is maintained until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. continue until In addition, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main side RAM 65 is set. Light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided for notifying contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 . As a result, since the pachinko machine 10 itself notifies the contents corresponding to the various parameters, the manager of the game hall or the like does not have to read out the information stored in the history memory 117, and the number of game balls in the game area PA is increased. It is possible to grasp the manner of entering the ball.

A main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a is provided with an MPU 62 and a notification light emitting section 151. As shown in FIG. As a result, unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151 can be made difficult.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed by the main side CPU 63 instead of the management side CPU 112 . This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the content of notification by the notification light emitting unit 151 .

When the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the first range, it becomes the first notification state, and when the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the second range, it becomes the second notification state, and the calculation result of various parameters becomes The third notification state occurs when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. In other words, instead of notifying the various parameters as they are, the content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151 .

Note that even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is continued by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the ball entry state of the game ball in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

Further, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Alternatively, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light so as to be in a light-emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball entered the previous business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration in which the notification light emitting section 151 is used. may be Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal plate 97 .

The special figure display section 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the general figure display section 38a of the general figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting section 151. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or other range as in the above embodiment , Immediately after the start of supply of operating power, it may be configured to perform notification corresponding to the calculation result in the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the normal figure display unit 38a is satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which the process is temporarily interrupted when the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it is possible to double use the special figure display section 37a or the normal figure display section 38a as the notification means for notifying the entry state of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 from the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 . In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 .

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration for providing the management IC 66 with information on each ball entry result. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main side CPU 63 and the management IC 66. As shown in FIG.

The detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Also, the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Also, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching from the middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching from the middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main side CPU 63. FIG. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Since there is no need to do this, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branching point and the branching routes SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, according to the position of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) in the depth direction on the game board 233 (FIG. 50), left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are provided to distribute the course downstream of the game ball B1 to the left and right. (FIG. 50) is provided, which is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment are basically omitted.

The configuration of the game board 233 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50 is a front view of the game board 233. FIG. The game board 233 in this embodiment differs from the game board 24 in the first embodiment in that the game area PA is formed not only on the left side of the surface but also on the right side. As shown in FIG. 50, the game board 233 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 241, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure display section 225, a general figure display section 226, and the like. is provided. In addition, a total of three general winning holes 241 are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 233, and one through gate 35 is provided on each of the left and right sides. Other openings are provided one by one.

Detection sensors are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the general winning openings 241, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and each through gate 35. All of these detection sensors are provided on the back side of the game board 233, and the detection results are output to the main controller 60 (FIG. 5). As the detection sensor, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor that detects changes in the magnetic field is used. Optional, for example an optical sensor may be used. Here, the game ball B1 is a steel sphere with a diameter of 11 mm.

When the occurrence of balls entering the general winning opening 241, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is detected, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are given to the player as prize balls. Specifically, three prize balls are generated when a ball enters the first operating port 33 and when a ball enters the second operating port 34 . Further, the general prize winning port 241 in this embodiment plays the same role as the general prize winning port 31 in the first embodiment, and when a ball enters the general prize winning port 241, 10 prizes are awarded. A ball is generated. Also, when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are generated. However, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and the number of prize balls of the operation ports 33 and 34 is different, for example, the number of prize balls of the second operation port 34 is larger than the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33. may be Also, the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is not limited to the configuration in which the number of prize balls is larger than the number of other prize balls.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 233, and game balls B1 that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Also, the game board 233 is provided with a large number of nails 228, 213, 214 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball B1.

The special figure display unit 225 and the normal figure display unit 226 are provided in a predetermined range as a display unit. The area where the display unit is installed is an area inside the game area PA partitioned using the inner rail portion 25, and the game ball B1 is arranged so that the game ball B1 does not flow forward from the front surface of the display unit. This is the area where the inflow of B1 is restricted. And the special figure display part 225 and the normal figure display part 226 are provided with respect to the front surface of a display unit. As a result, although the various display units 225 and 226 are provided in the game area PA, the game ball B1 is prevented from flowing down in front of them, and the visibility from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured.

In the game board 233, the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 constitute a guide rail. A game ball shooting mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is provided below the game board 233, and the game ball B1 shot by applying force from the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) of the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is guided by the above guidance. It is designed to be guided to the upper part of the game area PA by rails. The game ball shooting mechanism 27 includes an operating base projecting forward and an operating handle rotatably supported by the operating base. The shooting intensity of the game ball B1 from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is adjusted by.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the front door frame 14 (FIG. 2) is provided so that the game board 233 covers the entire front side of the inner frame 13 (FIG. 2). A window portion 51 (FIG. 1) is formed in the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel 52 (FIG. 1). The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A center frame 252 is arranged on the game board 233 so as to define an opening 233a through which the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 3) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 that defines the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 233a.

Next, the arrangement of the nails 228, 213, 214 provided on the game board 233 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, the game board 233 is provided with a large number of nails 228, 213, 214. As shown in FIG. Here, the nails provided on the game board 233 of this embodiment consist of metal obstacle nails 228, which are round nails used in conventional pachinko machines, and resin-made first left and right distribution members 215. There are three types: a first left-right dividing nail 213 having a first left-right dividing nail 213 and a second left-right dividing nail 214 having a second left-right dividing member 231 made of resin. Details of the laterally distributed nails 213 and 214 will be described later.

The metal obstruction nail 228 includes a cylindrical trunk portion, a head portion provided on the base end side of the trunk portion, a conical pointed portion formed on the distal end side of the trunk portion, consists of The obstacle nail 228 is inserted into the game board 233 in such a manner that the cusp is buried deeper than the surface of the game board 233, and part of the trunk and the head protrude from the surface of the game board 233. is provided in The length from the surface of the game board 233 to the free end of the obstacle nail 228 (the front end of the pointed head) is 17 mm. Here, the front side is the side of the window panel 52 that is closer to the player, and the back side is the side of the game board 233 that is farther from the player.

The distance from the front surface of the game board 233 to the rear surface of the window panel 52 is 18 mm. Also, as described above, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm. Therefore, there is a margin of 7 mm in the game area PA in which the game ball B1 can move in the depth direction. The position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA is the position at which the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) of the game ball shooting mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) comes into contact when the solenoid 27c (FIG. 2) applies force to the game ball B1 and shoots it. In addition, the game ball B1 collides with the roof unit 253 on the game board 233, decorative members, etc. in the process of flowing down the game area PA.

The range in which the center of the game ball B1 can be positioned is a range from a place 5.5 mm away from the surface of the game board 233 toward the window panel 52 to a place 12.5 mm away. Below, the range in which the game ball B1 can contact the nails 228, 213, 214 on the game board 233 is defined as the contactable range of the game ball B1. The game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA can collide with the obstructing nail 228 in the course of flowing down both when it is positioned on the game board 233 side and when it is positioned on the window panel 52 side. The course of the game ball B1 after collision is changed by the obstacle nail 228. - 特許庁

As described above, the game board 233 has the game area PA formed not only on the left side of the game board 233 but also on the right side. It is On the other hand, resin-made left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are arranged as nails constituting guide nail groups 211 and 212 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation ports 33 and 34 on the game board 233 . Here, the guide nail groups 211 and 212 are the left side guide nail group 211 and the game board 233. The left side guide nail group 211 is composed of seven first left and right divided nails 213 arranged in a row at equal intervals on the left lower portion of the game board 233. It is a general term for a right guide nail group 212 consisting of seven second left and right split nails 214 arranged in a row at equal intervals on the lower right side of the .

The left guide nail group 211 is a nail row in which the first left and right dividing nail 213 located on the right side is provided below the first left and right dividing nail 213 adjacent to the left side. The row of nails extends in a direction inclined downward to the right, and the angle between the row direction of the left guide nail group 211 and the horizontal direction is 30°. This angle is an angle that allows the game ball B1 to be guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 while gradually lowering the height of the game ball B1. Actuating openings 33 and 34 are present on the extension line of the left guide nail group 211 in the row direction. The space above the left guide nail group 211 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 so that the game ball B1 can pass therethrough. In addition, since the first left and right dividing nails 213 constituting the left guide nail group 211 are arranged at intervals slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 can be pushed out from the gap between the first left and right dividing nails 213. can fall downwards. When the game ball B1 loses its speed in the horizontal direction on the first left and right dividing nail 213, it falls downward from the gap between the first left and right dividing nails 213, so that the game ball B1 is first left and right dividing. It does not rest on nail 213 .

The right guide nail group 212 is a row of nails in which a second laterally distributed nail 214 located on the left side is provided below the second laterally distributed nail 214 adjacent to the right side. The nail row is a row extending in a direction inclined downward to the left, and the angle formed by the row direction of the right guide nail group 212 and the horizontal direction is 30°. This angle is an angle that allows the game ball B1 to be guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 while gradually lowering the height of the game ball B1. Actuating openings 33 and 34 are present on the extension line of the right guide nail group 212 in the column direction. The space above the right guide nail group 212 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 so that the game ball B1 can pass therethrough. In addition, since the second left and right dividing nails 214 that constitute the right guide nail group 212 are arranged at an interval that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is pushed out from the gap between the second left and right dividing nails 214. can fall downwards. When the game ball B1 loses its speed in the horizontal direction on the second left and right dividing nail 214, it falls downward from the gap between the second left and right dividing nails 214, so that the game ball B1 is divided into the second left and right. It does not rest on nail 214 .

Next, the structure of the first laterally split nail 213 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51(a) to 51(c). FIG. 51(a) is a perspective view of the first left-right dividing nail 213. FIG. As shown in FIG. 51(a), the first laterally divided nail 213 is an elongated nail extending in the direction of the axis 213c. The first left-right distribution nail 213 is a first left-right distribution member 215 that distributes the game balls B1 falling from above and colliding in the left-right direction, and the first left-right distribution member 215 is fixed to the surface of the game board 233. and a fixing member 216 for The first left and right distribution member 215 is a substantially quadrangular prism-shaped resin member formed extending in the direction of the axis 213c. It has two sorting surfaces 217a and 218a.

As shown in FIG. 50, the first laterally distributing nail 213 is arranged such that the axis 213c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233 and the first laterally distributing member 215 protrudes from the surface of the game board 233. It is fixed to the game board 233 . The length dimension of the first left and right distribution member 215 in the direction of the axis 213c is 17 mm, and the first left and right distribution member 215 protrudes 17 mm into the game area PA at the first left and right distribution nail 213 fixed to the game board 233. ing. The first left-right dividing nail 213 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA can collide with the first left and right dividing nail 213, and the game ball B1 located on the front side can also collide. In the following description, in the first left-right dividing nail 213 and the second left-right dividing nail 214 fixed to the game board 233, the end fixed to the game board 233 is described as a fixed end, and the game area PA The end that protrudes into the is described as the free end.

As shown in FIG. 51( a ), the first left and right distribution member 215 includes a first distribution portion 217 extending in the direction of the axis 213 c and a free end side of the first distribution portion 217 . and a second distributing portion 218 formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 213c so as to be continuous with the side surface of the . In a state in which the first left-right dividing nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233 , the boundary surface between the first dividing part 217 and the second dividing part 218 is parallel to the surface of the game board 233 .

Since the length dimension of the first distribution portion 217 in the direction of the axis 213c is 9 mm, in a state where the first left and right distribution nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233, the first distribution portion 217 is located in the game area PA. It protrudes in the inner half of the Moreover, the length dimension from the left end to the right end of the first distribution portion 217 is 7 mm, which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter. The first allocating portion 217 has, as its upper surface, a first allocating surface 217a formed in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the first allocating portion 217 . The first distribution surface 217a is inclined downward to the right, and bounces the game ball B1 falling from above and colliding with it upward to the right.

In addition, since the length dimension of the second distribution portion 218 in the direction of the axis 213c is 8 mm, the second distribution portion 218 can It protrudes over most of the near side half of the area PA. The length dimension from the left end to the right end of the second distribution portion 218 is 7 mm, which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter. The second distribution portion 218 has, as its upper surface, a second distribution surface 218a formed in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the second distribution portion 218 . The second distribution surface 218a is inclined downward to the left, and rebounds the game ball B1 falling from above and colliding with it upward to the left.

Here, the barrel diameter of the barrel portion of the metal obstacle nail 228 (FIG. 50) is 2 mm. As described above, the first left and right distribution member 215 is made of resin, but by making the size around the axis 213c larger than the barrel portion of the obstruction nail 228, it does not break even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides with it. It has the strength not to

The first left/right distribution member 215 has vertical side surfaces at both the fixed end and the free end. Of these, a first fixing hole 215a for inserting and fixing the fixing member 216 is formed in the fixed end surface 215b, which is the side surface on the fixed end side. The shape of the first fixing hole 215a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51(b) and 51(c). 51(b) is a plan view of the first horizontal distribution member 215, and FIG. 51(c) is a rear view of the first horizontal distribution member 215. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), the first fixing hole 215a has an opening in the fixed end surface 215b of the first left and right distribution member 215, and extends from the fixed end of the first left and right distribution member 215 to the vicinity of the free end. , and the depth of the first fixing hole 215a is 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 51(c), the first fixing hole 215a is formed so as to occupy more than half the volume of the first left/right distribution member 215. As shown in FIG. The first fixing hole 215 a is formed at a sufficient distance from the top, bottom, left, and right side surfaces of the first left-right distribution member 215 so as to maintain the strength of the first left-right distribution member 215 .

Next, the state in which the first left-right dividing nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b). 52(a) is a perspective view of the fixing member 216 for fixing the first left/right distribution member 215 to the game board 233, and FIG. 52(b) is a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. Fig. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first left and right splitting nail 213 in this case.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the fixing member 216 includes a cylindrical fixing barrel portion 216a with a length of 30 mm in the direction of the axis 213c and a cone with a length of 5 mm in the direction of the axis 213c. , and has a length dimension capable of stably supporting the first left and right distribution member 215 protruding from the surface of the game board 233 . The body diameter of the fixing member 216 is the same as the inner diameter of the first fixing hole 215a, and the fixing member 216 can be fitted in such a manner that the surface of the fixing member 216 is in close contact with the inner surface of the first fixing hole 215a.

The first laterally distributing member 215 and the fixing member 216 that constitute the first laterally distributing nail 213 are separable. The fixing member 216 is fixed to the game board 233 by itself by applying an impact to the free end with a hammer or the like. Then, the first horizontal distribution member 215 is fixed to the fixing member 216 by fitting the projecting portion of the fixing member 216 into the first fixing hole 215a. As a result, the first left-right dividing nail 213 is fixed to the game board 233 .

As shown in FIG. 52(b), in the fixing member 216, the entire fixing point 216b and part of the fixing trunk shaft 216a are buried deeper than the surface of the game board 233. At the same time, the remaining portion of the fixing barrel portion 216a is fixed to the game board 233 in such a manner as to protrude from the surface of the game board 233 in a substantially vertical direction. In the fixing member 216 fixed to the game board 233, the length dimension of the protrusion from the surface of the game board 233 is a dimension capable of stably supporting the first horizontal distribution member 215. Specifically, is 15 mm. By fixing the surface of the protrusion and the inner surface of the first fixing hole 215a with an adhesive, the first left and right distribution member 215 is attached to the game board 233 with the distribution surfaces 217a and 218a facing upward. Fixed.

Next, the course after collision of the game ball B1 that collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. First, the case where the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 217a will be described. FIG. 53(a) is an end view of a cut surface of the first left-right dividing nail 213 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. FIG. As shown in FIG. 53(a), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 233 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 233 and the window panel 52 collides with the first distribution surface 217a. do.

FIG. 53(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rebound direction of the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides with the first distribution surface 217a, and FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the bounce direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the distribution surface 217a. As shown in FIG. 53(b), on the far side of the game area PA, the first distribution surface 217a is inclined downward toward the right, so that the first distribution surface 217a and the first distribution surface 217a flow down from above. A drag having an upward component and a rightward component acts on the colliding game ball B1. As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds upward to the right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53(c), the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side and colliding with the first distribution surface 217a is also subjected to a drag having an upward component and a rightward component. As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds upward to the right. In this case, since the game ball B1 before the collision already has a rightward velocity component, the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the upper left side and collided is more rightward than the game ball B1 that has fallen from directly above and collided. make great strides in

Next, the case where the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 218a will be described. FIG. 54(a) is an end view of a cut surface of the first left-right dividing nail 213 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233. FIG. As shown in FIG. 54(a), the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 233 and the window panel 52 (the window panel 52 side) collides with the second distribution surface 218a. do.

FIG. 54(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rebound direction of the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides with the second distribution surface 218a, and FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rebound direction of the game ball B1 that collides with the two-division surface 218a. As shown in FIG. 54(b), on the far side of the game area PA, the second distribution surface 218a is inclined downward toward the left, so that the second distribution surface 218a flows down from above. A drag having an upward component and a leftward component acts on the colliding game ball B1. As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds upward to the left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side and colliding with the second distribution surface 218a is also subjected to a drag having an upward component and a leftward component. In this case, since the rightward velocity component of the game ball B1 before the collision is affected by the leftward component of the drag received by the collision and decreases, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces slightly upward to the right.

Next, the structure of the second laterally distributed nail 214 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55(a) to (c). FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the second left-right dividing nail 214. FIG. As shown in FIG. 55(a), the second laterally divided nail 214 is an elongated nail extending in the direction of the axis 214c. The second left-right distribution nail 214 is a second left-right distribution member 231 that distributes the game balls B1 falling from above and colliding in the left-right direction, and the second left-right distribution member 231 is fixed to the surface of the game board 233. and a fixing member 216 for The second left and right distribution member 231 is a substantially quadrangular prism-shaped resin member formed extending in the direction of the axis 214c. It has two sorting surfaces 232a and 234a.

As shown in FIG. 50, the second laterally distributing nail 214 is arranged such that the axis 214c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 233 and the second laterally distributing member 231 protrudes from the surface of the game board 233. It is fixed to the game board 233 . The length of the second left and right distribution member 231 in the direction of the axis 214c is 17 mm, and the second left and right distribution nail 214 fixed to the game board 233 protrudes 17 mm into the game area PA. ing. The second right and left dividing nail 214 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA can collide with the second left and right dividing nail 214, and the game ball B1 located on the front side can also collide.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), the second left/right distribution member 231 includes a first distribution portion 232 formed to extend in the direction of the axis 214c, and a free end side of the first distribution portion 232. and a second distributing portion 234 formed so as to extend in the direction of the axis 214c so as to be continuous with the side surface of the second distributing portion 234. In a state where the second left-right dividing nail 214 is fixed to the game board 233 , the boundary surface between the first dividing part 232 and the second dividing part 234 is parallel to the surface of the game board 233 .

Since the length dimension in the direction of the axis 214c of the first distributing portion 232 is 9 mm, in a state where the second left and right distributing nail 214 is fixed to the game board 233, the first distributing portion 232 is located in the game area PA. It protrudes in the inner half of the In addition, the first allocating portion 232 has a length dimension of 7 mm which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter in the horizontal direction. The first allocating portion 232 has, as its upper surface, a first allocating surface 232a formed in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the first allocating portion 232 . The first distribution surface 232a is inclined downward to the left, and rebounds the game ball B1 falling from above and colliding with it upward to the left.

In addition, since the length dimension of the second distribution portion 234 in the direction of the axis 214c is 8 mm, the second distribution portion 234 is in a state where the second left and right distribution nail 214 is fixed to the game board 233. It protrudes over most of the near side half of the area PA. In addition, the second allocating portion 234 has a length dimension of 7 mm which is longer than the radius of the game ball B1 and shorter than the diameter in the horizontal direction. The second distribution portion 234 has, as its upper surface, a second distribution surface 234a formed in a manner extending from the left end to the right end of the second distribution portion 234 . The second distribution surface 234a is inclined downward to the right, and bounces the game ball B1 falling from above and colliding with it upward to the right.

The second left and right distribution member 231 is made of resin, but by making the size around the axis 214c larger than the body shaft part of the metal obstacle nail 228, it does not break even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides. It has strength.

The second left-right distribution member 231 has vertical side surfaces at both the fixed end and the free end. A second fixing hole 231a for inserting and fixing the fixing member 216 is formed in the fixed end surface 231b, which is the side surface on the fixed end side. The shape of the second fixing hole 231a will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c). 55(b) is a plan view of the second left/right distribution member 231, and FIG. 55(c) is a rear view of the second left/right distribution member 231. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the second fixing hole 231a has an opening in the fixed end surface 231b of the second left/right distribution member 231, and extends from the fixed end of the second left/right distribution member 231 to the vicinity of the free end. The second fixing hole 231a is a cylindrical hole formed in a manner extending over the entire length of the hole, and the depth of the second fixing hole 231a is 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 55(c), the second fixing hole 231a is formed large so as to occupy more than half the volume of the second left/right distribution member 231. As shown in FIG. The second fixing hole 231 a is formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the second left-right distribution member 231 so as to maintain the strength of the second left-right distribution member 231 .

The fixing member 216 constituting the second left-right dividing nail 214 is the same member as the fixing member 216 constituting the above-described first left-right dividing nail 213, and the second left-right dividing member 231 is the first left-right dividing member. It is fixed to the game board 233 in the same manner as member 215 . Specifically, the second laterally distributing member 231 and the fixing member 216 constituting the second laterally distributing nail 214 are separable. The fixing member 216 is fixed to the game board 233 by itself by applying an impact to the free end with a hammer or the like. Then, the second left-right distribution member 231 is fixed to the fixing member 216 using an adhesive in such a manner that the protruding portion of the fixing member 216 fits into the second fixing hole 231a. As a result, the second left-right dividing nail 214 is fixed to the game board 233 with the dividing surfaces 232a and 234a facing upward.

Next, the case where the game ball B1 collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 will be described. The first distribution surface 232 a of the second laterally distributing nail 214 has the same inclination as the second distributing surface 218 a of the first laterally distributing nail 213 . Specifically, on the back side of the game area PA, the first distribution surface 232a is inclined downward toward the left, so the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides with the first distribution surface 232a A drag force having an upward component and a leftward component acts on . As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds upward to the left.

Also, the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper right side and colliding with the first distribution surface 232a is also subjected to a drag having an upward component and a leftward component. In this case, since the rightward velocity component of the game ball B1 before the collision is affected by the leftward component of the drag received by the collision and decreases, the game ball B1 after the collision bounces slightly upward to the right.

Also, the second distribution surface 234 a of the second laterally distributing nail 214 has the same inclination as the first distributing surface 217 a of the first laterally distributing nail 213 . Specifically, on the front side of the game area PA, the second distribution surface 234a is inclined downward toward the right, so the game ball B1 that falls from above and collides with the second distribution surface 234a A drag force having an upward component and a rightward component acts on . As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds upward to the right.

Also, the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper right side and colliding with the second distribution surface 234a is also subjected to a drag having an upward component and a rightward component. As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds upward to the right. In this case, since the game ball B1 before the collision already has a rightward velocity component, the game ball B1 that has flowed down from the upper left side and collided is more rightward than the game ball B1 that has fallen from directly above and collided. make great strides in

Next, the difference between the course of the game ball B1 after colliding with the left and right splitting nails 213 and 214 and the course of the game ball B1 after colliding with the obstacle nail 228 is shown in FIGS. to explain. FIG. 56(a) is a table showing the direction of the resistance received by the game ball B1 colliding with the first left/right dividing nail 213, and FIG. FIG. 56(c) is a table showing the direction of the drag received by the game ball B1 colliding with the obstacle nail 228. FIG.

First, the first laterally distributed nail 213 will be described. As shown in FIG. 56(a), a game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a on the far side of the game area PA is subjected to a drag force having a rightward component and an upward component. A drag having a leftward component and an upward component acts on the game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 218a on the front side of the PA. In the first left and right dividing nail 213, when the game ball B1 collides with the left side of the first left and right dividing nail 213 and when the game ball B1 collides with the right side of the first left and right dividing nail 213 , the direction of the drag acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision is the same.

Next, the second laterally distributed nail 214 will be described. As shown in FIG. 56(b), a game ball B1 that collides with the first sorting surface 232a on the far side of the game area PA is subjected to a drag force having a leftward component and an upward component. On the game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 234a on the front side of the game area PA of the two left and right distribution nails 214, a drag force having a rightward component and an upward component acts. In the second left and right dividing nail 214, when the game ball B1 collides with the left side of the second left and right dividing nail 214, and when the game ball B1 collides with the right side of the second left and right dividing nail 214 , the direction of the drag acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision is the same.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the game ball B1 that has collided with the left surface of the obstacle nail 228 is subjected to a drag having a leftward component and an upward component, and the obstacle nail 228 On the game ball B1 that has collided with the right side of the ball, a drag force having a rightward component and an upward component acts. In the obstacle nail 228, when the game ball B1 collides with the back side of the obstacle nail 228 and when the game ball B1 collides with the front side of the obstacle nail 228, the resistance acting on the game ball B1 at the time of collision is determined. the direction is the same.

By using the left and right splitting pegs 213 and 214 in this manner, the direction of the resistance acting on the game ball B1 that collides with the left and right splitting pegs 213 and 214 varies depending on the position in the depth direction in the game area PA. By doing so, the course of the game ball B1 after collision can be made different. For this reason, compared to the obstacle nail 228 in which the course after collision of the game ball B1 does not change whether the game ball B1 is positioned on the front side or the back side of the game area PA, the It is possible to disperse the game balls B1 in such a manner as to increase the variation of movement of the game balls B1. Thus, by preventing the movement of the game ball B1 from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The behavior pattern of the game ball B1 on a conventional game board in which only the obstacle nail 228 is arranged as a nail that distributes the path of the game ball B1 is a behavior pattern in which the game ball B1 collides with the left side of the obstacle nail 228 and rebounds to the left side. , and that the game ball B1 that collides with the right side of the obstacle nail 228 rebounds to the right side. On the other hand, by arranging the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 on the game board 233, the behavior pattern of the game ball B1 in which the game ball B1 colliding with the left side of the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 rebounds to the right side, Also, a behavior pattern of the game ball B1, in which the game ball B1 collided with the right side of the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 and rebounds to the left side, can be added as a new behavior pattern of the game ball B1. By increasing the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and preventing the movement of the game ball B1 from becoming monotonous, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

As already explained, when the game ball B1 collides with the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214, the course of the game ball B1 after the collision changes according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction. Further, as already explained, in the game board 233 (FIG. 50) of the present embodiment, the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are guide nail groups provided for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation openings 33 and 34. 211 and 212.

The behavior when the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the first left-right dividing peg 213 constituting the left guide peg group 211 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a). FIG. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the back side on the left guide nail group 211. FIG. As described above, the seven first left and right dividing nails 213 belonging to the left guide nail group 211 are arranged in a row toward the operation openings 33 and 34 .

As described above, the interval between the first left and right dividing nails 213 constituting the left guiding nail group 211 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As shown in FIG. 57(a), the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213, receives a right upper right direction drag force, and bounces to. After the collision, since the rightward velocity component of the game ball B1 increases, the game ball B1 drops downward from the gap immediately to the right of the first left-right dividing nail 213 that has collided, and is recovered from the out port 24a. less likely to In addition, since the game ball B1 travels in the right direction after the collision increases, the number of times the game ball B1 collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 required to reach the operation openings 33 and 34 decreases. However, the possibility that the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the two first left and right dividing nails 213 and is collected from the out port 24a is reduced. Thus, the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA is guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 by the left guide nail group 211 with a high probability.

Next, the behavior in the case where the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 constituting the left guide nail group 211 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(b). . FIG. 57(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the near side on the left guide nail group 211. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the game ball B1 positioned on the near side of the game area PA collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213, receives an upper left drag force, and bounces small to After the collision, the rightward velocity component of the game ball B1 decreases due to the influence of the drag force in the opposite direction. For this reason, the possibility that the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap provided immediately to the right of the first left-right dividing nail 213 that collides with it and is recovered from the out port 24a increases. In addition, since the rightward velocity component of the game ball B1 is reduced due to the collision, the number of times the game ball B1 collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 required to reach the operation openings 33 and 34 increases. do. In addition, since the rightward velocity component of the game ball B1 decreases with each collision, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the two first left and right dividing nails 213 and is recovered from the out port 24a. increases with each collision. Thus, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA is guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 by the left guide nail group 211 is low.

Next, FIG. 58(a) shows the behavior of the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 constituting the right guide nail group 212. will be explained based on FIG. 58(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the back side on the right guide nail group 212. FIG. As described above, the seven second left and right dividing nails 214 belonging to the right guide nail group 212 are arranged in a row toward the operation openings 33 and 34 .

As described above, the interval between the second right and left dividing nails 214 constituting the right guiding nail group 212 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As shown in FIG. 58(a), the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the first distribution surface 232a of the second left-right distribution nail 214, receives an upper left drag force, and bounces to. After the collision, the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 increases under the influence of the drag force in the same direction. As a result, the leftward moving distance of the game ball B1 increases, and the game ball B1 drops downward from the gap provided immediately to the left of the second left-right dividing nail 214 that collides with it, and is recovered from the out port 24a. less likely to be Further, after the collision, the game ball B1 moves leftward by an increased distance, so that the number of collisions with the second left-right dividing nail 214 necessary to reach the operation openings 33 and 34 decreases, and the game ball B1 The possibility that B1 falls downward from the gap between the two second left-right dividing nails 214 and is recovered from the out port 24a is reduced. Thus, the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA is guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 by the right guide nail group 212 with a high probability.

Next, FIG. 58(b) shows the behavior of the game ball B1 when the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 constituting the right guide nail group 212. will be explained based on FIG. 58(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the front side on the right guide nail group 212. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the game ball B1 positioned on the near side of the game area PA collides with the second distribution surface 234a of the second left and right distribution nail 214, receives an upper right drag force, and bounces small to After the collision, the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 is reduced under the influence of the rightward drag force, so the game ball B1 moves downward from the gap provided immediately to the right of the second left-right dividing nail 214 that has collided. It is more likely that it will drop to the outside and be recovered from the out port 24a. In addition, after the collision, the leftward movement distance of the game ball B1 is reduced, so the number of collisions with the second left-right dividing nail 214 necessary for the game ball B1 to reach the operation openings 33, 34 increases. do. Since the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 decreases each time it collides, the game ball B1 can fall downward from the gap between the two second left-right dividing nails 214 and be recovered from the out port 24a. sex increases. Thus, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA is guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 by the right guide nail group 212 is low.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 57(a), (b) and FIGS. 58(a), (b), in the vicinity of the upstream side of the first actuation opening 33, there is a high probability that the game ball B1 that collides with the actuation opening 33, Four obstacle pegs 228 are provided to allow 34 wins. The four obstacle nails 228 bounce back the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and the game ball B1 located on the front side in the same manner. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 positioned on the near side of the game area PA is guided to the obstructing nail 228 near the first operating opening 33 by the guide nail groups 211 and 212, it is activated with a high probability. Win 33,34.

Thus, by using the obstacle nail 228 as the nail provided in the vicinity of the first operation opening 33, the game ball B1 reaching the vicinity of the operation openings 33, 34 has a high probability of winning, leaving the player with a sense of security. However, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operation holes 33, 34 can be differentiated according to the position in the depth direction of the game area PA.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The left and right sorting nails 213 and 214 are provided with two sorting surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a and 234a with different inclinations, and the two sorting surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a and 234a are left and right sorted in such a manner that they face upward. Nails 213 and 214 are arranged on the game board 233 . As a result, when the game ball B1 flowing down from above collides with the first distribution surfaces 217a and 232a, the game ball B1 bounces back in a manner different from the case where the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surfaces 218a and 234a. . By using the left and right splitting nails 213 and 214, the course of the game ball B1 after collision can be changed in a mode according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA. By increasing the pattern of dispersing the game balls B1 in the game area PA, the movement of the game balls B1 in the game area PA can be avoided from becoming monotonous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, by using left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 for the nails constituting the guide nail groups 211 and 212 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation openings 33 and 34, the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is reduced. The difference in position can be reflected in the result of the game. Compared with a conventional game machine in which the difference in the depth direction position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA cannot be reflected in the result of the game, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is increased to improve the amusement of the game. be able to.

The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the left and right resin distribution members 215 and 231 constituting the left and right distribution nails 213 and 214 are greater than the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the metal obstacle nail 228 . Large fixing holes 215a and 231a are formed in the left and right distribution members 215 and 231, and metal fixing members 216 are fitted in the fixing holes 215a and 231a. In this way, since the resin member is reinforced with the metal member over the entire area, the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 have durability that does not break even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides. there is When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall for a long time, the frequency of maintenance for the left and right dividing nails 213, 214 can be minimized.

On the game board 233, the laterally distributed nails 213 and 214 occupying a larger area than the obstacle nail 228 are used only for some of the nails provided on the game board 233 that are greatly related to the game result. , and obstructing nails 228 are used for the remaining nails. For this reason, unlike the case where the left and right distributed nails 213 and 214 are used for all the nails provided on the game board 233, the number of nails that can be provided on the game board 233 is ensured, and the game can be played in the game area PA. The game result can be changed according to the position of the ball B1 in the depth direction.

In addition, since the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are provided with fixing holes 215a and 231a, the protruding portions of the fixing member 216 previously fixed to the game board 233 are fitted into the fixing holes 215a and 231a. , the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 can be fixed. The laterally distributed nails 213 and 214 are fixed to the fixing member 216 with an adhesive. At this time, the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are rotated around the fixing member 216 until the adhesive hardens so that the dividing surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a and 234a of the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 face upward. Since it can be adjusted to face, the game ball B1 flowing down from above can collide with the distribution surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a and 234a.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
- In the game board 233 (Fig. 50) of the thirteenth embodiment described above, the regions where the groups of guide nails 211 and 212 are arranged may be constituted by detachable members. A case where the left guide nail group 211 is detachable will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is an enlarged view of the front lower left portion of the game board 235 which is composed of the left guiding member 255 which is a base on which the left guiding nail group 211 can be attached and detached, and the seven first left and right dividing nails 213 .

As shown in FIG. 59, the seven first left and right dividing nails 213 are fixed to the left guide member 255 . The left guiding member 255 is formed with three fixing protrusions 255a that allow the left guiding member 255 to be screwed to the game board 233. The fixing protrusions 255a have screws for screwing. A through hole is formed. In addition, the game board 235 is formed with a hole in which the left guide member 255 is fitted without a gap. formed. A screw hole for screwing the left guide member 255 is formed in the recess.

In the process of assembling the pachinko machine 10, after fixing the seven first left and right dividing nails 213 to the single left guide member 255 that has been removed, the left guide member 255 is attached to the game board 235, and the protrusion for fixing is fixed. The portion 255a is screwed into the recessed portion of the game board 233. As shown in FIG. In this way, by integrating the seven first left and right splitting nails 213 and making it possible to attach them to the game board 235 at the same time, the first left and right splitting nails 213 can be fixed to the game board 235. The working efficiency can be improved, and the fine adjustment of the attachment angle of the first laterally distributed nail 213 can be facilitated. In addition, in this configuration, the left guide member 255 and the first left and right dividing nail 213 fixed to the left guide member 255 may be integrally formed.

- In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the left and right splitting nails 213 and 214 may be provided as so-called dead nails positioned in the vicinity of the upstream side of the first operation opening 33 . A configuration in which the right and left dividing nails 213 and 214 are provided in the vicinity of the first operation opening 33 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a front view of a game board 236 on which left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are arranged in the vicinity of the first operation opening 33, and an enlarged view of the operation openings 33 and 34 of the game board 236 and their surroundings. Four laterally distributed nails 213 and 214 are arranged in the vicinity of the upstream side of the operation ports 33 and 34 .

Specifically, a second left/right dividing nail 214 is arranged near the upper left of the operation ports 33 and 34, and a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided on the left side of the second left/right dividing nail 214. A first left and right splitting nail 213 is arranged with a space between them. Since the gap between the two left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 arranged in the upper left vicinity of the operation openings 33 and 34 has a width through which the game ball B1 can pass, the game ball B1 can pass through the two nails. It is configured so that it does not stay caught between the left and right splitting nails 213 and 214 . In addition, a first left-right dividing nail 213 is arranged near the upper right of the operation ports 33 and 34, and a space larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided on the right side of the first left-right dividing nail 213. A second laterally distributed nail 214 is arranged at the end. Since the gap between the two left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper right of the operation openings 33 and 34 has a width through which the game ball B1 can pass, the game ball B1 can pass through the two nails. It is configured so that it does not stay caught between the left and right splitting nails 213 and 214 .

Most of the game balls B1 colliding with the left and right dividing nails 213, 214 arranged near the upper left of the operation ports 33, 34 are guided to the obstacle nail 228 arranged on the left side of the game area PA. It is a game ball B1. The game ball B1 collides with the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 from the upper left side. The game ball B1, which is located on the far side of the game area PA and collides with the outer first left-right dividing nail 213 on the upper left side of the operation openings 33 and 34, collides with the first dividing surface 217a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, rebounds in the right direction toward the operation openings 33 and 34, and enters the operation openings 33 and 34 with a high probability.

Also, the game ball B1, which is located on the far side of the game area PA and collides with the inner second left-right dividing nail 214 on the upper left side of the operation openings 33 and 34, collides with the first dividing surface 232a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, bounces slightly rightward, which is the direction toward the operation openings 33, 34, and enters the operation openings 33, 34 with a high probability. Here, the outer side is the side farther from the operating ports 33 and 34 and the inner side is the side closer to the operating ports 33 and 34 .

As described above, for the game ball B1 on the far side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 on the outer side relatively far from the operation openings 33 and 34 advances greatly to the right, and the operation opening Left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that a game ball B1 colliding with a second left and right dividing nail 214 relatively close to 33 and 34 advances slightly to the right. For this reason, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 on the outside at the upper left side of the operation openings 33 and 34, and the second left-right dividing nail 214 on the inside. In both case of colliding with , and in both cases, the operation openings 33 and 34 are won with a high probability.

Also, the game ball B1, which is located on the front side of the game area PA and collides with the outer first left-right dividing nail 213 on the upper left side of the operation openings 33 and 34, collides with the second dividing surface 218a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, rebounds slightly in the right direction, which is the direction toward the operation openings 33, 34, and enters the operation openings 33, 34 with a low probability. Also, the game ball B1, which is located on the near side of the game area PA and collides with the inner second left-right dividing nail 214 on the upper left side of the operation openings 33 and 34, collides with the second dividing surface 234a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, rebounds greatly in the right direction, which is the direction toward the operation ports 33, 34, and enters the operation ports 33, 34 with a low probability.

In this way, for the game ball B1 on the front side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 on the outer side relatively far from the operation openings 33 and 34 travels slightly to the right and moves toward the operation opening. Left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that a game ball B1 colliding with a second left and right dividing nail 214 on the inner side relatively close to 33 and 34 advances greatly to the right. For this reason, the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 on the outside at the upper left side of the operation openings 33, 34, and the second left-right dividing nail 214 on the inside. In either case of colliding with the , the operating openings 33 and 34 are won with a low probability.

On the other hand, most of the game balls B1 colliding with the right and left distributing nails 213 and 214 arranged near the upper right of the operation ports 33 and 34 are guided by the obstacle nail 228 arranged on the right side of the game area PA. It is a game ball B1 coming. The game ball B1 collides with the right and left dividing nails 213 and 214 from the upper right side. The game ball B1, which is located on the far side of the game area PA and collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 on the right side of the operation openings 33 and 34, collides with the first dividing surface 232a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, rebounds greatly in the left direction, which is the direction toward the operation openings 33, 34, and enters the operation openings 33, 34 with a high probability.

Also, the game ball B1, which is located on the back side of the game area PA and collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 on the inside on the upper right side of the operation openings 33 and 34, collides with the first dividing surface 217a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, rebounds slightly in the left direction, which is the direction toward the operation openings 33, 34, and enters the operation openings 33, 34 with a high probability. Here, the outer side is the side farther from the operating ports 33 and 34 and the inner side is the side closer to the operating ports 33 and 34 .

In this way, for the game ball B1 on the far side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 on the outer side relatively far from the operation openings 33 and 34 advances greatly to the left, and the operation opening Left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the first left and right dividing nail 213 on the inner side relatively close to 33 and 34 advances slightly to the left. For this reason, when the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 on the outside on the upper right side of the operation openings 33 and 34, and the first left-right dividing nail 213 on the inside It is possible to have a configuration in which the operation openings 33 and 34 are won with a high probability in both the case of collision with the .

In addition, the game ball B1 which is located on the front side of the game area PA and collides with the outer second left-right dividing nail 214 on the upper right side of the operation openings 33 and 34 collides with the second dividing surface 234a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper right direction, rebounds slightly in the left direction, which is the direction toward the operation openings 33, 34, and enters the operation openings 33, 34 with a low probability. Also, the game ball B1, which is located on the front side of the game area PA and collides with the inner first left-right dividing nail 213 on the upper right side of the operation openings 33 and 34, collides with the second dividing surface 218a. The game ball B1 receives a drag force in the upper left direction, rebounds greatly in the left direction, which is the direction toward the operation openings 33, 34, and enters the operation openings 33, 34 with a low probability.

In this way, with respect to the game ball B1 on the front side of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 on the outer side relatively far from the operation openings 33 and 34 advances slightly to the left and moves toward the operation opening. Left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 are arranged so that the game ball B1 colliding with the first left and right dividing nail 213 on the inner side relatively close to 33 and 34 advances greatly to the left. For this reason, the game ball B1 positioned on the front side of the game area PA collides with the second left-right dividing nail 214 on the outside on the upper right side of the operation openings 33 and 34, and the first left-right dividing nail 213 on the inside In either case of colliding with the , the operating openings 33 and 34 are won with a low probability.

In this way, by providing the left and right dividing nails 213 and 214 in the vicinity of the upstream side of the first operation opening 33, the game ball B1 is moved in a manner corresponding to the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction in the game area PA. can be made different from each other in the probability of winning at the operation openings 33 and 34 . On the other hand, in the case of the conventional pachinko machine in which the obstacle nail 228 is arranged immediately before the operating opening, the probability that the game ball B1 enters the operating opening is not affected by the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction in the game area PA. .

Therefore, by arranging the right and left splitting nails 213 and 214 immediately before the operation openings 33 and 34, the obstruction nail 228 is arranged immediately before the operation openings in comparison with the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to increase the variety of movements of the game ball B1 immediately before the operation ports 33 and 34, thereby improving the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the right and left dividing nails 213 and 214 may be configured to be used as so-called ceiling nails arranged near the top of the game board 233 . In this configuration, the game ball B1 that has collided with the top nail is distributed to either the left side or the right side of the game board 233 according to the position in the depth direction of the game area PA. The game ball B1 flowing down on the left side has a different probability of winning into the operating holes 33, 34, and the probability of the game ball B1 flowing down on the right side wins into the operating holes 33, 34. The course of the game ball B1 after collision can be sorted according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the left and right split nails 213 and 214 are shaped such that the split surfaces 217a, 218a, 232a and 234a are provided over the entire longitudinal direction of the left and right split nails 213 and 214. It is not limited to the shape that is present. For example, instead of the first left/right dividing nail 213, the first left/right dividing nail 242 may be used in which the dividing surfaces 244a and 245a are provided only in the range where the game ball B1 can collide.

The first laterally distributed nail 242 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). 61(a) is a perspective view of the first left/right dividing nail 242, and FIG. 61(b) is an end view of a cut surface of the first left/right dividing nail 242 cut along a plane perpendicular to the game board 233. FIG. . As shown in FIG. 61(a), the first laterally distributed nail 242 is a nail formed to extend in the direction of the axis 242a. The first left-right distribution nail 242 includes a first left-right distribution member 243 having distribution surfaces 244a and 245a for distributing the course after collision of the colliding game ball B1, and the first left-right distribution member 243. and a fixing member 216 for fixing to the game board 237 (FIG. 61(b)). Here, the fixing member 216 forming the first laterally distributing nail 242 is the same member as the fixing member 216 forming the first laterally distributing member 215 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The first laterally distributing member 243 is a resin member having a substantially quadrangular prism shape extending in the direction of the axis 242a. The first left/right distribution member 243 includes a fixed end non-contact portion 246 having a fixed end non-contact surface 246a, which is a horizontal surface on the fixed end side that does not come into contact with the game ball B1. On the near side of the fixed end non-contact portion 246, a first distribution portion 244 having a first distribution surface 244a inclined downward to the right as an upper surface is connected to the fixed end non-contact portion 246. It is integrally formed in a continuous manner. In addition, on the front side of the first distribution portion 244, a second distribution portion 245 having a second distribution surface 245a inclined downward to the left as an upper surface is attached to the first distribution portion 244. It is integrally formed in a continuous manner. And, on the front side of the second distribution portion 245, the free end side non-contact portion 247 having a free end side non-contact surface 247a, which is a horizontal surface on the free end side that does not contact the game ball B1, is the second vibration. It is integrally formed so as to be continuous with the segment 245 .

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 positioned on the fixed end side of the first left/right distribution member 243 is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. 5 mm, and the length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a (FIG. 61(a)) of the first distributing portion 244 adjacent to the front side of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 is 4 mm. Also, the height dimension of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 is the same as the height dimension of the right end of the first distribution portion 244 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a (FIG. 61(a)) of the second allocating portion 245 adjacent to the front side of the first allocating portion 244 is 4 mm. In addition, the length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a (FIG. 61(a)) of the free end side non-contact portion 247 adjacent to the free end side of the second distribution portion 245 is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. 4 mm. Also, the height dimension of the free end side non-contact portion 247 is the same as the height dimension of the left end of the second distribution portion 245 . Here, in a state in which the first left and right dividing nail 242 is fixed to the game board 237, the fixed end side surface, the boundary surface between the fixed end non-contact portion 246 and the first dividing portion 244, the first distribution Both the boundary surface between the portion 244 and the second distribution portion 245 and the boundary surface between the second distribution portion 245 and the free end side non-contact portion 247 are surfaces parallel to the surface of the game board 237 .

As already explained in the thirteenth embodiment, the contactable range of the game ball B1 is from the surface of the game board 237 to the window panel 52 side from the position moved 5.5 mm from the surface of the game board 237 to the window panel 52 side. 12.5 mm. On the other hand, since the length dimension in the direction of the axis 242a of the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 in the first left and right distribution member 243 is set shorter than 5.5 mm, The ball B1 can collide only with the first distribution surface 244a, and the game ball B1 does not collide with the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a. Also, the length dimension (4 mm) in the direction of the axis 242a of the free end side non-contact portion 247 of the first left and right distribution member 243, and the length from the free end of the first left and right distribution member 243 to the back surface of the window panel 52 Since the sum of the dimension (1 mm) and is set to be shorter than 5.5 mm, it is only the second distribution surface 245a that the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA can collide. The ball B1 does not collide with the free end side non-contact surface 247a.

In this way, the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 having the horizontal fixed end side non-contact surface 246a as the upper surface is provided at the fixed end of the first left and right splitting nail 242, and the fixed end side non-contact portion 246 extends in the direction of the axis 242a. By making the length dimension of the game ball B1 shorter than the radius of the game ball B1, the first left and right It is possible to reduce the possibility of a large angular error occurring when the sorting nail 242 is attached. Specifically, when attaching the first left and right dividing nail 242 to the game board 237, by adjusting the rotation angle with reference to the fixed end side non-contact surface 246a which is a horizontal surface, the dividing surfaces 244a and 245a are raised. It becomes easy to fix the first left-right dividing nail 242 to the game board 237 in the state of facing the direction.

- In the above-described thirteenth embodiment, instead of the left and right splitting nails 213 and 214, a reversing nail 251 for reversing the position of the colliding game ball B1 in the game area PA may be used. The shape of the inverted nail 251 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62(a) to 62(d).

FIG. 62(a) is a perspective view of the inverted nail 251, and FIG. 62(b) is an end view of the cut surface when the inverted nail 251 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 238. FIG. c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the resistance received by the game ball B1 colliding with the first reversing surface 254a of the reversing nail 251, and FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a drag which ball B1 receives.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the inverted nail 251 is a nail that extends in the direction of the axis 251a. The reversing nail 251 consists of a reversing member 254 having reversing surfaces 254a and 254b on the upper surface for changing the course of the colliding game ball B1, and a fixing member 216 for fixing the reversing member 254 to the game board 238. Become. The fixing member 216 forming the reversing nail 251 is the same member as the fixing member 216 forming the first laterally distributing nail 213 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The reversing member 254 is a substantially quadrangular prism-shaped resin member extending in the direction of the axis 251a. The upper surface of the reversing member 254 has four vertices and is composed of a first reversing surface 254a and a second reversing surface 254b. Of these, the first reversed surface 254a is a triangular plane having vertices at the back right, back left, and front right, with the back right vertex positioned higher than the other two vertices. Therefore, the first reversal surface 254a is inclined downward toward the left and forward.

The second inverted surface 254b is a triangular plane having vertices on the left front, left back, and right front, and the left front vertex is higher than the other two vertices. Therefore, the second reversing surface 254b is inclined downward to the right and rearward.

The length dimension of the reversing member 254 in the direction of the axis 251a is 17 mm. As shown in FIG. 62(b), the reversing nail 251 is formed with a fixing hole into which the fixing member 216 is fitted. The reversing member 254 is fixed to the game board 238 by fixing the outer wall of the fixing member 216 with an adhesive. Since the entire reversing member 254 protrudes from the surface of the game board 233 when the reversing nail 251 is fixed to the game board 238, the reversing nail 251 is positioned in front of the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA. It can collide with both the game ball B1 located on the side.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), on the fixed end side of the reversing nail 251, the area of the first reversing surface 254a is larger than the area of the second reversing surface 254b. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the first reversing surface 254a. Since the first reversing surface 254a is inclined downward toward the left and forward, as shown in FIG. Receiving a drag force having both a directional component and a frontward component, the robot springs up forward and to the left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(a), on the free end side of the inverted nail 251, the area of the second inverted surface 254b is larger than the area of the first inverted surface 254a. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA collides with the second reversing surface 254b. Since the second reversing surface 254b is inclined downward to the right and rearward, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the game ball B1 colliding with the second reversing surface 254b Receiving a drag force having a component in the direction and a component in the depth direction, it jumps up to the right rear.

Thus, the reversing nail 251 is a nail with a high probability of rebounding the game ball B1 colliding on the back side to the front side, and a nail with a high probability of rebounding the game ball B1 colliding on the front side to the back side. For this reason, for example, a reverse nail 251 is provided upstream of the left guide nail group 211 in the game board 233 of the thirteenth embodiment, and the depth direction of the game ball B1 colliding with the reverse nail 251 upstream of the left guide nail group 211 is increased. By reversing the positional relationship, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA wins the operation openings 33, 34 and the probability that the game ball B1 located on the front side wins the operation openings 33, 34. can be changed.

By using the reversing nail 251 that greatly changes the probability of winning the operation ports 33, 34, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, by using the reversing nail 251, when the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA is biased to the front side or the back side due to a malfunction of the game ball launching mechanism 27 (FIG. 2). Even when the game ball B1 is put away, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operation openings 33 and 34 is largely unbalanced.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, instead of the dividing nails 213 and 214, the front and rear dividing nails 262 (FIG. 63) and the rear nails 271 (FIG. 63) are provided on the game board 261 (FIG. 63). It differs from the embodiment. Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the thirteenth embodiment are basically omitted.

FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board 261 of this embodiment and an enlarged view of the upstream portion of the left guide nail group 281 in the game board 261. FIG. As shown in FIG. 63, on the game board 261 of the present embodiment, an obstruction nail 228, a front-rear splitting nail 262, and a left guide nail group 281 consisting of a rear nail 271 is provided. Here, the back and forth dividing nail 262 is a nail that changes the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 that collides in the game area PA. Further, the rear nail 271 is a nail that can collide only with the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (the game board 261 side) of the game area PA.

The left guide nail group 281 is positioned diagonally to the upper left of the operation ports 33 and 34 . Since the space above the left guide nail group 281 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 can pass over the left guide nail group 281. - 特許庁A front-rear dividing nail 262 and a rear nail 271 are disposed upstream of the left guide nail group 281 .

As shown in FIG. 63, since four front-to-rear distributing pegs 262 are arranged in a line most upstream of the left guide peg group 281, most of the game balls B1 guided by the left guide peg group 281 are It collides with one of the front-rear splitting nails 262 in the upstream portion. The game ball B1 collided with the front and rear dividing nail 262 reaches the downstream of the left guiding nail group 281 in a state where the positions in the depth direction are allocated. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 63 , the row of front and rear dividing nails 262 formed by the four front and rear dividing nails 262 is defined as a first guide nail row 282 .

The four fore-and-aft dividing nails 262 that constitute the first guide nail row 282 are arranged in a line such that the right-side fore-and-aft dividing nail 262 is located below the adjacent left-side fore-and-aft dividing nail 262 . . The interval between the front and rear dividing nails 262 constituting the first guide nail row 282 is narrower than the 11 mm diameter of the game ball B1 so that the game ball B1 does not fall downward from the gap between the two front and rear dividing nails 262. be.

The upper surface of the front-rear dividing nail 262 is a flat surface that does not tilt in the left-right direction, but as shown in FIG. Fixed. For this reason, in the first guide nail row 282, the upper surface of the front-and-rear dividing nail 262 inclines toward the right in a gentle downward slope. As a result, even if the game ball B1 loses its rightward velocity component on the first guide nail row 282, it is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball B1 stays there.

A gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided immediately downstream of the first guide nail row 282, and three rear nails 271 are arranged in a row downstream of the gap. A row of the rear nails 271 formed by the three rear nails 271 is referred to as a second guide nail row 283 . In the second guide nail row 283, the three rear nails 271 are arranged without a gap, and the game ball B1 does not drop downward from the gap between the two rear nails 271.例文帳に追加

In addition, downstream of the second guide nail row 283, a third guide nail row 284 is formed by providing four obstructing nails 228 with no space between them. A plurality of obstacle nails 228 are arranged in a line downstream of the four obstacle nails 228 with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. The row of the obstacle nail 228 continues to just before the operation openings 33, 34, and guides the game ball B1 to the operation openings 33, 34. - 特許庁

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the right guide nail group arranged on the right side of the game board 261 is all composed of the obstacle nails 228 .

Next, the structure of the back and forth dividing nail 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d). 64(a) is a perspective view of the front-rear dividing nail 262, FIG. 64(b) is a plan view of the front-rear dividing member 263 constituting the front-rear dividing nail 262, and FIGS. ) is an end view of a cut surface when the back and forth dividing nail 262 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261. FIG. As shown in FIG. 64(a), the back and forth split nail 262 is an elongated nail extending in the direction of the axis 262c. The front-rear distributing nail 262 includes a front-rear distributing member 263 for distributing the game balls B1 falling from above and colliding with each other in the depth direction, and a fixing member 216 for fixing the front-rear distributing member 263 to the surface of the game board 261. and consists of The front-rear distribution member 263 is a substantially quadrangular prism-shaped resin member formed to extend in the direction of the axis 262c. It has a dividing surface 264a and a second dividing surface 265a.

As shown in FIG. 63, the front and rear dividing nail 262 is attached to the game board 261 in such a manner that the axis 262c is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261 and the front and rear dividing member 263 protrudes from the surface of the game board 261. Fixed. The longitudinal distribution member 263 has a length dimension in the direction of the axis 262c of 17 mm. Since the front and rear dividing nail 262 covers the contactable range of the game ball B1, the front and rear dividing nail 262 can collide with the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA and the game located on the front side. It can collide with sphere B1. In the following description, in the state of being fixed to the game board 261, the end fixed to the game board 261 is defined as the fixed end of the front and rear dividing nail 262, and the end protruding into the game area PA is divided back and forth. Let the nail 262 be the free end.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), the front-rear distributing member 263 includes a first distributing portion 264 on the fixed end side having a first distributing surface 264a and a first distributing portion 264 on the free end side having a second distributing surface 265a. 2 distribution part 265 and . The length of the first distributing portion 264 in the direction of the axis 262c is 9 mm, and the length of the second distributing portion 265 in the direction of the axis 262c is 8 mm. In addition, the first distribution surface 264a is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear, and the second distribution surface 265a is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front. Then, in a state where the front and rear dividing nail 262 is fixed to the game board 261, the boundary surface between the first dividing portion 264 and the second dividing portion 265 is parallel to the surface of the game board 261, and the boundary surface is located in the center of the game area PA in the depth direction.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), the front-rear distribution member 263 has square side surfaces at both the fixed end and the free end. Of these, a fixing hole 263a for fitting the fixing member 216 when fixing the front-rear distribution member 263 to the game board 261 is formed in the fixed end surface 263b, which is the side surface on the fixed end side. The fixing hole 263a is a cylindrical hole that has an opening on the side surface of the front and rear distributing member 263 on the fixed end side and is formed in a manner that extends from the fixed end of the front and rear distributing member 263 to the vicinity of the free end. and the depth of the fixing hole 263a is 15 mm. As shown in FIG. 64(b), the fixing hole 263a is formed large so as to occupy more than half the volume of the front-rear distribution member 263. As shown in FIG. The fixing holes 263 a are formed at a sufficient distance from the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the front-rear distributing member 263 so as to maintain the strength of the front-rear distributing member 263 .

Next, a state in which the front-rear dividing nail 262 is fixed to the game board 261 will be described. The fixing member 216 forming the front-rear dividing nail 262 is the same member as the fixing member 216 forming the first left-right dividing nail 213 described in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 64(c) and 64(d), the fixing member 216 is such that the entire fixing point 216b and part of the fixing trunk shaft 216a are deeper than the surface of the game board 261. It is fixed to the game board 261 in such a manner that the remaining portion of the fixing barrel portion 216a protrudes from the surface of the game board 261 in a substantially vertical direction. In the fixing member 216 fixed to the game board 261, the length of the projecting portion from the surface of the game board 261 is 15 mm. The forward/backward distribution member 263 is fixed to the game board 261 with the distribution surfaces 264a and 265a facing upward by fixing the outer wall of the projecting portion and the inner wall of the fixing hole 263a with an adhesive.

As shown in FIG. 64(c), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side (game board 261 side) of the game area PA sandwiched between the game board 261 and the window panel 52 collides with the first distribution surface 264a. do. On the far side of the game area PA, the first distribution surface 264a is inclined downward toward the rear. and a component in the depth direction acts. As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds in the depth direction and flows down the depth side of the game area PA downstream.

Also, the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA (the window panel 52 side) collides with the second distribution surface 265a. On the back side of the game area PA, the second distribution surface 265a is inclined downward toward the front. and a front component. As a result, the game ball B1 after collision rebounds forward and flows down the front side of the game area PA on the downstream side.

Next, the relationship between the rear nail 271 and the game ball B1 in the game area PA will be described with reference to FIGS. 65(a) to (c). 65(a) is a perspective view of the rear nail 271, and FIGS. 65(b) and 65(c) are longitudinal sectional views of the rear nail 271 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 261. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), the rear nail 271 is composed of a cylindrical trunk portion 271a and a conical pointed portion 271b. The diameter of the trunk portion 271a and the diameter of the bottom surface of the pointed portion 271b are both approximately 2 mm, which is the same as the trunk diameter of the obstructing nail 228. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65(b), the rear nail 271 is such that the entire pointed portion 271b and part of the trunk portion 271a are buried deeper than the surface of the game board 261, and the trunk portion 271a The game board 261 is fixed in such a manner that a part thereof protrudes from the game board 261 in a substantially vertical direction.

In the rear nail 271 fixed to the game board 261, the length from the surface of the game board 261 to the front end of the projecting portion of the rear nail 271 is 6 mm. Here, the distance from the tip of the projecting portion of the rear nail 271 fixed to the game board 261 to the rear surface of the window panel 52 is 12 mm, and the game ball B1 with a diameter of 11 mm is sandwiched between the rear nail 271 and the window panel 52. It is a configuration that does not cause stagnation.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), a game ball B1 with a diameter of 11 mm flowing down along the surface of the game board 261 on the far side of the game area PA collides with the rear nail 271 and changes its traveling direction. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA along the surface of the back side of the window panel 52 does not collide with the rear nail 271, so the traveling direction is maintained as it is. and go downstream.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 entering the space above the left guide nail group 281 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b). FIG. 66(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the back side of the game area PA in the left guide nail group 281, and FIG. 66(b) is positioned on the front side of the game area PA. It is an explanatory view for explaining the course in the left side guide nail group 281 of the game ball B1 to be played.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), when the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA enters the space above the left guide nail group 281, the game ball B1 forms the first guide nail row 282. It collides with any one of the four back-and-forth splitting nails 262 and rebounds. At this time, since the game ball B1 collides with the first distribution surface 264a (FIG. 64(a)) of the front and rear distribution nail 262, the game ball B1 flows down the back side of the game area PA with a high probability in the downstream.

The game ball B1 collided with the front and rear dividing nails 262 forming the first guide nail row 282 and rebounded, and the front and rear dividing nails 262 located at the downstream end of the first guide nail row 282 and the upstream of the second guide nail row 283. When jumping over the gap with the rear nail 271 positioned at the end, the game ball B1 enters the space above the second guide nail row 283 . When the game ball B1 is located on the back side of the game area PA and collides with one of the three rear nails 271 forming the second guide nail row 283 and bounces back, the game ball B1 hits the third guide nail row 284. are guided toward the working ports 33, 34 by the .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66(b), when the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA enters the space above the left guide nail group 281, the game ball B1 moves through the first guide nail row 282. It collides with any one of the four back-and-forth splitting nails 262 that constitute it and rebounds. At this time, since the game ball B1 collides with the second distribution surface 265a (FIG. 64(a)) of the front and rear distribution nail 262, the game ball B1 flows down along the back surface of the window panel 52 with a high probability in the downstream. .

The game ball B1 that collides with the second distribution surface 265a and bounces off the front-rear distribution nail 262 located at the downstream end of the first guide nail row 282 and the rear nail 271 located at the upstream end of the second guide nail row 283. , the game ball B 1 enters the space above the second guide nail row 283 . When the game ball B1 is moving along the back surface of the window panel 52 and does not collide with any of the three rear nails 271 forming the second guide nail row 283, the game ball B1 moves along the rear nail 271 and the window. It slips through the space between the panel 52 and falls, and is collected at the out port 24a.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A game board 261 is provided with front and rear dividing nails 262 for dividing the course after collision into the back side and the front side of the game area PA according to the position of the colliding game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA. With this configuration, even for the game ball B1 positioned near the center in the depth direction of the game area PA, the course after collision can be divided into either along the game board 261 or along the window panel 52 . Then, downstream of the front and rear dividing nail 262, when the game ball B1 is located on the game board 261 side of the game area PA and when it is located on the window panel 52 side of the game area PA, It is a configuration for setting the second guide nail row 283 that makes the course of the game ball B1 different. Therefore, it is possible to make the downstream course of the game ball B1 different according to the course distributed by the front and rear dividing nail 262 . In this way, by arranging the second guide nail row 283 downstream of the front-rear dividing nail 262, the downstream path of the game ball B1 changes depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction in the game area PA. Varying configurations are possible. Compared to the configuration in which only the lateral position in the game area PA affects the downstream course of the game ball B1, it is possible to increase the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, a rear nail 271 forming a space through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed between the free end of the projecting portion and the rear surface of the window panel 52 when provided on the game board 261 to form a second guide nail row 283. Therefore, the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the side of the game board 261 is changed, and the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the side of the window panel 52 is not changed, so that the course of the game ball B1 on the downstream side is changed. can be By using the rear nail 271 as the nail constituting the second guide nail row 283, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA can be increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
- In the fourteenth embodiment described above, instead of arranging the three rear nails 271 as the second guide nail row 283, when fixed to the game board 261, the rear nails extend from the surface of the game board 261 to the window panel 52 side. A configuration may be adopted in which one inclined member protruding by the same length as 271 and having the same inclined surface as the angle at which the rear nails 271 are arranged in the second guide nail row 283 is arranged. By arranging the inclined member, the game ball B1 moving along the back surface of the window panel 52 can move along the surface of the game board 261 without changing its course. It is possible to change the course of the existing game ball B1. In this case, the inclined member can be fixed to the game board 261 more easily than when the three rear nails 271 are arranged side by side on the game board 261 .

- In the fourteenth embodiment described above, all the nails constituting the second guide nail row 283 and the third guide nail row 284 are configured to be the obstacle nails 228, and the first guide nail row 282 and the third guide nail row A configuration in which the rear nail 271 is arranged in the gap with the second guide nail row 283 may be adopted. In this case, the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down on the front side of the game area PA is guided by the left guide nail group 281 and enters the operation openings 33 and 34 is determined by the conventional game machine using only the obstacle nail 228 as the nail. , it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA is guided by the left guide nail group 281 and enters the operation opening.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the shape of the front-rear dividing nail 262 is such that the upper surface of the front-rear dividing nail 262 and the surface arranged on the distal end side slopes upward from the proximal end toward the distal end. In addition, the upper surface of the front and rear dividing nail 262, which is located on the proximal end side, may have a shape that slopes downward from the proximal end toward the distal end.

For example, in the front and rear dividing nail 262 described above, the first dividing portion 264 positioned on the fixed end side is positioned on the free end side, and the second dividing portion 265 positioned on the free end side is positioned on the free end side. You may use the nail which is located in the fixed end side as a back-and-forth distribution nail. That is, in the above-described front and rear dividing nail 262, a nail having a shape in which the first and second dividing portions 264 and 265 are interchanged may be used as the front and rear dividing nail. The front-rear splitting nail in which the upper two inclined surfaces slope downward toward the center in this way is called a concave front-rear splitting nail.

When the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the concave back-and-forth dividing nail, the downstream course of the game ball B1 is changed to the front side of the game area PA. Further, when the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA collides with the concave back and forth dividing nail, the downstream course of the game ball B1 is changed to the back side of the game area PA. That is, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 colliding with the concave back and forth dividing nail can be reversed. For example, due to a malfunction of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, all the game balls B1 shot toward the game area PA are located on the back side of the game area PA, or all the game balls B1 to be shot are located in the game area PA In the case of being positioned on the front side, by reversing the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 colliding with the concave back and forth dividing nail, the game ball B1 is positioned on the front side with respect to the number of game balls B1 positioned on the back side. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ratio of the number of game balls B1 is remarkably biased.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment described above, instead of the four front-rear dividing nails 262 constituting the first guide nail row 282, four recessed front-rear dividing nails are disposed on the game board 261, Unlike the fourteenth embodiment described above, the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA is activated with a high probability by the first guide nail row 282, the second guide nail row 283, and the third guide nail row 284. The game ball B1, which is guided toward the openings 33 and 34 and flows down the back side of the game area PA, can be collected from the out opening 24a with a high probability.

By configuring the downstream course of the game ball B1 to change according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA, only the horizontal position in the game area PA affects the course of the game ball B1 in the downstream direction. Compared with the configuration, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

- In the fourteenth embodiment described above, instead of the front-rear dividing nail 262, the game board 261 may be provided with a nail that guides the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA only in one direction. For example, by providing the game board 261 with a front side guide nail having only an inclined surface with a downward slope toward the front side of the game area PA, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 colliding with the front side guide nail can be determined. It can be guided forward. Further, by arranging on the game board 261 a back-side guide nail having only an inclined surface with a downward slope toward the back side of the game area PA, the depth direction of the game ball B1 colliding with the back-side guide nail is increased. The position can be guided to the back side.

In the game board 261 of the fourteenth embodiment described above, the first and second front-and-rear distribution nails 262 from the upstream of the first guide nail row 282 are replaced with front-side guide nails, and the third and fourth front-and-rear pins are replaced with front-side guide nails. By replacing the sorting nail 262 with the back side guide nail, the game ball B1 that collides with the first guide nail row 282 at a relatively shallow position in the upstream part of the left guide nail group 281 wins the operation ports 33 and 34. It is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 collides with the first guide nail row 282 at a relatively deep position, and lower the probability that the game ball B1 will enter the operating holes 33 and 34.例文帳に追加Thus, by making the winning probability different according to the collision position of the game ball B1 in the first guide nail row 282, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

- In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the rear nail 271 may be configured to have an inclined surface that imparts a reaction force having a component in a predetermined direction to the colliding game ball B1. For example, the rear nail 271 in the fourteenth embodiment described above may be replaced with a right guide nail having an upper surface that slopes downward toward the right. By providing the right guiding nail on the game board 261, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA collides and accelerates rightward, while the game ball B1 located on the front side does not collide. The course of the game ball B1 can be distributed in a manner. As a result, the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is reflected in the course of the game ball B1 in the left-right direction, thereby increasing the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and improving the interest of the game.

Further, for example, the rear nail 271 in the fourteenth embodiment described above may be replaced with a front guide nail having an upper surface that slopes downward toward the front. By providing the front guiding nail on the game board 261, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is moved to the front side by colliding, and the game ball B1 located on the front side does not collide. It can be configured to change the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction. Thereby, in the game area PA, the number of game balls B1 positioned on the near side can be increased. For example, by providing the first left and right dividing peg 213 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment downstream of the front guide peg, many game balls B1 collide with the second allocating surface 218a and are distributed to the left. can do. Further, for example, by providing the second left/right dividing nail 214 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment downstream of the front guiding nail, many game balls B1 collide with the second dividing surface 234a and are distributed to the right. can be configured. In this way, by providing the front guide nail upstream of the means for allocating the course of the game ball B1 in a manner corresponding to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA, the motion of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is reduced. It is possible to increase the variation and improve the interest of the game.

- In the fourteenth embodiment described above, instead of the rear nail 271, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is shaped to easily collide, and the game ball B1 located on the back side is less likely to collide. may be arranged on the game board 261 . The front priority member 291 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b). FIG. 67(a) is a plan view of the front priority member 291, and FIG. 67(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the path of the game ball B1 in the left guide nail group 281 including the front priority member 291. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the front priority member 291 includes a plate member 292 that can collide only with the game ball B1 positioned on the front side of the game area PA, and the plate member 292 is fixed to the game board 261. It consists of a first supporting member 293 and a second supporting member 294 for. The plate member 292 is a rectangular parallelepiped resin plate extending in the left-right direction. The horizontal dimension of the upper surface of the plate member 292 with which the game ball B1 collides is 36 mm, which is longer than three times the diameter of the game ball B1, and the length in the depth direction is 5.5 mm, which is the same as the radius of the game ball B1. be. Further, the plate member 292 has a thickness of 6 mm, and has a strength that does not break even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides with it.

A first support hole 295 having an inner diameter and a depth of 4 mm is formed in the plate member 292 at an interval of 3 mm from the left end for fixing the first support member 293. A second support hole 296 having an inner diameter and depth of 4 mm is formed at a distance of 3 mm from the right end to secure 294 .

The first support member 293 and the second support member 294 are the same member. The support members 293 and 294 are composed of cylindrical supporting barrel portions 293a and 294a with a length dimension of 28 mm in the direction of the axis lines 293c and 294c and conical support portions with a length dimension of 5 mm in the direction of the axis lines 293c and 294c. and cusps 293b and 294b. Since the support members 293 and 294 have a body diameter of 4 mm, which is the same as the inner diameter of the support holes 292a and 292b, the first support member 293 can be fitted into the first support hole 295 without any gaps. The two support members 294 can be fitted in the second support holes 296 in a tight manner.

The plate member 292 and the support members 293 and 294 that constitute the front priority member 291 are separable. The separated support members 293 and 294 are fixed to the game board 233 by applying an impact to the free ends with a hammer or the like. A portion of the projecting portion of the first supporting member 293 fits into the first supporting hole 295 and a portion of the projecting portion of the second supporting member 294 fits into the second supporting hole 296 . By fixing the plate member 292 to the support members 293 and 294 at , the front priority member 291 is fixed to the game board 233 .

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the support members 293 and 294 are arranged so that all of the support points 293b and 294b and part of the support shafts 293a and 294a are located above the surface of the game board 233. As shown in FIG. It is fixed to the game board 261 in such a manner that the remaining parts of the supporting barrels 293a and 294a protrude from the surface of the game board 261 in a substantially vertical direction. In the support members 293 and 294 fixed to the game board 261, the length dimension of the protrusion from the surface of the game board 261 is 15 mm. The plate member 292 is fixed to the game board 261 by fixing the outer wall of the protrusion and the inner walls of the support holes 292a and 292b with an adhesive.

In the state where it is fixed to the game board 261, the distance between the first support member 293 and the second support member 294 is 22 mm, which is twice the diameter of the game ball B1. It is separated from the surface of the board 261 by 11.5 mm wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

In the game board 261 of the fourteenth embodiment, if the three rear nails 271 constituting the second guide nail row 283 are replaced with the front priority members 291 without changing the inclination of the upper surface, FIG. As shown in , the game ball B1 distributed to the back side in the upstream first guide nail row 282 has a higher probability of falling downward from the gap between the first support member 293 and the second support member 294, The probability that the game ball B1 distributed to the side collides with the plate member 292 and enters the space above the third guide nail row 284 increases.

In this way, by making the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the front side and the course of the game ball B1 positioned on the back side different, the variation of the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is increased, and the game is improved. Interest can be improved.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in that a repulsion nail 322 (FIG. 68) is provided on a game board 321 (FIG. 68) in place of the sorting nails 213 and 214. FIG. Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the thirteenth embodiment are basically omitted.

The game board 321 of this embodiment is provided with a repelling nail 322 in addition to the obstructing nail 228 as a nail for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball B1. First, based on FIG. 68, the position of the repulsive nail 322 on the game board 321 will be described. 68 is a front view of the game board 321 and an enlarged view of the upstream part of the left guide nail group 323 arranged on the game board 321. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 68, the game board 321 is provided with guide peg groups composed of a plurality of pegs 228 and 322 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation ports 33 and 34. As shown in FIG. The guide nail group includes a left guide nail group 323 arranged to guide the game ball B1 from the left side to the operation openings 33 and 34 located at the center lower part of the game board 321, and a game ball B1 from the right side. It is composed of a right guide nail group 324 arranged for guiding to the operation openings 33 and 34 located in the central lower part of the board 321 .

The obstructing nails 228 and the repelling nails 322 that constitute the left guiding nail group 323 are arranged in one direction, and the direction of arrangement has a downward slope of 30° toward the right. The obstructing nails 228 and the repelling nails 322 that constitute the right guide nail group 324 are arranged in one direction, and the direction of arrangement is inclined downward by 30° toward the left. .

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 68 , the left guide nail group 323 is divided into a first nail row 331 positioned most upstream and a second nail row 332 positioned downstream of the first nail row 331 . . In the first nail row 331, four repulsive nails 322 are arranged in a row in a direction having a downward slope of 30° toward the right. In the first nail row 331, the interval between adjacent repulsive nails 322 is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 does not drop downward from between the two repulsion nails 322.例文帳に追加

Also, in the second nail row 332, 13 obstacle nails 228 are arranged in a row in a direction having a downward slope of 30° toward the right. The gap between the repelling nail 322 located at the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the obstacle nail 228 located at the upstream end of the second nail row 332 is set to 13 mm wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. There is a possibility that the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap. In particular, when the rebound of the game ball B1 colliding with the repelling nail 322 forming the first nail row 331 is small, the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap between the first nail row 331 and the second nail row 332. As a result, there is a high possibility that it will be collected from the out port 24 a provided at the bottom of the game board 321 .

Next, the shape of the repulsive nail 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b). 69(a) is an exploded perspective view of the repulsion nail 322, and FIG. 69(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the repulsion nail 322. FIG. As shown in FIG. 69(a), the repulsive nail 322 is an elongated nail extending in the direction of the axis 322a. The repulsion nail 322 includes a low-resilience member 333 having a surface that rebounds the colliding game ball B1 with a low coefficient of restitution, and a high-resilience member 333 that has a rebound coefficient larger than the surface of the low-rebound member 333 and greatly rebounds the colliding game ball B1. and a shaft member 334 having a repulsion portion 334d.

The shaft member 334 is a metal member provided with a columnar free-end-side body shaft portion 334a extending in the direction of the axis 322a on the free-end side. On the far side of the free end side barrel portion 334a, a columnar fixed end side barrel portion 334b having a larger barrel diameter than the free end side barrel portion 334a is integrally formed by extending in the direction of the axis 322a. It is A conical pointed portion 334c is integrally formed on the far side of the fixed end side barrel portion 334b so as to have a apex on the axis 322a and be continuous with the fixed end side barrel portion 334b.

The diameter of the free end side barrel portion 334a is 2 mm, and the length in the axial direction is 8 mm. The diameter of the fixed-end barrel portion 334b is 6 mm, and the length in the axial direction is 22 mm. When the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the fixed end side trunk shaft part 334b includes a high repulsion part 334d projecting to the front side of the surface of the game board 321, a buried part 334e buried to the back side, consists of In addition, the cusp 334c has a sharp tip, and when the cusp 334c is pressed against the surface of the game board 321, the free end of the repulsion nail 322 is impacted with a hammer or the like. It is possible to fix the repulsive nail 322 to the game board 321 .

The low-resilience member 333 is a low-resilience urethane member having a cylindrical shape extending in the direction of the axis 322a. The low-resilience member 333 has a diameter of 6 mm and a length dimension of 8 mm in the direction of the axis 322a. Therefore, in a state where the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the boundary between the low repulsion member 333 and the high repulsion portion 334d is positioned at the center of the game area PA in the depth direction. The low-resilience member 333 is formed with a mounting hole 333a that penetrates the center of the low-resilience member 333 in the direction of the axis 322a. The mounting hole 333a is a cylindrical hole having an inner diameter of 2 mm. As shown in FIG. 69(a), the free end side trunk shaft portion 334a of the shaft member 334 is inserted into the mounting hole 333a. As a result, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the low-resilience member 333 is fixed to the fixed-end-side trunk shaft portion 334b to form a repulsion nail 322. Then, as shown in FIG. The low-resilience member 333 is not limited to low-resilience urethane as long as it is a material that reduces the rebound of the colliding game ball B1 and has durability. For example, the low-resilience member 333 may be made of silicon resin.

Next, the course of the game ball B1 colliding with the repulsion nail 322 fixed to the game board 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d). 70(a) and (c) are end views of a cut surface of the repulsion nail 322 cut along a plane perpendicular to the game board 321, and FIG. FIG. 70(d) is a cross-sectional view of the high repulsion portion 334d shown for explaining the course after collision of B1, and FIG. 70(d) is for explaining the course after collision of the game ball B1 that flows down from the upper left and collides. Fig. 10 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the low-resilience member 333 and the free-end-side trunk shaft portion 334a.

As shown in FIG. 70(a), the repulsive nail 322 is driven and fixed to the surface of the game board 321 so that the axis 322a is substantially perpendicular. Here, the depth of the game area PA sandwiched between the surface of the game board 321 and the back surface of the window panel 52 is 18 mm. As shown in FIG. 70(a), the repulsive nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321 in such a manner that the embedded part 334e and the pointed part 334c of the shaft member 334 are buried deeper than the surface of the game board 321. . In the state where the repulsion nail 322 is fixed to the game board 321, the high repulsion part 334d is exposed on the back side of the game area PA, and the low repulsion member 333 is exposed on the front side.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the high rebound portion 334d having a large coefficient of restitution and rebounds greatly. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the game ball B1 after having a rightward initial velocity and a downward initial velocity and colliding with one point above the high rebound portion 334d from the upper left side is , has a rightward velocity slightly less than the rightward initial velocity, and an upward velocity slightly less than the downward initial velocity.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA collides with the low-resilience member 333 having a small coefficient of restitution and rebounds slightly. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the game ball B1 has a rightward initial velocity and a downward initial velocity and collides with one point above the low-resilience member 333 from the upper left side. , has a rightward velocity that is much reduced than the rightward initial velocity, and an upward velocity that is much reduced than the downward initial velocity.

Next, the course after collision of the game ball B1 which collides with the repelling nail 322 constituting the first nail row 331 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b). FIG. 71(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 after collision when the game ball B1 collides with the high rebound portion 334d of the repulsion nail 322, and FIG. is an explanatory diagram for explaining the course of the game ball B1 after collision when it collides with the low-resilience member 333 of the repulsion nail 322. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 71( a ), the game ball B<b>1 located on the far side of the game area PA collides with the high repulsion portion 334 d of the repulsion nail 322 forming the first nail row 331 . The game ball B1 rebounds greatly after colliding with the high rebound portion 334d having a large coefficient of restitution. Therefore, the game ball B1 after collision is guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 by the second nail row 332 without falling downward from the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332. There is a high probability that it will be

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the game ball B1 positioned on the near side of the game area PA collides with the low-resilience members 333 of the repulsion nails 322 forming the first nail row 331. FIG. The game ball B1 bounces back slightly after colliding with the low-resilience member 333 having a small coefficient of restitution. Therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball B1 after collision will drop downward through the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332 and will be recovered from the out port 24a.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The repulsion nail 322 has a high rebound portion 334d with a large rebound coefficient on the tip side and a low rebound member 333 with a small rebound coefficient on the base end side. By arranging the repelling nail 322 on the game board 321, the course of the game ball B1 after collision can be changed according to the position in the depth direction in the game area PA. Therefore, when compared with a conventional pachinko machine in which only the obstacle nail 228 is arranged on the game board 321 and the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA does not affect the course of the game ball B1, the game It is possible to increase the variation of movement of the game ball B1 in the area PA and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first nail row 331 forming the upstream part of the left guide nail group 323 is configured to use the repelling nail 322 , and a gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332 is provided. It is a configuration in which a gap having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is set. Therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA will be guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 by the second nail row 332 after colliding with the first nail row 331. - 特許庁Also, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA falls downward through the gap between the downstream end of the first nail row 331 and the upstream end of the second nail row 332 after colliding with the first nail row 331. is expensive.

Thus, since the probability that the game ball B1 is guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 is different in a mode corresponding to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA, the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA As compared with the conventional pachinko machine 10 in which the position of the .

Further, all the nails forming the first nail row 331 are configured to use the repulsive nails 322 . By arranging a plurality of repelling nails 322 at intervals shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1, the difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA is reduced to the probability that the game ball B1 is guided to the operation openings 33, 34. can be greatly reflected in the difference between

<Another form of the fifteenth embodiment>
- In the fifteenth embodiment described above, instead of the repulsive nail 322, an inclined nail having a plurality of inclined surfaces inclined at different angles in the same direction may be used. Specifically, the slanted nail includes a first slanted portion located on the fixed end side and having a first slanted surface having a downward slope of 30° toward the right, and a first slanted portion located on the free end side and having a right and a second slanted portion having a second slanted surface with a downward slope of 15° toward the . The game ball B1 that collides with the inclined nail always receives a rightward rebounding force, but the rightward velocity component after the collision changes according to the collision position in the depth direction. Specifically, on the game ball B1 that collides with the first inclined surface on the far side of the game area PA, a drag force with a large rightward component and a small upward component acts. On the other hand, on the game ball B1 that collides with the second inclined surface on the near side of the game area PA, a drag force with a small rightward component and a large upward component acts.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, by using the inclined nail instead of the repulsive nail 322, the probability that the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA wins the operation openings 33 and 34 is increased. , the probability that the game ball B1 located on the near side wins a prize can be reduced. By adopting a configuration in which the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is reflected in the game result, the interest in the game is improved compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the position of the game ball B1 in the horizontal direction is reflected in the game result. can be achieved.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The game board 341 (FIG. 72) of the present embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in that a front and rear distribution table 351 (FIG. 72) for distributing the game balls B1 in the depth direction of the game area PA is provided. doing. Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the thirteenth embodiment are basically omitted. Incidentally, all the nails provided on the game board 341 of this embodiment are obstacle nails 228 .

First, the configuration of the game board 341 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72 is a front view of the game board 341. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, the game board 341 is provided with a center frame 252 so as to define an opening 341a that allows the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 341a, and a stage unit 354 provided to define the lower edge of the opening 341a. ing. A ball entrance 363 is formed at the left end of the stage unit 354 to allow the game ball B1 existing in the game area PA to move onto the stage unit 354, and the game ball B1 entering the ball entrance 363 is It is guided onto stage unit 354 . The stage unit 354 has, on its upper surface, a rolling surface 357 on which the game ball B1 can roll. The rolling surface 357 has a width corresponding to two game balls B1 arranged in the depth direction, and has a smooth streamline shape symmetrical about the central portion. Specifically, a peak portion 358 that rises upward is formed in the central portion of the rolling surface 357, and valley portions 359 that are recessed downward are formed on the left and right sides thereof. Further, both left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 are located above the central portion.

Both the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 and the ridges 358 are inclined downward toward the inner side. On the other hand, the valley portion 359 has a shape inclined downward toward the near side. Therefore, the game ball B1 reaching the valley portion 359 in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the valley portion 359 and ejected downward from the stage unit 354 from the front edge of the valley portion 359. .

A guiding passage 366 is formed below the mountain portion 358 in the stage unit 354. An entrance to the guiding passage 366 is formed at the rear portion of the mountain portion 358, and the mountain portion 358 slopes downward toward the entrance. It's becoming The guide path 366 is downwardly inclined forward, and the game ball B1 introduced into the guide path 366 is discharged below the stage unit 354 through the guide path 366 . The exit of the guide passage 366 is positioned vertically above the first working port 33 . Therefore, the game ball B1 passing through the guide passage 366 can easily enter the first operation opening 33.例文帳に追加

Further, as described above, the game board 341 is provided with the front and rear distribution table 351 for distributing the game balls B1 in the depth direction of the game area PA. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72, the front-rear distributing table 351 is arranged on the left side of the ball inlet 363 formed at the left end of the stage unit 354 and above the left-hand side guide nail group 355 . ing.

Here, a detailed position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is defined. In this embodiment, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is the game ball B1 whose center is located less than 9 mm from the surface of the game board 341 . Also, the game ball B1 located on the farthest side of the game area PA is the game ball B1 in a state in which the game ball B1 is in contact with the surface of the game board 341 or in a similar state. Also, the game ball B1 located on the near side of the game area PA is the game ball B1 whose center is located less than 9 mm from the rear surface of the window panel 52 . Also, the game ball B1 located on the frontmost side of the game area PA is the game ball B1 in contact with the rear surface of the window panel 52 or in a similar state.

The front and rear distribution table 351 is a table for distributing the game balls B1 to either the innermost side or the frontmost side of the game area PA, and the front and rear distribution table 351 is the game distributed to the innermost side. A ball B1 is fixed to the game board 341 so as to move onto the stage unit 354 through the ball entrance 363 .

73(a) is a perspective view of the front/rear sorting table 351, and FIG. 73(b) is a plan view of the front/rear sorting table 351. FIG. FIGS. 73(c) and 73(d) are end views of the cut surface when the front and rear distribution table 351 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 341. FIG. As shown in FIG. 73( a ), the front and rear distribution table 351 is a plate-like table made of resin, and the surface of the front and rear distribution table 351 distributes the game balls B1 rolling on the front and rear distribution table 351 to the game area PA. It has an inclination for sorting to either the farthest side or the farthest front side. The inclination of the surface of the front/rear distribution table 351 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73(b) and 73(c).

As shown in FIG. 73(b), the front and rear distribution table 351 is formed such that the length from the upstream end to the downstream end is approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B1. . Further, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the front-rear distribution table 351 has a buried portion 351a that is buried deeper than the surface of the game board 341 when the front-rear distribution table 351 is attached to the game board 341. and a projecting portion 351b projecting forward from the surface of the game board 341. As shown in FIG. The game board 341 is formed with a fixing hole for fixing the front-rear distribution table 351, and an adhesive is used to fit the embedded portion 351a of the front-rear distribution table 351 into the fixing hole. A front-rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341 .

As shown in FIG. 73(c), the projecting portion 351b is formed from the surface of the game board 341 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the projecting portion 351b can contact both the game ball B1 positioned on the back side of the game area PA and the game ball B1 positioned on the front side of the game area PA. Further, the buried portion 351a has substantially the same depth dimension as that of the protruding portion 351b so as to withstand repeated collisions of the game ball B1 against the protruding portion 351b.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), the surface of the front-rear distributing table 351 includes a rolling distributing surface 371, which is the upstream half of the surface of the front-rear distributing table 351 and is a horizontal surface, and the back side of the surface of the downstream half. It consists of a first downstream surface 372, which is half, and a second downstream surface 373, which is the front half surface of the downstream half surface.

Returning to FIG. 73(a), specific inclination modes of the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373 will be described. As shown in FIG. 73( a ), in a state where the front and rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341 , the first downstream surface 372 slopes downward toward the back side, The second downstream surface 373 has a downward slope toward the near side.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front and rear distribution table 351 is fixed to the game board 341 in a slightly rotated state such that the rolling distribution surface 371 has a downward slope of 3° toward the right. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73(a), when the game ball B1 rolling downstream on the rolling distribution surface 371 is guided to the far side of the game area PA in the process of rolling, It is guided by the first downstream surface 372 and is guided by the second downstream surface 373 when it is guided to the near side during the rolling process.

As shown in FIG. 72, a first guide nail 228a and a second guide nail 228b for guiding the game ball B1 to the rolling distribution surface 371 are provided around the upstream side of the front and rear distribution table 351 on the game board 341. , the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 is prevented from jumping upward, and the game ball B1 is rolled for several seconds while being in contact with the surface of the front and rear distribution table 351. Guide nails 228c are provided. The first guide nails 228a are arranged in two rows with an interval slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. The two rows of the first guide nails 228a guide the game ball B1 entering between the rows to the rolling distribution surface 371 from the upper right direction, and the rows of the first guide nails 228a are guided by the front and rear distribution table 351. To prevent game balls B1 other than the distributed game balls B1 from entering a space above a stage unit 354 from a ball entrance 363 opened toward a game area PA.

When the game ball B1 guided by the first guide nail 228a collides with the upper left side of the rolling distribution surface 371 on the game board 341, the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 disappears and the rightward direction A single second guide nail 228b is provided to provide a velocity component of . The second guide nail 228b is positioned above the rolling distribution surface 371 by 7 mm.

When the second guide nail 228b is set at a position lower than the center of gravity of the game ball B1 on the rolling distribution surface 371, the game ball B1 is guided onto the rolling distribution surface 371 from the upper right corner. The point of collision with the second guide nail 228b is located lower than the center of gravity of the game ball B1, and the leftward velocity component of the game ball B1 guided by the rolling distribution surface 371 cannot be sufficiently reduced. there is a possibility. In this case, the game ball B1 passes over the second guide nail 228b and drops downward to the left. Further, when the second guide nail 228b is set at a position higher than the height of the game ball B1 existing on the rolling distribution surface 371, the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 may pass under the second guide nail 228b to the left and drop downward without colliding with the second guide nail 228b.

On the other hand, the second guide nail 228b positioned 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371 collides with the game ball B1 guided by the rolling distribution surface 371. It is a higher point than Therefore, the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 from the upper right is prevented from passing above or below the second guide nail 228b, moving leftward, and falling from the rolling distribution surface 371. A game ball B1 guided from the upper right can be bounced rightward (downstream).

In addition, the second guide nail 228b positioned 7 mm above the rolling distribution surface 371 can be used for the second game ball when the game ball B1 is already present on the rolling distribution surface 371. When B1 is guided to the rolling distribution surface 371, it does not come into contact with the second game ball B1. In this case, the second game ball B1 drops from above the rolling distribution surface 371 to the lower left without reaching the rolling distribution surface 371 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B1 from remaining around the front and rear distribution table 351.例文帳に追加

Above the downstream part of the rolling distribution surface 371 and above the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373, a plurality of third guide nails 228c are provided at intervals slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. It is After being guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 by the first guide nail 228a, the game ball B1, which collides with the second guide nail 228b and advances to the right, is placed on the surface of the third guide nail 228c and the front-rear distribution table 351. Invade a narrow space sandwiched between. On the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351, the game ball B1 collides with the third guide nail 228c multiple times, loses its vertical velocity component, and rolls rightward along the slope on the surface of the front-rear distribution table 351. move.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), the game ball B1 rolled on the rolling distribution surface 371 of the front and rear distribution table 351 fixed to the game board 341 and guided to the first downstream surface 372 is placed in the game area. It is distributed to the innermost side of PA. Further, as shown in FIG. 73(d), the game ball B1 rolled on the rolling distribution surface 371 and guided to the second downstream surface 373 is distributed to the frontmost side of the game area PA. In this way, the game balls B1 existing at random positions in the depth direction of the game area PA roll on the front-rear distribution table 351, so that the game balls B1 are in a pair relationship of the farthest side or the most front side. It is assigned to one of two positions.

Next, the course of the game ball B1 after being sorted by the front and rear sorting table 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is an enlarged view of the left central portion of the game board 341 (FIG. 72). As already explained, the game ball B1 distributed to the farthest side on the front-rear distribution table 351 passes through the ball inlet 363 formed at the left end of the stage unit 354 and moves onto the rolling surface 357 .

Since the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the mountain portion 358, when the game ball B1 distributed by the front and rear distribution table 351 rolls on the rolling surface 357, the game ball B1 The ball B1 does not have enough momentum to fall forward and downward from the valley portion 359 provided in front of the peak portion 358 . In addition, in the rolling surface 357, the width in the left-right direction of the trough 359 where the game ball B1 can fall forward is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the width in the left-right direction of the rolling surface 357 ratio is set low. Furthermore, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the peak portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set small. In other words, the configuration is such that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is less likely to drop forward from the valley portion 359 .

The game ball B1 accelerates from the left end of the stage unit 354 and rolls on the rolling surface 357 to reach the peak portion 358 . The mountain portion 358 is inclined downward toward the rear so that the game ball B1 can easily enter the entrance of the guide passage 366 formed in the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 distributed to the farthest side by the front-rear distribution table 351 wins the first operation opening 33 with a high probability.

On the other hand, the game ball B1 distributed to the front side on the front-rear distribution table 351 does not enter the ball entrance 363 and falls downward. The game ball B1 can be guided to the operation openings 33 and 34 by the left guide nail group 355, but the obstruction nail 228 is dropped while the game ball B1 is being guided toward the operation openings 33 and 34 by the left guide nail group 355. When the game ball B1 falls downward from the gap, it is recovered from the out port 24a without winning the operation ports 33, 34.例文帳に追加In the game board 341, the probability that the game ball B1 guided by the left guide nail group 355 wins the operation openings 33 and 34 is determined by the probability that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 lower than the odds of winning the prize.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The front-rear distribution table 351 distributes the game ball B1 to either the innermost side or the front-most side according to the position of the game ball B1 on the upstream side of the front-rear distribution table 351 in the depth direction. Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 moves onto the stage unit 354 through the ball entrance 363 in a mode according to the distribution result. The game ball B1 that has moved onto the stage unit 354 wins the operation ports 33 and 34 with a higher probability than the game ball B1 that has not moved onto the stage unit 354.例文帳に追加

That is, by arranging the front and rear distribution table 351 on the game board 341 in such a manner that only the game ball B1 distributed to the farthest side enters the ball entrance 363 of the stage unit 354, the upstream of the front and rear distribution table 351 is arranged. The game result can be made different according to the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction. Compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the position of the game ball B1 in the horizontal direction in the game area PA is reflected in the game result, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the game result becomes monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, on the game board 341, above the front and rear distribution table 351, there is a row interval that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, and two rows are arranged in a manner toward the rolling distribution surface 371 of the front and rear distribution table 351. is provided with a first guide nail 228a. The game balls B1 can be guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 in one row by using the first guide nail 228a.

In addition, on the upper left side of the rolling distribution surface 371, a second guide nail 228b is provided at a height higher than the center of gravity of the game ball B1 on the rolling distribution surface 371 and lower than the upper end. Therefore, the game ball B1 guided to the rolling distribution surface 371 can be prevented from deviating to the left, and a plurality of game balls B1 can be prevented from staying above the rolling distribution surface 371. can be done.

And above the downstream part of the rolling distribution surface 371 and above the first downstream surface 372 and the second downstream surface 373, a third guide nail 228c is provided with an interval slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. It is As a result, the game ball B1 guided onto the front-rear distribution table 351 is rolled while being in contact with the front-rear distribution table 351, and the position in the depth direction is moved to the farthest side or the frontmost side of the game area PA. Can be distributed to either side.

<Another form of the sixteenth embodiment>
The position of the front and rear distribution table 351 on the game board 341 of the sixteenth embodiment described above is not limited to the vicinity of the upstream side of the stage unit 354 . For example, the left guide nail group 382 is composed of the first left and right divided nails 213 (FIG. 51(a)) already described in the thirteenth embodiment, and the left guide nail group 382 has A configuration in which a front-rear distribution table 351 is provided may be employed. The configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 381 in this configuration. As shown in FIG. 75, a game board 381 is provided with a left guide nail group 382 . Four first left-right dividing nails 213 are provided in the upstream portion of the left guide nail group 382, and seven obstacle nails 228 are provided in the downstream portion. Further, upstream (on the left side) of the left guide nail group 382, the front and rear distributing table 351 described in the sixteenth embodiment is arranged. The game ball B1 is sorted to either the farthest side or the farthest front side by the front and rear sorting table 351. - 特許庁

76(a) and (b) are enlarged views of the game board 341 around the front and rear distribution table 351 and the left guide nail group 382. FIG. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the game ball B1 distributed to the innermost side of the game area PA by the front-rear distribution table 351 comes into contact with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left-right distribution nail 213 and moves forward. Since the game ball B1 receives a directional force, it is highly probable that the game ball B1 is guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 and wins. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the game ball B1 distributed to the frontmost side of the game area PA by the front-rear distribution table 351 comes into contact with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left-right distribution nail 213. Since the game ball B1 receives a force in the opposite direction, the game ball B1 drops downward from the gap between the first left and right dividing nails 213 with a high probability and is recovered from the out port 24a.

Thus, even if the front and rear distribution table 351 is arranged in the vicinity of the upstream side of the left guide nail group 382, the game result differs depending on the position of the game ball B1 in the upstream direction of the front and rear distribution table 351 in the front-rear direction. can be Compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which only the position of the game ball B1 in the horizontal direction in the game area PA is reflected in the game result, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the game result becomes monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

- As the front and rear distribution table 351 in the sixteenth embodiment described above, a front and rear distribution table 391 having grooves for distributing the game balls B1 on the upper surface thereof may be used. The front and rear distributing table 391 having this configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 77 .

FIG. 77(a) shows a groove for guiding the game ball B1 positioned on the far side of the game area PA to the farthest side and guiding the game ball B1 positioned on the front side of the game area PA to the frontmost side. It is a perspective view of the front-back distribution stand 391 provided. As shown in FIG. 77(a), on the upper surface of the front-rear distribution table 391, one wide groove is formed on each of the far side and the front side of the upstream portion 391a. The groove on the far side is the farthest side guide groove 391b for guiding the game ball B1 to the farthest side in the downstream part, and the groove on the front side is the groove for guiding the game ball B1 to the farthest side in the downstream part. This is the frontmost guide groove 391c.

The game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is configured to fit in the farthest side guide groove 391b of the upstream part 391a, and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is the frontmost side of the upstream part 391a. It fits into the guide groove 391c. Therefore, by using the front and rear distribution table 391, the game ball B1 located on the back side upstream of the front and rear distribution table 391 is guided to the farthest downstream side, and the game ball B1 located on the front side upstream can be guided downstream to the frontmost side.

Since the course of the game ball B1 in the depth direction can be divided into two ways according to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction, the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction does not affect the course of the game ball B1. Compared with the configuration of the pachinko machine, the relationship between the position of the game ball B1 in the game area PA and the behavior of the game ball B1 can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, FIG. 77(b) shows a front-rear distribution table provided with a groove for guiding the game ball B1 located on the back side to the frontmost side and guiding the game ball B1 located on the front side to the backmost side. 392 is a perspective view of 392. FIG. As shown in FIG. 77(b), on the upper surface of the front-rear distributing table 392, one wide groove is formed on the far side and the front side of the upstream portion 392a. The groove on the back side is the frontmost cross groove 392e for guiding the game ball B1 to the frontmost side in the downstream part, and the groove on the front side is the groove for guiding the game ball B1 to the backmost side in the downstream part. This is the innermost cross groove 392d.

The game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is configured to fit in the most front side cross groove 392e of the upstream part 392a, and the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is the most back side of the upstream part 392a. It is configured to fit in the intersecting groove 392d. Therefore, by using the front and rear distribution table 392, the game ball B1 located on the back side upstream of the front and rear distribution table 392 is guided to the most front side in the downstream, and the game ball located on the front side in the upstream B1 can be guided to the farthest side on the downstream side.

In this way, the front-rear distribution table 392 can reverse the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction. By arranging a structure that makes the game result different according to the position of the game ball B1 in the front-back direction downstream of the front-rear distribution table 392, the game ball B1 rolls on the front-rear distribution table 392. By doing so, the game result can be reversed. As a result, the player's attention is drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 on the forward and backward distribution table 392, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
The game board 421 (Fig. 78) of this embodiment is provided with a position change passage 423 (Fig. 78) for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA. It differs from the embodiment. Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixteenth embodiment are basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 421 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 421 in this embodiment and an enlarged view around the position change passage 423 in the game board 421. FIG. As shown in FIG. 78, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is located in the center of the game board 421, and the display surface 41a can be visually recognized from the opening 421a as in the sixteenth embodiment. The opening 421 a is defined by the center frame 252 . The center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 421a, a stage unit 354 provided to define the lower edge of the opening 421a, It has Here, the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in this embodiment has the same shape as the rolling surface 357 described in the sixteenth embodiment.

In the game board 421, on the left side of the display surface 41a, there is provided a position change passage 423 which is a linear passage whose total length is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. The position change passage 423 is a passage that takes in the game ball B1 positioned above from the entrance, changes the position of the game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423 in the depth direction, and releases it downward from the exit. . Details of the position change passage 423 will be described later.

In the game board 421, in the vicinity of the position change passage 423 and on the upper left side, a right guide nail 431 having a downward slope toward the right is provided in order to guide the game ball B1 to the entrance of the position change passage 423. It is The right guide nail 431 has the same inclination of the second distribution surface 218a as that of the first distribution surface 217a in the first horizontal distribution nail 213 (FIG. 51(a)) of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a resin nail created by changing to The right guide nail 431 has a protrusion that protrudes 17 mm from the surface of the game board 421 toward the window panel 52 when it is fixed to the game board 421, and the protrusion faces rightward as an upper surface. It has an inclined surface that slopes downwards. The inclined surface is formed from the fixed end to the free end of the protrusion, and is formed from the left end to the right end of the protrusion. The game ball B1 colliding with the right guiding nail 431 is guided to the entrance of the position change passage 423 by receiving a drag force in the upper right direction.

Note that the structure of the right guide nail 431 is not limited to this. In short, it suffices to have an inclined surface having a slope capable of repelling the game ball B1 that flows down from above and collides in the right direction and guides it to the entrance of the position change passage 423 .

In the game board 421, right below the exit of the position change passage 423, the first left and right dividing nails 213 are arranged with an interval of 13 mm wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. A game area PA extends on the left side of the first left-right dividing nail 213 , and a rolling surface 357 of a stage unit 354 is formed on the right side of the first left-right dividing nail 213 . Therefore, the game ball B1 distributed to the right by the first left-right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 . Also, the game ball B1 distributed leftward by the first left-right distribution nail 213 returns to the game area PA.

The position change passage 423 is formed by a transparent polycarbonate passage forming member 422 and is a passage visible from the outside. The position change passage 423 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79(a) to (d). 79(a) is a perspective view of the passage forming member 422, FIG. 79(b) is a front view of the passage forming member 422, and FIGS. It is an end view of a cut surface when the passage forming member 422 is cut along a plane.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the passage forming member 422 includes a passage forming portion 424 forming a position change passage 423, an upper fixing portion 425 for fixing the passage forming portion 424 to the game board 421, and a and a lower fixing portion 426 . The shape of the passage forming portion 424 has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, a depth approximately twice the depth of the game area PA, and a length approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. is a cuboid with a height of . A plate-like upper fixing portion 425 is integrally formed with the passage forming portion 424 so as to protrude upward, and a plate-like lower fixing portion 426 is integrally formed so as to protrude downward. there is

Both fixing parts 425 and 426 are formed to extend from the left end to the right end of the passage forming member 422 and have a rectangular parallelepiped shape. Both fixed portions 425 and 426 are formed in a manner such that the front side planes of both fixed portions 425 and 426 are located at a position 18 mm away from the front side plane of passage forming portion 424 to the rear side. As shown in FIG. 79(b), holes 425a and 426a for screwing the passage forming member 422 to the surface of the game board 421 are formed in the center of the front side plane of both the fixing portions 425 and 426, and penetrate in the depth direction. formed by

As shown in FIGS. 79(c) and 79(d), the passage forming member 422 is designed such that a portion of the rear surface of the passage forming portion 424 fits into a fixing hole 421b formed on the surface of the game board 421. It is fixed to the board 421 . The width and height of the fixing hole 421b are the same as the width and height of the passage forming portion 424, and the depth of the fixing hole 421b is substantially the same as the depth of the game area PA. Above and below the fixing hole 421b on the surface of the game board 421, an upper fixing recess portion 421c and a lower fixing recess portion 421d having the same shape and size as the fixing portions 425 and 426 are formed. It is A screw hole corresponding to the hole 425a formed in the center of the upper fixing portion 425 is formed in the center of the upper fixing recess portion 421c, and a screw hole is formed in the center of the lower fixing recess portion 421d. A screw hole corresponding to the hole 426a formed in the center of the lower fixing portion 426 is formed.

The passage forming member 422 is detachably attached to the game board by screwing the upper fixing portion 425 to the upper fixing recess portion 421c and screwing the lower fixing portion 426 to the lower fixing recess portion 421d. It is attached to 421. At this time, the surface of the upper fixing portion 425 and the surface of the lower fixing portion 426 are positioned on the same plane as the surface of the game board 421 . Therefore, the movement of the game ball B1 does not change by passing over both fixing parts 425 and 426.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 79(a), in the passage forming member 422 attached to the game board 421, the near side of the passage forming portion 424 protrudes toward the window panel 52 by 18 mm. A portion of the passage forming portion 424 that protrudes toward the window panel 52 is formed with a position change passage 423 by a through hole penetrating the passage forming portion 424 in the vertical direction. The upper opening of the position change passage 423 is the inlet, and the lower opening is the outlet.

The position change passage 423 includes a back wall surface 422a that is the inner wall on the back side of the passage forming member 422, a front wall surface 422b that is the inner wall on the front side, a left wall surface 422c that is the inner wall on the left side, and an inner wall on the right side. The right wall surface 422d is defined by four surfaces. Among these, the width of the position change passage 423 defined by the left wall surface 422c located on the left side of the position change passage 423 and the right wall surface 422d located on the right side is constant from the entrance to the exit. It is 13 mm, which is slightly larger than the diameter of the As shown in FIG. 78 , the center of the first left-right dividing nail 213 in the left-right direction is directly below the center of the position change passage 423 in the left-right direction. The game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423 can move 1 mm to the left from the center of the position change passage 423 and can move 1 mm to the right from the center. On the other hand, since the lateral dimension of the first left and right dividing nail 213 is 7 mm, the game ball B1 ejected from the exit of the position change passage 423 collides with the first left and right dividing nail 213 and changes its course. They are sorted either leftward or rightward.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), the inner wall surface 422a is a plane parallel to the surface of the game board 421, and the distance from the rear surface of the window panel 52 to the inner wall surface 422a is 18 mm at the entrance, and 18 mm at the exit. The distance from the rear surface of the window panel 52 to the rear side wall surface 422a is 18 mm. In addition, the front side wall 422b has an inclination that gradually approaches the back side wall 422a as it progresses downward. , the distance from the surface of the game board 421 to the front wall surface 422b is 16 mm. In this way, the position change passage 423 is configured so that the dimension in the depth direction of the passage becomes shorter from the entrance to the exit, and the center of the passage moves to the back side.

Here, the front side wall surface 422b has a slope that advances to the back side as it goes downward, but the slope is a slight slope. Therefore, when the vertically falling game ball B1 collides with the front side wall surface 422b near the entrance, the course of the game ball B1 is before the game ball B1 collides with the first left and right dividing nail 213 located below the exit. It does not change so much that it collides with the back wall surface 422a or the surface of the game board 421. In this case, the game ball B1 changes course to such an extent that it collides with the first distribution surface 217a, which is the surface on the front side of the first left and right distribution nail 213 located 13 mm below the exit of the position change passage 423.

In addition, the inclination provided on the front wall surface 422b is an angle that suppresses chattering in which the game ball B1 repeatedly collides with the front wall surface 422b and the back wall surface 422a in the position change passage 423. be. By making the inclination of the front side wall surface 422b to suppress a large rebound of the game ball B1 falling vertically and colliding with the front side wall surface 422b, the difference in the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction can be realized. It can be reflected in the course of the game ball B1 downstream in a manner that is easy for a person to understand.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), the boundary line between the first distribution surface 217a and the second distribution surface 218a of the first laterally distributing nail 213 is located in the center of the game area PA in the depth direction. . As shown in FIG. 79(c), at the entrance, the game ball B1 located on the back side of the center of the game area PA in the depth direction is ejected as it is from the exit and It collides with the distribution surface 217a and is distributed in the right direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79(d), regarding the game ball B1 located on the front side of the center of the game area PA, the distance from the center of the game ball B1 to the rear surface of the window panel 52 is 7.5 mm or less. The game ball B1 comes into contact with the front side wall surface 422b of the position change passage 423, changes its course to the back side, and after being ejected from the exit, collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213. to the right. Also, the game ball B1 whose distance from the center of the game ball B1 to the rear surface of the window panel 52 is longer than 7.5 mm is ejected as it is from the exit and collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213. to the left.

Thus, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 passing through the position change passage 423 is changed to the depth side with a high probability. By combining the position change passage 423 and the first left and right dividing nail 213, the game ball B1 can be guided onto the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in a manner corresponding to the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction. can enhance sexuality.

Next, the downstream path of the game ball B1 colliding with the first left-right dividing nail 213 provided below the position change passage 423 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80(a) and (b). 80(a) and 80(b) are front views of the game board 421 showing an enlarged downstream periphery of the position change passage 423. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 80( a ), the game ball B 1 collided with the first distribution surface 217 a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and distributed to the right direction. It is guided to surface 357 . As already described in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are provided sufficiently higher than the ridges 358, and the game ball B1 is positioned forward on the rolling surface 357. The lateral width of the trough 359 that can fall toward is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio to the lateral width of the rolling surface 357 is set low. In addition, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the peak portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set small. In other words, the configuration is such that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is less likely to drop forward from the valley portion 359 . Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 distributed in the direction by the first left-right distribution nail 213 will win the operation openings 33 and 34 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the game ball B1 distributed leftward by the first horizontal distribution nail 213 flows down the left game area PA. As shown in FIG. 80(b), on the game board 421, a left guide nail group 429 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the game area PA to the operation openings 33, 34 is provided on the left side of the operation openings 33, 34. located above. The left guide nail group 429 is composed of the obstacle nail 228 .

The game ball B1 distributed in the left direction by the first left-right distribution nail 213 is guided by the left guide nail group 429 and has a possibility of winning the operation openings 33 and 34, and constitutes the left guide nail group 429. There is a possibility that the nail 228 may drop downward through the clearance of the obstructing nail 228 and be recovered from the out port 24a. In the game board 421 , the probability of winning the operation openings 33 and 34 by being guided by the left guide nail group 429 is lower than the probability of winning the operation openings 33 and 34 by being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 .

Next, FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) show the case of using a replacement position changing passage 442 defined by a replacement passage forming member 441 instead of the position changing passage 423 defined by the passage forming member 422. Description will be made with reference to this. 81(a) and 81(b) are end views of a cut surface of the replacement passage forming member 441 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 421. FIG. Here, the passage forming member 441 for replacement is a member in which the inclination of the inner side wall surface 422a of the passage forming portion 424 constituting the passage forming member 422 is changed. The structure of is the same as that of the passage forming member 422 .

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the replacement passage forming member 441 includes a replacement passage forming portion 443 having the same outer shape as the passage forming portion 424 of the passage forming member 422, and an upper side of the passage forming member 422. It consists of a replacement upper fixing portion 444 identical to the fixing portion 425 and a replacement lower fixing portion 445 identical to the lower fixing portion 426 of the passage forming member 422 . The replacement passage forming member 441 is fixed in such a manner that a portion of the rear surface of the replacement passage forming portion 443 is fitted into a fixing hole 421 b formed on the surface of the game board 421 . Specifically, the replacement upper fixing portion 444 is screwed into the upper fixing recess portion 421c and the replacement lower fixing portion 445 is screwed into the lower fixing recess portion 421d. mounted as possible.

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the replacement passage forming portion 443 has a different inclination of the rear side wall surface 443a from the inclination of the rear side wall surface 422a of the passage forming portion 424. It is different from 424. The rear wall surface 443a has an inclination that gradually approaches the front wall surface 443b as it progresses downward. The distance from the rear surface of the panel 52 to the rear side wall surface 443a is 15 mm.

Here, the rear side wall surface 443a has a slope that advances toward the near side as it goes downward, but the slope is a slight slope. Therefore, when the vertically falling game ball B1 collides with the inner side wall surface 443a near the entrance, the course of the game ball B1 is before the game ball B1 collides with the first left-right dividing nail 213 located below the exit. It does not change so much that it collides with the front side wall surface 443b or the back surface of the window panel 52. The course of the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides with the inner side wall surface 443a is the second distribution that is the front side surface of the first left and right distribution nail 213 located 13 mm below the exit of the replacement position change passage 442. It changes to such an extent that it collides with the surface 218a.

Here, the inclination provided on the rear side wall surface 443a and the inclination provided on the front side wall surface 443b of the replacement passage forming member 441 are such that the game ball B1 and the front side wall surface 443b in the replacement position change passage 442 and the rear side wall surface 443a to suppress chattering. The slope of the front side wall surface 443b is set to suppress a large bounce to the back side of the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides, and the slope of the back side wall surface 443a is set to the front side of the game ball B1 that vertically drops and collides. By setting the slope to suppress a large rebound of the ball B1, the difference in the depth direction position of the game ball B1 can be reflected in the course of the game ball B1 downstream in a manner easily understood by the player.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), for the game ball B1 located on the back side of the center of the game area PA, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and collides with the back side wall surface 443a changes course to the front side. , after being ejected from the outlet, collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left-right distribution nail 213 and is distributed in the left direction. On the other hand, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and does not collide with the inner side wall surface 443a is discharged from the exit as it is, collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213, and is distributed in the right direction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81(b), for the game ball B1 located on the front side of the center of the game area PA, the game ball B1 falling vertically and colliding with the front side wall surface 443b moves toward the back side. After being ejected from the exit, it collides with the first sorting surface 217a of the first left-right sorting nail 213 and is sorted rightward. On the other hand, the game ball B1 that falls vertically and does not collide with the front side wall surface 443b is ejected from the exit as it is, collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left/right distribution nail 213, and is distributed in the left direction.

In this way, the back side wall surface 443a that guides the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right dividing nail 213, and the game ball B1 that vertically falls and collides with the first left and right By using the replacement passage forming member 441 provided with the front side wall surface 443b that guides the first sorting surface 217a of the sorting nail 213, the solenoid 27c and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 (Fig. 2) can be used. When the state of contact with the ball B1 changes and only the game ball B1 located on the back side of the game area PA is supplied or only the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA is supplied. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B1 guided to the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 from being excessively increased or decreased.

Also, the replacement passage forming member 441 can be attached to the game board 421 using the same fixing hole 421 b as the passage forming member 422 . For this reason, by mounting the replacement passage forming member 441 on the same game board 421 as the model on which the passage forming member 422 is mounted, the probability that the game ball B1 wins the operation holes 33 and 34 can be changed to select a different model. can be manufactured. Since the same game board 421 is used, different models can be manufactured more easily than when the game board 421 is changed.

Since both the passage forming member 422 and the replacement passage forming member 441 are detachably attached to the game board 421, the passage forming member 422 fixed to the game board 421 is removed to form the replacement passage. By replacing it with the member 441, the game board 421 can be recycled.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A position change passage 423 for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA is arranged upstream of the first left and right dividing nail 213 . Then, instead of the position change passage 423, a replacement position change passage 442 for changing the depth direction position of the game ball B1 in a manner different from the position change passage 423 can be used. By selectively using the passage forming member 422 and the replacement passage forming member 441 depending on the model, different models can be manufactured using the game board 421 having the same shape. Therefore, compared with the case where the configuration of the new game board 421 is examined and manufactured, it is possible to manufacture a model in which the game ball B1 easily takes a different course in a short time and at a low cost.

In addition, since both the passage forming member 422 and the replacement passage forming member 441 are detachably attached to the game board 421, the passage forming member 422 attached to the game board 421 is removed, and the replacement passage forming member 441 is removed. , it becomes possible to recycle the game board 421 in a manner in which the movement of the game ball B1 in the game area PA is different.

Also, the first left and right dividing nail 213 is provided at the left end of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354, and the game ball B1 collided with the first dividing surface 217a and distributed to the right side is guided to the rolling surface 357. In addition, the game ball B1 collided with the second distribution surface 218a and distributed to the left side is guided to the operation ports 33 and 34 by a large number of nails 228 provided on the game board 421. . The rolling surface 357, in which the left and right ends and the peak portion 358 are inclined downward toward the back, has a higher probability than the nail 228 of the game board 421 to the game ball B1 rolling thereon. It is configured to lead to the operating port 33 . For this reason, by attaching the passage forming member 422 that easily guides the game ball B1 to the back side above the first left and right dividing nail 213, the probability that the game ball B1 enters the first operation opening 33 is increased and the position is increased. By directing the player's attention to the movement of the game ball B1 around the change passage 423, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The position change passage 423 includes a back side wall 422a parallel to the surface of the game board 421 and a front side wall 422b inclined downward to the back side. The inclination of the front side wall surface 422b is an inclination of an angle (approximately 5°) at which the game ball B1, which falls vertically and collides, collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213. Therefore, by attaching the position change passage 423 to the game board 421, the game ball B1 that collides with the first distribution surface 217a, which is the surface on the back side of the first left and right distribution nail 213 provided downstream, number can be increased.

In addition, the front side wall 422b of the position change passage 423 prevents the game ball B1, which vertically falls and collides, from colliding with the back side wall 422a and the surface of the game board 421 until it collides with the first left and right dividing nail 213. Since it is inclined at an angle (approximately 5°), it suppresses the occurrence of chattering above the first left and right dividing nail 213, and greatly reflects the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction on the course of the game ball B1 downstream. be able to.

In addition, the replacement position change passage 442 has a structure in which a back side wall 443a and a front side wall 443b protrude into the game area PA at the exit. It is inclined at an angle (approximately 5°) for colliding with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213, and the front side wall surface 443b allows the game ball B1 that falls vertically to collide with the first left and right distribution nail 213 to collide with the second distribution surface 218a. 213 is inclined at an angle (approximately 5°) to collide with the first distribution surface 217a. Therefore, by providing the replacement position change passage 442 in the game board 421 in place of the position change passage 423, the second distribution surface which is the front side surface of the first left and right distribution nail 213 provided downstream The number of game balls B1 that collide with 218a can be increased.

In the position change passage 423 or the replacement position change passage 442, the ratio of the game balls B1 guided to the front side and the ratio of the game balls B1 guided to the back side are determined by the back side wall surfaces 422a, 443a and the front side wall surface 422b. , 443b, it is possible to manufacture a replacement member for guiding the game ball B1 at a desired ratio at a low cost.

<Another form of the seventeenth embodiment>
- In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the front side wall surface 443b of the replacement passage forming member 441 may be a plane parallel to the rear surface of the window panel 52 . As a result, the game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA falls from the exit as it is, collides with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left and right distribution nail 213, and is distributed to the left side. By making the passage forming member 441 for replacement easy to guide the game ball B1 to the front side, the difference from the passage forming member 422 to easily guide the game ball B1 to the back side is increased, and the game can be played between different models. It can greatly change the movement of the ball B1.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, by using one passage forming member 422 and changing the angle at which the passage forming member 422 is attached to the game board 421, the game distributed to the left side by the first left and right dividing nail 213 It is also possible to manufacture models having different ratios between the number of balls B1 and the number of game balls B1 distributed to the right side. For example, by sandwiching an angle changing member for changing the mounting angle of the passage forming member 422 between the fixing hole 421b of the game board 421 and the rear surface of the passage forming member 422, and replacing only the angle changing member, The configuration may be such that the inclination angles of the rear side wall surface 422a and the front side wall surface 422b of the position change passage 423 are changed. As a result, different models can be manufactured using the game board 421 having the same shape and the passage forming member 422 having the same shape.

- In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the outlet of the position change passage 423 may be configured to be positioned above the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 . Specifically, by providing the exit of the position change passage 423 at the left end of the stage unit 354, the game ball B1 ejected from the exit of the position change passage 423 hits the rolling surface 357 at the left end of the stage unit 354. Fall. In the range where the game ball B1 can fall, the back side area of the rolling surface 357 is inclined toward the back side and the front side area is inclined toward the front side, thereby changing the position. The game ball B1 guided to the back side by the passage 423 is guided to the rolling surface 357 without falling to the front side, and enters the first operation opening 33 with a high probability, and is guided to the front side in the position change passage 423. The hit game ball B1 falls to the front side.

In this way, the exit of the position change passage 423 is provided above the rolling surface 357, and the game ball B1 located on the left end of the rolling surface 357 on the back side and the game located on the front side By making the path different from the course of the ball B1, the position change passage can be opened without using the first left and right dividing nail 213 provided below the exit of the position change passage 423 in the seventeenth embodiment. The ratio of the game balls B1 that enter the first operation port 33 can be changed according to the shape of the 423.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, by utilizing the inclination of the guide surface 462 (FIG. 83(b)) in the guide passage 461 (FIG. 82), the depth direction in the case where the game ball B1 collides with the first left and right dividing nail 213 This embodiment differs from the seventeenth embodiment in that the collision position is changed. Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the seventeenth embodiment are basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 451 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 451 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, the game board 451 includes a display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, an opening 451a, and a center frame 252, as in the seventeenth embodiment. Similarly to the seventeenth embodiment, the center frame 252 includes a roof unit 253 provided to define the upper edge and left and right side edges of the opening 451a, and the lower edge of the opening 451a. and a stage unit 354 provided as follows. Here, the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 in this embodiment has the same shape as the rolling surface 357 described in the sixteenth embodiment.

In the game board 451, a guide member 471 having a guide passage 461 (FIG. 83(b)) for changing the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction is mounted on the lower left side of the display surface 41a. . The guide member 471 is transparent, and the game ball B1 moving in the guide passage 461 can be visually recognized from the outside. As shown in FIG. 82, the guide passage 461 has an entrance 485 on the upper surface of the guide member 471 and is formed toward the back side from the surface of the game board 451 . Further, the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 is formed in the lower part of the surface of the guide member 471, and directly below the exit 522 is provided the first laterally distributing nail 213 already explained in the thirteenth embodiment. .

An obstacle nail 228 constituting a left guide nail group 491 for guiding the game ball B1 to the operation openings 33 and 34 is provided below the first left and right dividing nail 213, and the first left and right dividing nail is provided. A rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 is formed on the right side of 213 . Here, in the game board 451, a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the obstacle nails 228 in the left guide nail group 491, and the game ball B1 is easily dropped downward from the gap.

As already explained in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are sufficiently higher than the ridges 358, and the rolling surface 357 allows the game ball B1 to face forward. The lateral width of the trough 359 that can be dropped is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio of the rolling surface 357 to the lateral width is set low. In addition, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the peak portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set small. In other words, the configuration is such that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is less likely to drop forward from the valley portion 359 . In this way, the possibility that the game ball B1 distributed in the right direction by the first left-right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and enters the first operation opening 33 is It is set higher than the possibility that the game ball B1 distributed in the left direction by the 1-left and right distribution nail 213 is guided by the left guide nail group 491 and wins the operation openings 33 and 34.例文帳に追加

Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 distributed in the right direction by the first left-right distribution nail 213 rolls on the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 and enters the first operation opening 33 is The possibility that the game ball B1 distributed to the left by the left and right distribution nail 213 is guided by the left guide nail group 491 and wins the operation openings 33 and 34 is higher.

Next, the guide member 471 in which the guide passage 461 is formed will be described with reference to FIGS. 83(a), (b) and 84. FIG. FIG. 83(a) is an exploded perspective view of the guide member 471, and FIG. 83(b) is a left side view. 84 is an end view of a cut surface of the guide member 471 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 451. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the guide member 471 includes an upper guide member 481 for taking in and guiding the game ball B1, a lower guide member 521 for discharging the game ball B1 while guiding the course, It is a member made of resin. The upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 are separable.

First, the upper guide member 481 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the upper guide member 481 includes a body portion 483 in which an upper guide passage 482, which is the upper portion of the guide passage 461, is formed, and and a protruding part 484 for taking in the game ball B1 while guarding it. Of these, the body portion 483 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and an entrance 485 for taking in the game ball B1 is formed in the upper front portion as an opening directed forward, and an upper guide is provided in the center of the lower plane. A first communication opening 486 (FIG. 83(b)), which is an opening for discharging the game ball B1 guided to the passage 482 to the lower guide passage 525, is formed.

The first communication opening 486 has an area through which one game ball B1 can pass with a margin of 1 mm in the vertical and horizontal directions. The entrance 485 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 and a height 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. In this way, the entrance 485 is formed to extend in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to take in most of the game balls B1 that move vertically just before the entrance 485 .

As shown in FIG. 83(b), the body portion 483 is formed with an upper guide passage 482 extending rearward and downward so as to be continuous with the inlet 485. As shown in FIG. Details of the upper guide passage 482 will be described later. As shown in FIG. 83(a), fixing protrusions 487 for fixing the upper guide member 481 to the lower guide member 521 to form the guide member 471 are formed on the four edges of the lower plane of the main body portion 483. is integrally formed in a manner projecting toward the In addition, the left and right side surfaces of the body portion 483 are provided with elastic projecting portions 531 for fixing the upper guide member 481 to the game board 451 on their upper portions.

The elastic projecting portion 531 is connected to a compression coil spring (not shown) fixed inside the main body portion 483, and the upper guide member 481 is detachable by utilizing the elastic deformation of the compression coil spring. It is fixed to the game board 451 in a manner.

The elastic protruding portion 531 is in a protruding position protruding outward from the side surface in the initial state where no force is applied to the compression coil spring. The compression coil spring contracts and becomes deformed when a force is applied from the outside of the body portion 483 toward the inside of the body portion 483 . In the deformed state of the compression coil spring, the elastic protruding portion 531 assumes a deformed position in which the most outwardly protruding portion in the initial state is positioned on the same plane as the side surface. The elastic protruding portion 531 in the deformed position returns to the protruding position due to the restoring force of the compression coil spring when the applied force is removed.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the elastic projecting portion 531 has a front portion 531a which is located on the front side of the elastic projecting portion 531 and protrudes outward with a steep slope, and a front portion 531a. and a rear portion 531b located on the far side and protruding outward with a gentle slope.

A protruding portion 484 of the upper guide member 481 is integrally formed so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the main body portion 483 . The protruding portion 484 includes a guard portion 489 for preventing the game ball B1 from advancing to the right of the upper guide member 481 on the game board 451, and the game ball B1 flowing down in front of the entrance 485. The game ball B1 located on the back side of the PA is guided toward the entrance 485 so as to be guided to the guide passage 461 (FIG. 83(b)), and the game ball B1 located on the front side is not guided to the guide passage 461. and a distributing portion 541 for guiding in the left direction.

The guard portion 489 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape and is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the main body portion 483 so that the left side thereof is positioned at the right end of the inlet 485 . The guard portion 489 protrudes forward from the body portion 483 by 17 mm. Therefore, when the guide member 471 is attached to the game board 451 , the guard portion 489 extends from the surface of the game board 451 to the vicinity of the rear surface of the window panel 52 .

The distribution portion 541 is formed integrally with the front surface of the main body portion 483 so as to protrude forward by 17 mm from a region below the lower end of the inlet 485 . The distribution portion 541 extends from the left end of the body portion 483 to the left end of the guard portion 489 . In addition, the distribution part 541 is equipped with a take-in surface 541a as an upper surface on the far side for rebounding the game ball B1 that flows down in front of the entrance 485 and collides with it, and flows down in front of the entrance 485. A left guide surface 541b is provided as an upper surface on the front side for repelling the game ball B1 that collides in the left direction.

The take-in surface 541a is inclined downward toward the rear, and is an inclined surface that bounces the game ball B1 falling from above and colliding toward the entrance 485.例文帳に追加The left guide surface 541b is an inclined surface gently sloping downward to the left in order to prevent the game ball B1 falling from above from staying there.

Next, the lower guide member 521 is described. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the shape of the lower guide member 521 is a rectangular parallelepiped having the same length dimensions as the upper guide member 481 in the left-right direction and the depth direction. An outlet 522 is formed as an opening directed forward to allow B1 to be discharged with a margin of 1 mm in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, the lower guide member 521 is formed with a lower guide passage 525 for guiding the game ball B1 discharged from the upper guide passage 482 rearwardly upward from the outlet 522 to the outlet 522 . Details of the lower guide passage 525 will be described later.

In the center of the upper plane of the lower guide member 521 , a second communication opening 523 is formed as an upward opening for continuously communicating the lower guide passage 525 with the upper guide passage 482 . The second communication opening 523 is formed at a position corresponding to the first communication opening 486 (FIG. 83(b)) on the lower plane of the upper guide member 481, and is the same as the first communication opening 486. has the size and shape of

Further, fixing receiving portions 524 are formed on the four edges of the upper plane of the lower guide member 521 so as to correspond to the fixing projections 487 of the upper guide member 481 . When the fixing projection 487 is entirely fitted in the fixing receiving portion 524, the fixing projection 487 and the inner wall of the fixing receiving portion 524 are brought into close contact with each other to form an upper guide. Allows member 481 to be secured to lower guide member 521 . In addition, the left and right side surfaces of the lower guide member 521 are provided with elastic protrusions 531 for fixing the lower guide member 521 to the game board 451 at their lower portions. The elastic protrusions 531 are the same members as the elastic protrusions 531 provided on the left side and the right side of the upper guide member 481 .

As described above, the upper guide member 481 is fixed to the lower guide member 521 in such a manner that the fixing protrusion 487 of the upper guide member 481 fits into the fixing receiving portion 524 of the lower guide member 521, thereby The passage 482 and the lower guide passage 525 communicate to assemble the guide member 471 .

In the game board 451, when the upper guide member 481 is fixed to the lower guide member 521, the main body portion 483 of the upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 are accommodated without gaps. (FIG. 84) is formed. In addition, on the left side and right side of the fixing hole 551, four recessed portions having the same shape and the same size as the elastic protruding portion 531 in the initial state where no force is applied are formed. The four recessed portions are formed on the left and right side surfaces of the upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 when the main body portion 483 of the upper guide member 481 and the lower guide member 521 are accommodated in the fixing holes 551 without a gap. They are formed at positions corresponding to a total of four elastic projections 531 provided on the left and right side surfaces.

In the process of attaching the guide member 471 to the fixing hole 551, the elastic projecting portion 531 is pushed from the side surface of the fixing hole 551 by pushing the rear portion 531b, which protrudes outward with a gentle inclination, to form a compression coil spring ( (not shown) is in a deformed state, and the elastic protruding portion 531 assumes a deformed position. In the deformed compression coil spring, when the recessed portion of the fixing hole 551 and the elastic protrusion 531 are overlapped at the mounting position, the force applied from the rear portion 531b is removed and the initial state is reached. As a result, the elastic projecting portion 531 returns to the projecting position, and the guide member 471 is attached to the game board 451 .

When the guide member 471 is pulled forward from the game board 451, the compression coil spring connected to the elastic projecting portion 531 is again deformed and assumes the deformed position. fixed in a manner.

Here, the attachment and detachment of the guide member 471 is performed with deformation of a compression coil spring (not shown) connected to the elastic protrusion 531 . When the guide member 471 is attached to the game board 451, the compression coil spring is deformed by applying force from the fixing hole 551 to the rear portion 531b projecting outward with a gentle inclination. On the other hand, when the guide member 471 is removed from the game board 451, the deformation of the compression coil spring is performed by applying force from the fixing hole 551 to the front portion 531a projecting outward with a steep inclination.

Therefore, the force required to remove the guide member 471 from the game board 451 is greater than the force required to remove the guide member 471 from the game board 451 . The guide member 471 is attached to the game board 451 in such a manner that it is difficult to detach from the game board 451, and even if the game ball B1 collides with the guide member 471, the position of the guide passage 461 is unlikely to be displaced.

Next, the guide passage 461 formed inside the guide member 471 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83(b), the upper guide passage 482 once guides the game ball B1 taken in from the entrance 485 backward and downward, and then guides it from that spot to the first communication opening 486 located forward and downward. It is an arcuate passage that The upper guide passage 482 continuously and smoothly connects the inlet 485 to the first communication opening 486, and the height of the passage gradually decreases toward the downstream near the inlet 485. , one game ball B1 can pass with a margin of 1 mm in the front, rear, left, and right directions. Since the cross section of the passage is set to be narrow, the game ball B1 is prevented from swinging forward, backward, left and right in the guide passage 461, and the course of the game ball B1 in the guide passage 461 is limited.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), the game ball B1 guided to the first communication opening 486 by the upper guide passage 482 is guided from the second communication opening 523 to the exit 522 by the lower guide passage 525. As shown in FIG. The lower guide passage 525 is continuously connected to the upper guide passage 482, and near the exit 522, the discharged game ball B1 increases the probability of colliding with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left-right distribution nail 213. For this purpose, a guide surface 462 is provided which is inclined downward toward the front. The guide surface 462 has a length twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the downstream path of the game ball B1 rolling on the guide surface 462 is greatly affected by the inclination of the guide surface 462.

As shown in FIG. 84, the guide surface 462 is smoothly taken into the guide passage 461 at the entrance 485, and the game ball B1 passing through the guide passage 461 at a constant reference speed or higher is positioned in front of the game area PA. It has an inclination to collide with the second distribution surface 218a. The inclination of the guide surface 462 is taken in by repeatedly colliding with the inner wall of the guide passage 461 at the entrance 485, and the game ball B1 whose passing speed in the guide passage 461 is less than a certain reference speed is positioned on the front side of the game area PA. It is an inclination to collide with the first distribution surface 217a. The guide passage 461 has a structure for causing most of the game balls B1 discharged from the exit 522 to collide with the second distribution surface 218a.

Next, the downstream course of the game ball B1 colliding with the first left-right dividing nail 213 provided below the guide passage 461 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85(a) and (b). 85(a) and (b) are front views of the game board 451 showing an enlarged downstream periphery of the guide passage 461. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), the game ball B1 collided with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left/right distribution nail 213 and distributed to the right direction is formed on the upper surface of the stage unit 354. It is guided to surface 357 .

As already explained in the sixteenth embodiment, the left and right ends of the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 are sufficiently higher than the ridges 358, and the rolling surface 357 allows the game ball B1 to face forward. The lateral width of the trough 359 that can be dropped is approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the ratio of the rolling surface 357 to the lateral width is set low. In addition, the height difference between the bottom of the valley portion 359 and the top of the peak portion 358 on the rolling surface 357 is set small. In other words, the configuration is such that the game ball B1 rolling on the rolling surface 357 is less likely to drop forward from the valley portion 359 . Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B1 distributed in the direction by the first left-right distribution nail 213 will win the operation openings 33 and 34 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the game ball B1 distributed leftward by the first left-right distribution nail 213 flows down the left game area PA. In this case, the game ball B1 may be guided by the left guide nail group 491 to enter the operation openings 33 and 34, and may drop downward through the gaps between the obstacle nails 228 constituting the left guide nail group 491. There is a possibility that it will be recovered from the out port 24a. In the game board 451 , the probability of winning the operation openings 33 , 34 by being guided by the left guide nail group 491 is lower than the probability of winning the operation openings 33 , 34 by being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 .

Here, in the fixing hole 551 of the game board 451, instead of the guide member 471 that discharges the game ball B1 in a manner that it easily collides with the second distribution surface 218a, It is possible to install a replacement guide member 561 for discharging the game ball B1. The replacement guide member 561 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is an end view of a cut surface when the replacement guide member 561 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 451. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 86, the replacement guide member 561 is provided with a replacement guide surface 562 different from the guide surface 462 instead of the lower guide member 521 when the guide member 471 is assembled. It is assembled by using guide member 563 . The replacement lower guide member 563 differs from the lower guide member 521 only in the shape of the guide surface 462 and the shape of the outlet 522 .

As shown in FIG. 86 , the lower end of the outlet 564 of the replacement lower guide member 563 is located below the lower end of the outlet 522 of the lower guide member 521 . Further, the replacement guide surface 562 of the replacement lower guide member 563 has a gentle arcuate shape that protrudes upward in the vicinity of the outlet 564 . For this reason, the course after ejection of the game ball B1 rolling on the replacement guide surface 562 of the replacement lower guide member 563 is the ejection path of the game ball B1 rolling on the guide surface 462 of the lower guide member 521. The game ball B1 ejected from the exit 564 of the replacement lower guide member 563 is more likely to collide with the first sorting surface 217a located on the front side of the game area PA. .

As described above, in the game board 451, the probability of winning the operation openings 33 and 34 by being guided by the left guide nail group 491 is the probability of winning the operation openings 33 and 34 by being guided by the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354. Therefore, by mounting the replacement guide member 561 on the game board 451 instead of the guide member 471, the game ball B1 is more likely to enter the operation ports 33 and 34 than the model to which the guide member 471 is mounted. models can be manufactured.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The guide member 471 forms a guide passage 461 having an inclination for making it easier for the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 522 to collide with the second distribution surface 218a of the first left-right distribution nail 213 provided below. It is In addition, the first left and right dividing nail 213 located below the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 causes the game ball B1 colliding with the first dividing surface 217a located on the back side of the game area PA to roll on the stage unit 354. It is provided in a manner leading onto the surface 357 . For this reason, the player expects that the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 will be guided to the rolling surface 357, and the player's attention is focused around the exit 522 of the guide passage 461, thereby improving the game. Interest can be improved.

Further, in the game board 451, the game ball B1 guided to the rolling surface 357 of the stage unit 354 is difficult to drop from the valley portion 359 of the rolling surface 357. There is a high possibility that B1 will win the first actuation opening 33 . On the other hand, after the game ball B1 flows down the left side of the game area PA, it is guided to the left side guide nail group 491 because it is configured to easily fall downward through the gaps between the obstacle nails 228 forming the left side guide nail group 491. The possibility that the game ball B1 that has been hit will win the operation holes 33, 34 is low. Therefore, when the game ball B1 ejected from the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 is distributed in the right direction, the player's expectation of winning the first operation opening 33 can be increased, and the first left and right swing can be increased. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the sorting result by the split nail 213 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the guide member 471 has a take-in surface 541a for allocating the game balls B1 positioned on the back side of the game area PA to the back side and guiding them to the entrance 485.例文帳に追加Therefore, the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA can be greatly reflected in the course of the game ball B1, and the player's attention is directed to the vicinity of the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

Also, the game board 451 can be fitted with a replacement guide member 561 instead of the guide member 471 . The replacement guide member 561 has a replacement guide surface 562 for making it easier for the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 564 to collide with the first distribution surface 217a of the first horizontal distribution nail 213. It is possible to manufacture a new model in which the game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 at a probability different from that of the model equipped with the member 471.例文帳に追加Manufacturing costs can be reduced by using the same game board 451 for a plurality of models.

In addition, the guide member 471 assumes a deformed position in the process of fitting the guide member 471 into the fixing hole 551 formed in the game board 451, and the guide member 471 is completely fitted into the fixing hole 551. As a result, the game board 451 is detachably fixed to the game board 451 by the elastic projecting portion 531 returning to the projecting position. Further, it is also possible to detachably attach a replacement guide member 561 using the same elastic projecting portion 531 to the fixing hole 551 formed in the game board 451 . Therefore, by reattaching the replacement guide member 561 to the game board 451 to which the guide member 471 was attached, it is possible to recycle the game board 451 and manufacture a different model.

<Another Form of the Eighteenth Embodiment>
In the eighteenth embodiment described above, a change guide 721 may be provided at the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 as a configuration for changing the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the exit 522 of the guide passage 461. good. A case of using a guide member 571 having a change guide 721 will be described with reference to FIG. 87(a).

FIG. 87(a) is an end view of a cut surface when the guide member 571 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 452. FIG. As shown in FIG. 87( a ), the guide member 571 is attached to a fixing hole 552 provided in the game board 452 . In the game board 452, fixing holes 552 for fixing the guide members 571 are provided above the fixing holes 551 of the game board 451 in the eighteenth embodiment.

The change guide 721 is an L-shaped tube having two open ends 572 and 573. The first open end 572 is connected to the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461, and the second open end 572 is connected to the outlet 522 of the guide passage 461. It is attached to the exit 522 of the guide passage 461 in such a manner that the exit side opening end 573, which is the opening end, faces downward in the game area PA.

The shape of the exit side open end 573 is circular, and the center is located on the back side of the center of the game area PA. Therefore, the game ball B1 ejected from the center of the exit-side opening end 573 collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left-right distribution nail 213 provided below and is distributed in the right direction. However, the exit side opening end 573 has a space in which the game ball B1 located in the center can be crushed by 2 mm in the front, back, left and right directions, and the depth direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the exit side opening end 573 The position shifts toward the back side or shifts toward the front side within a certain range.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), when the game ball B1 ejected from the exit side opening end 573 is positioned on the far side, the game ball B1 is provided directly below the exit side opening end 573. It collides with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left-right distribution nail 213 and is distributed in the right direction. On the other hand, when the game ball B1 exiting from the exit side opening end 573 is positioned on the front side, the game ball B1 is located at the first left and right dividing nail 213 disposed directly below the exit side opening end 573. It collides with the 2-dividing surface 218a and is distributed in the left direction.

In this way, by using the change guide 721 that limits the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction just before colliding with the first left and right dividing nail 213 within a certain range, the ratio assumed at the design stage The first left and right dividing nail 213 can be configured to distribute the game ball B1 to the right direction and the left direction of the game board 452 at a rate close to . In addition, since the change guide 721 is configured to guide the game ball B1 downward just before the exit side opening end 573, the game ball B1 ejected from the exit side opening end 573 hits the first left and right dividing nail 213. It is possible to prevent the collision with the surface of the game board 452 and the rear surface of the window panel 52 by shaking in the depth direction before collision.

Further, in the configuration using the change guide 721, the replacement change guide 722 uses the replacement guide member 561 provided at the exit 522 of the guide member 471 of the eighteenth embodiment instead of the change guide 721. As a result, the ratio of the game balls B1 distributed to the right by the first left/right dividing nail 213 and the ratio of the game balls B1 distributed to the left by the first left/right dividing nail 213 differ from those in the case of using the guide member 571. It is good also as a structure which can manufacture. A case of using the replacement guide member 574 having the replacement change guide 722 will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b).

FIG. 87(b) is an end view of a cut surface of the replacement guide member 574 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board 452. FIG. As shown in FIG. 87( b ), the replacement change guide 722 is an L-shaped tube having an inlet-side open end 742 and an outlet-side open end 743 like the change guide 721 . The length of the horizontal pipe 744, which is a pipe extending horizontally in the replacement change guide 722, is equal to that of the horizontal pipe 745, which is a pipe extending horizontally in the change guide 721. It is longer than the length dimension of (FIG. 87(a)). Therefore, when the replacement change guide 722 is provided at the exit 522 of the guide passage 461, the center of the exit-side opening end 743 is the first left-right dividing nail 213 disposed directly below the exit-side opening end 743. is positioned closer to you than the center in the depth direction.

In addition, the outlet-side open end 743 of the replacement change guide 722 has the same size and shape as the outlet-side open end 573 of the change guide 721 . Therefore, the position in the depth direction of the game ball B1 ejected from the outlet side opening end 743 shifts to the depth side or shifts to the front side within a certain range.

Here, the range of positions in the depth direction that the game ball B1 ejected from the exit-side opening end 743 of the replacement change guide 722 can take is the game ball B1 ejected from the exit-side opening end 573 of the change guide 721. It is deviated to the near side from the position range in the depth direction. Therefore, in the model using the replacement change guide 722, the rate at which the first left and right dividing nail 213 distributes the game ball B1 to the left direction is It is larger than the ratio of distributing B1 to the left. That is, the model using the replacement change guide 722 is a model in which the game ball B1 is less likely to enter the first operation opening 33 than the model using the change guide 721 .

Thus, by using the replacement change guide 722 instead of the change guide 721, it is possible to manufacture models with different probabilities that the game ball B1 wins the first operation hole 33. Since it is possible to use the same game board 452 for different models, the manufacturing cost is reduced compared to the case where different game boards 452 are manufactured in order to change the probability that the game ball B1 enters the first operation opening 33. It is possible to increase the variation of models while suppressing the

- In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the guide member 471 and replacement guide member 561 may be fixed to the game board 451 by screwing instead of the fixing method using the elastic projecting portion 531 . The guide member 471 has a screwing portion protruding from the body portion 483 in the left-right direction. In addition, the replacement guide member 561 also has a screwing portion protruding in the left-right direction so that the replacement guide member 561 can be screwed to the game board 451 . Around the fixing hole 551 (FIG. 84) of the game board 451, there are screws that can be accommodated in such a manner that the screwing portion of the guide member 471 or the replacement guide member 561 does not protrude forward from the surface of the game board 451. A fastening recess is formed. The guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 are screwed to the game board 451 in a state in which the screwing portion is fitted in the screwing recessed portion. Thus, by fixing the guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 by screwing, the guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 471 and the guide member 471 and the replacement guide member 561 are fixed in such a manner that the course of the discharged game ball B1 does not deviate even if the game ball B1 repeatedly collides. The replacement guide member 561 can be firmly fixed.

- In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the guide member 471 may have an opening/closing mechanism capable of opening/closing the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461 . For example, the guide member 471 is configured to eject the game ball B1 in a manner of colliding with the first distribution surface 217a of the first left and right distribution nail 213 with a high probability, and the internal lottery results in a predetermined lottery result. In some cases, the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461 may be opened. In this configuration, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained, the entrance 485 of the guide passage 461 is opened over a predetermined period of time, so that the game ball B1 has a high probability of being placed in the first position of the first left-right dividing nail 213. It collides with the distribution surface 217 a and is guided to the rolling surface 357 .

Thus, in the configuration in which the path of the game ball B1 changes in accordance with the position of the game ball B1 in the depth direction in the game area PA, the proportion of the game ball B1 positioned on one side in the depth direction varies depending on the time period. By adopting a configuration that increases and decreases, it becomes possible to change the flow of game balls B1 in the same gaming machine according to the time zone, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment in that a short-circuit prevention hole 761 for preventing solder bridges 751 is formed in a printed wiring board 741 constituting a main control board 61 . Hereinafter, the basic description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

The main control board 61 in this embodiment is an electronic circuit mounting board configured by mounting a large number of electronic components on a printed wiring board 741 . A specific configuration of the main control board 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b). FIG. 88(a) is a surface view showing an enlarged part of the main control board 61 (FIG. 43), and FIG. It is a diagram. Note that the wiring pattern 776 formed on the surface of the printed wiring board 741 is not shown in FIG. 88(a).

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the printed wiring board 741 of the main control board 61 includes a one-row connector 782 having four pins 784a to 784d arranged in one row and two pins 784e and 784f. and a two-row connector 783 having eight pins 784g to 784p arranged in two rows. The connectors 781 to 783 are mounted by inserting pins 784a to 784p into via holes 793 (FIG. 90(a)) formed in the printed wiring board 741. FIG. Here, the via hole 793 is a through hole penetrating the front surface and the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 . In the following description, on the surface of the printed wiring board 741, the rectangular area around the attached 1-row connector 782 is defined as a 1-row area 787, and the rectangular area around the attached 2-pole connector 781 is defined as a 2-pole area. 786. Also, on the surface of the printed wiring board 741 , a rectangular area around the mounted two-row connector 783 is defined as a two-row area 788 .

As already described with reference to FIG. 5 in the first embodiment, the main control board 61 is connected to the payout control device 77, the sound emission control device 81, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 61 provided in the main controller 60 includes a payout control board provided in the payout control device 77 and a sound emission control board provided in the sound emission control device 81. is electrically connected to Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 61 included in the main controller 60 is electrically connected to other boards such as a power failure monitor board 67 included in the main controller 60 .

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board 61 is connected to other boards using connectors 781 to 783, which are female connectors. An electric cable used for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and other boards has male connectors at both ends. Then, the female connectors 781 to 783 attached to the surface of the main control board 61 are connected to the male connectors at one end of the electric cables, and the male connectors at the other ends of the electric cables are connected. and a female connector attached to the other board, the main control board 61 is electrically connected to the other board. Here, other boards include a payout control board provided with the payout control device 77, a sound emission control board provided with the sound emission control device 81, a power failure monitoring board 67, and the like.

Also, on the printed wiring board 741, a large number of insertion mounting components such as a resistor 771, a capacitor 772, a transistor 773, and an IC 774 are mounted by inserting terminals 775 into via holes 793 to be mounted. As shown in FIG. 88(b), on the surface of the printed wiring board 741, pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are arranged around the one-row connector 782 as electronic components mounted on the printed wiring board 741. A copper wiring pattern 776 is formed for electrical connection. Similarly, a wiring pattern 776 (FIG. 97(a)) for electrically connecting the two-pole connector 781 to electronic components on the printed wiring board 741 is formed around the two-pole connector 781. A wiring pattern 776 (FIG. 97(b)) is formed around the two-row connector 783 for electrically connecting the two-row connector 783 to electronic components on the printed wiring board 741 . A solder resist 792, which is an insulator, is formed on the wiring pattern 776, and the wiring pattern 776 is not exposed to the outside.

Here, the structure of the connectors 781-783 attached to the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88(a) and 89(a)-(c). 89(a) is a perspective view of a single-row connector 782, FIG. 89(b) is a perspective view of a two-pole connector 781, and FIG. 89(c) is a perspective view of a two-row connector 783. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 89(a) to (c), each of the connectors 781 to 783 includes housings 781a to 783a having a hollow rectangular parallelepiped shape with an upwardly opening upper plane, and axially extending housings 781a to 783a. and metal pins 784a-784p formed from The housings 781a to 783a are insulators made of resin. Also, the pins 784a to 784p are male pins, and a plating film is formed on the surface thereof to improve electrical connectivity, corrosion resistance, and solderability. The plating film contains tin. A gold plating film may be formed on the surfaces of the pins 784a to 784p.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the connectors 781-783 are mounted in such a manner that the lower planes of the housings 781a-783a are parallel to the surface of the printed wiring board 741. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 89(a)-(c), pins 784a-784p of connectors 781-783 are evenly spaced with their axes perpendicular to the lower plane of housings 781a-783a. Also, the pins 784a-784p protrude above and below the lower plane of the housings 781a-783a. Of these, the upper protruding portions of the pins 784a to 784p are in metal contact with the female pins of the male connector when mated with the male connector. When the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed to the printed wiring board 741, the lower protruding portions of the pins 784a to 784p are inserted through the via holes 793 of the printed wiring board 741 and soldered.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the one-row connector 782 has, in order from the right, a first pin 784a, a second pin 784b, a third pin 784c, and a fourth pin 784d. 784a to 784d are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction with an interval of 1.5 mm. The row of the pins 784a to 784d is surrounded by the side surface of the housing 782a. Also, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the two pins 784e and 784f that make up the two-pole connector 781 are separated by a distance of 2.5 mm, which is wider than the distance between the pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782. The two pins 784e and 784f are surrounded by the side surface of the housing 781a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89(c), the eight pins 784g to 784p forming the two-row connector 783 are arranged in two rows of four pins each, and the circumference of the two rows of the pins 784g to 784p is It is surrounded by a housing 783a. The spacing between pins 784g-784p in each row is 2 mm, which is wider than the spacing between pins 784a-784d in one row connector 782, and the spacing between rows is 2.5 mm.

Here, the board provided with the pachinko machine 10 includes a single-row connector in which the interval between adjacent pins 784 is narrower than 1.5 mm, a single-row connector in which the interval between adjacent pins 784 is wider than 1.5 mm, a pin 2-way connectors with pins 784 spaced less than 2.5 mm; 2-way connectors with pins 784 spaced more than 2.5 mm; A dual row connector less than 1.5 mm, a dual row connector with less than 2.5 mm spacing between rows and less than 1.5 mm spacing between pins 784 in each row, and a 2.5 mm spacing between rows. A two-row connector is also provided that is wider than the 1.5 mm spacing between pins 784 in each row.

Next, the configuration of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). FIG. 90(a) is a perspective view of a printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged part of the back surface side, and FIG. 90(b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of a via hole 793 of the printed wiring board 741 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface. It is a vertical cross-sectional view shown in FIG. The base material 791 constituting the printed wiring board 741 is a paper phenol substrate manufactured by impregnating paper with phenol resin. The printed wiring board 741 is a double-sided board in which wiring patterns 776 are formed on both the front and back surfaces of a base material 791 that is an insulating board.

Note that the base material 791 of the printed wiring board 741 is not limited to the paper phenol board. For example, it may be a glass epoxy substrate manufactured by impregnating a glass cloth with an epoxy resin. The printed wiring board 741 may be a single-sided board in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed only on the surface of the insulating board, or may be a multi-layer board in which the wiring pattern 776 is formed also on the inner layer of the insulating board. good.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), a printed wiring board 741 is formed with via holes 793 for inserting terminals 775 (FIG. 88(a)) of insertion mount components or pins 784a-784p of connectors 781-783. there is In order to describe the configuration of the via hole 793, the process of forming the via hole 793 will be described below. First, a copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) having a thickness of 0.04 mm is attached to the front and rear surfaces of a substrate 791 having a thickness of 1.6 mm. After that, a through hole 777 (FIG. 90(b)), which is a hole penetrating vertically through the base material 791 to which the copper foil 779 is attached, is formed.

A substrate 791 having through holes 777 is then plated with copper. As a result, a copper thin film 778 (FIG. 90(b)) is formed on the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) attached to the front and back surfaces of the substrate 791 . Also, the through hole 777 becomes a via hole 793 by forming a copper thin film 778 on the inner wall at this timing. At this time, around the via hole 793 , the copper foil 779 around the upper opening of the through hole 777 and the copper foil 779 around the lower opening of the through hole 777 pass through the copper thin film 778 formed on the inner wall of the through hole 777 . They are in an electrically connected state.

A thin film of an etching resist, which is a photosensitive material, is formed on the copper foil 779 attached to the front and back surfaces of the base material 791 in which the via holes 793 are formed. The thin film of the etching resist is irradiated with light (ultraviolet rays) to transfer the mask pattern and is developed. By removing the unnecessary etching resist other than the mask pattern, the mask pattern is formed on the front surface and the back surface of the base material 791 .

Thereafter, in an etching gas atmosphere, dry etching is performed using ions or the like to etch the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) and the copper thin film 778 on the base material 791 on which the mask pattern is formed. By removing the etching resist from the mask pattern portion with an organic solvent, a copper wiring pattern 776 is formed on the base material 791 as shown in FIG. 90(a). The thickness of the wiring pattern 776 is approximately 0.04 mm, which is the same as the thickness of the copper foil 779 . The etching of the copper foil 779 and the copper thin film 778 on the base material 791 may be performed by wet etching in which the base material 791 is immersed in an etchant.

The printed wiring board 741 has a solder resist 792 formed on the front and rear surfaces of the base material 791 on which the wiring pattern 776 is formed, and is subjected to surface treatment such as solder plating, electroless gold plating, and water-soluble flux treatment. Created by Here, the solder resist 792 is a resist that serves to insulate between the wiring patterns 776 and also serves to prevent solder from adhering to areas other than the soldering target portions in the soldering process. The surface treatment is a treatment for improving the solderability of the portion that is continuous with the wiring pattern 776 and exposed to the outside, and is a treatment for making the copper foil portion less likely to rust.

Specifically, after a resist liquid is applied to the front and back surfaces of the base material 791 on which the wiring pattern 776 is formed by a curtain coating method, the pattern portion of the solder resist 792 is dried and hardened. . By removing the uncured portion of the resist, printed wiring board 741 having wiring pattern 776 and solder resist 792 formed on substrate 791 is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), pins 784a to 784p of connectors 781 to 783 and wiring patterns 776 are soldered around the upper and lower openings of via holes 793 on printed wiring board 741. A joint hole 762 is formed for electrical connection. The joint hole 762 is a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the width of the wiring pattern 776 and is formed on the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741 . Also, as shown in FIG. 90(a), in a printed wiring board 741, a short-circuit preventing hole 761 having an area larger than that of the joining hole 762 is formed around some of the via holes 793 instead of the joining hole 762. ing.

When pins 784a to 784p of connectors 781 to 783 are inserted into via holes 793, molten solder adheres to the surfaces of joint holes 762 or short-circuit prevention holes 761 formed around via holes 793. FIG. By solidifying the adhered molten solder, the pins 784 a to 784 p of the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed to the printed wiring board 741 while being electrically connected to the wiring pattern 776 .

Here, soldering is performed in a state in which the terminal 775 (FIG. 88) is inserted into the via hole 793 around which the joint hole 762 or the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed, so that the insertion mounting component is also attached to the printed wiring board 741. It is

The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is inserted into the via hole 793 adjacent to the molten solder adhered around the pins 784a to 784p (FIGS. 89(a) to (c)) inserted through the via hole 793 in the soldering process. It is provided for the purpose of preventing a short circuit from being formed on the printed wiring board 741 by merging with molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p. In printed wiring board 741 , short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided instead of bonding holes 762 around via holes 793 which have a high probability of forming a short circuit with adjacent via holes 793 .

When the amount of melted solder that adheres around the pins 784a to 784p inserted through the via holes 793 increases, the melted solder adheres around the pins 784a to 784p that are inserted into the adjacent via holes 793. more likely to merge. Therefore, even if the amount of molten solder adhering around the pins 784a to 784p inserted into the via holes 793 increases, the short circuit preventing holes 761 provided for suppressing the formation of a short circuit will remove the molten solder. It has a large area that can be held over the short circuit prevention hole 761 . As shown in FIG. 90( a ), the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set wider than the area of the joining hole 762 .

As already explained with reference to FIG. 88(a), a large number of electronic components are mounted on the printed wiring board 741. FIG. Therefore, if the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is widened in all directions around the via hole 793, the via hole 793 that is closest to the via hole 793 and a plurality of via holes 793 that are present near the via hole 793 can be connected. A short circuit may be formed between them. On the other hand, by making the shape of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 an elliptical shape extending in one direction, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a short circuit will occur on the crowded printed wiring board 741 . .

As shown in FIG. 90(a), the short-circuit prevention holes 761 formed around the via hole 793 avoid the direction in which the via hole 793 adjacent to the via hole 793 exists, They are formed extending in opposite directions. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed as an elliptical hole having a minor axis approximately equal to the diameter of the joining hole 762 and a major axis approximately twice the diameter of the joining hole 762 .

In the joint hole 762 and the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the copper foil 779 (FIG. 90(b)) is exposed upward. On the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741, the regions other than the joint holes 762 and the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are masked with a solder resist 792, so that solder is selectively adhered to the joint holes 762 in the soldering process. be able to.

Next, solder fillets 798 formed around the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 and around the terminals 775 of the insertion mount components in the soldering process will be described.

In the soldering process, pins 784 a - 784 p of connectors 781 - 783 are inserted through via holes 793 of printed wiring board 741 . Molten solder adheres to the via hole 793 and solidifies. As a result, the connectors 781 to 783 are fixed while being electrically connected to the wiring patterns 776 formed on the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741 .

Solder fillets 798 around the second pin 784b of the first row connector 782 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a longitudinal sectional view showing an enlarged view of pins 784 of a one-row connector 782 in a printed wiring board 741 cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface. Here, the pin 784 is the same member as the pins 784a-784p provided in the 1-row connector 782, the 2-pole connector 781, and the 2-row connector 783, and is a generic term for the pins 784a-784p.

As shown in FIG. 91, around pins 784 of one-row connector 782 fixed to printed wiring board 741, molten solder is solidified to form solder fillets 798. As shown in FIG. The solder fillet 798 is formed above the joint hole 762 and has a substantially conical shape extending downward from the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 along the pins 784 of the one-row connector 782 . The height of the solder fillet 798 is defined as the downward length from the bottom of the substantially conical shape to the apex. Solder fillet 798 is formed in a manner including part of the surface of pin 784 in single-row connector 782 , the inner wall of via hole 793 , and the surface of joint hole 762 of printed wiring board 741 . As already explained, since the joint hole 762 is continuous with the wiring pattern 776 formed on the printed wiring board 741 and covered with the solder resist 792 , the pin 784 of the one-row connector 782 is connected by the solder fillet 798 . It is electrically connected to the wiring pattern 776 .

The pins 784e and 784f of the 2-pole connector 781 and the pins 784g to 784p of the 2-row connector 783 are also soldered in the same manner as the pins 784 of the 1-row connector 782 are. Similarly to the connectors 781 to 783, the insertion-mounted parts constituting the main control board 61 are fixed by soldering with the terminals 775 of the insertion-mounted parts inserted into the via holes 793 of the printed wiring board 741. there is As a result, the terminals 775 (FIG. 88(a)) of the insertion mount component are electrically connected to the via holes 793 and the wiring patterns 776 formed on the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741. FIG.

FIG. 92(a) is a rear view showing an enlarged part of the same main control board 61 as in FIG. 88(a). On the back surface of the main control board 61, a joint hole 762 or a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around a via hole 793 through which the pins 784a-784p (FIGS. 89(a)-(c)) of the connectors 781-783 are inserted. there is Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92( a ), on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 , a 1-row back surface area 842 , which is a peripheral area of the attached 1-row connector 782 , is formed over the joining hole 762 . Circular solder fillets 798 formed over the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are aligned in a row.

Here, the configuration of the one-row back surface region 842 on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). FIG. 92(b) is a backside view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged one-row backside region 842 before the one-row connector 782 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), in the one-row back surface area 842, the via hole 793 through which the first pin 784a of the one-row connector 782 is inserted is defined as the first via hole 793a, and the second pin 784b is inserted. The via hole 793 is referred to as a second via hole 793b. The via hole 793 through which the third pin 784c of the first row connector 782 is inserted is referred to as a third via hole 793c, and the via hole 793 through which the fourth pin 784d is inserted is referred to as a fourth via hole 793d.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), in the back surface area 842 for one row, the via holes 793a to 793d are arranged from the right side to the left side in the order of the first via hole 793a, the second via hole 793b, the third via hole 793c, and the fourth via hole 793d. They are lined up in a line facing each other. In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 741 is conveyed rightward, the fourth via hole 793d positioned at the left end of the back surface region 842 for one row is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction. Also, in the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 741 is transported leftward, the first via hole 793a positioned at the right end of the back surface area 842 for one row is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), a wiring pattern 776 is connected to a short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the first via hole 793a in the one-row rear surface region 842. As shown in FIG. Further, in the one-row back surface region 842, the short-circuit prevention holes 761, the wiring patterns 776 connected to the short-circuit prevention holes 761, and the joint holes 762 are surrounded by an insulating region made of an insulator. A GND plane 851 for grounding is provided around the insulating region. Only the bonding hole 762 around the third via hole 793 c is electrically connected to the GND plane 851 by a connecting portion 763 having a width narrower than the major axis of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . A solder resist 792 is formed on the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 . Therefore, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 are not exposed to the outside, and molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 in the soldering process.

Here, the GND plane 851 will be described. In addition to wiring patterns 776 for connecting pins 784a to 784p of connectors 781 to 783 and terminals 775 of insertion mounting components mounted on the printed wiring board 741, connectors are provided on the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741. A GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) is provided as a ground pattern for grounding 781 to 783 and the insertion mounting parts. The GND solid 851 is a copper pattern and has a large area on the front and back surfaces of the printed wiring board 741 .

Some of pins 784a-784p of connectors 781-783 mounted on printed wiring board 741 are connected to GND plane 851 for grounding. In the one-row back area 842 of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the third via hole 793c located third from the right avoids both ends of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d, and is GND solid. 851 is connected. As a result, in the row of four pins 784a to 784d in the one-row connector 782 (FIG. 89(a)), the third pin 784c (FIG. 89(a)), which is not positioned at both ends, is grounded.

In the soldering process, part of the heat of the molten solder around the third pins 784c of the one-row connector 782 flows through the joint holes 762 formed around the third pins 784c. 762 to the GND plane 851 connected to it. Since the GND plane 851 has a large area on the printed wiring board 741, it can absorb more heat than the wiring pattern 776 with a small area.

The temperature of the molten solder around the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 is lower than the temperature of the molten solder around the remaining pins 784a, 784b, 784d of the one-row connector 782. Thus, the temperature of the molten solder around the pins 784a to 784p and the terminal 775, which are connected to the GND plane 851 for grounding, is lowered, and the fluidity of the molten solder is lowered. For this reason, around the pins 784a to 784p and the terminal 775 that are connected to the GND plane 851, molten solder is likely to merge, creating an environment in which a short circuit is likely to be formed.

In the one-row back area 842 of the pachinko machine 10, the third via hole 793c connected to the GND plane 851 is set so as not to be located at both ends of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. The formation of a short circuit at both ends of is suppressed.

Next, in order to explain the mechanism by which the solder bridge 751 is generated, first, the soldering process for mounting the connectors 781 to 783 and the insertion mounting parts on the printed wiring board 741 will be explained.

After the connectors 781 to 783 and insertion mounting parts are fixed to the printed wiring board 741, the main control board 61 shown in FIG. created. Here, flow soldering is a method of soldering by simultaneously supplying molten solder and heat to a portion to be soldered. FIG. 93(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jet 821 of molten solder, and FIG. 93(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the jet 821 hits the back surface of the printed wiring board 741. FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 93(a), the automatic soldering device 822 has an inclined member 822a having a gentle slope, and melted solder flows down on the inclined member 822a. Here, molten solder is solder that has been heated to approximately 250° C. and is in a molten state. When the temperature of the molten solder is low, the fluidity of the molten solder is lowered, which causes soldering defects. Specifically, the amount of melted solder that adheres around the pins 784a to 784p of the connectors 781 to 783 (FIGS. 89A to 89C) or the terminals 775 of the insertion mount component (FIG. 88A) increases. At the same time, the fused solder becomes less sharp, and the fused solder around the two pins 784a to 784p or the fused solder around the two terminals 775 merge to form a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)). It may cause a short circuit.

The soldering process is performed by bringing the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 into contact with molten solder flowing down on the inclined member 822 a of the automatic soldering device 822 . As shown in FIG. 93(b), in the automatic soldering device 822, the printed wiring board 741 contacts the molten solder while being transported in a state of gently sloping upward. The printed wiring board 741 is conveyed rightward by a belt conveyor.

Here, the behavior of the molten solder when the jet 821 hits the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 conveyed by the belt conveyor will be explained, and the effect of the short-circuit prevention holes 761 formed on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be explained. explain. First, the behavior of molten solder in the process of soldering the comparative printed wiring board 831 (FIG. 94(a)) in which the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is not formed will be described.

A plurality of pins 784a to 784p constituting connectors 781 to 783 and a plurality of terminals 775 constituting insertion mounting parts are arranged on the back surface of the printed wiring board 831 for comparison. For example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), when the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are soldered, the printed wiring board 831 for comparison is gently inclined upward. Since the four pins 784a to 784d are transported, the contact start timing and end timing with the jet 821 are different for each of the pins 784a to 784d. Here, as shown in FIG. 93(b), in the one-row connector 782 attached to the printed wiring board 741 conveyed rightward, the rightmost pin is assumed to be the first pin 784a. , the second pin from the right is the second pin 784b. The third pin from the right is the third pin 784c, and the fourth pin from the right is the fourth pin 784d.

As shown in FIG. 93(b), the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 come into contact with the jet 821 in order from the first pin 784a, and finally the fourth pin 784d contacts the jet 821. be in contact. Then, the first pin 784 a is released from contact with the jet 821 in order, and finally the fourth pin 784 d is released from contact with the jet 821 .

See FIGS. 94(a) to (c) and FIGS. 95(a) to (c) for the behavior of the molten solder when the four pins 784a to 784d of the single row connector 782 come out of contact with the jet 821. will be explained below. FIG. 94(a) is a longitudinal section of a comparative printed wiring board 831 for explaining the state where the second pin 784b, the third pin 784c and the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 are in contact with the jet stream 821. FIG. 94(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 for explaining how the second pin 784b of the one-row connector 782 comes out of contact with the jet 821. FIG. 8C is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 for explaining how the third pin 784c of the first row connector 782 comes out of contact with the jet 821. FIG. 94(a) to 94(c) are vertical cross-sectional views of the comparative printed wiring board 831 taken along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831. FIG. .

From the state in which the second pin 784b, the third pin 784c, and the fourth pin 784d of the first row connector 782 are in contact with the jet 821 (FIG. 94(a)), only the third pin 784c and the fourth pin 784d are in contact with the jet. 94(b), a predetermined amount of molten solder remains around the second pin 784b, and the formation of a solder fillet 798 begins. Thus, in the early stages when solder fillet 798 is formed, the amount of molten solder remaining around second pin 784b is determined by the area of bond hole 762 formed around second pin 784b and the comparative printed wiring. It is affected by the conveying speed of the plate 831 and the like.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), at the formation start timing of the solder fillet 798 around the second pin 784b, the solder fillet 798 being formed around the second pin 784b and the jet flow 821 are continuous. be. In this state, the melted solder around the second pin 784b and the melted solder of the jet 821 can come and go.

Here, the static properties of molten solder will be explained. Molten solder at approximately 250° C. has both fluidity and surface tension. Therefore, when a small lump of molten solder comes into contact with a large lump of molten solder, the molten solder forming the small lump is drawn toward the large lump of molten solder. As a result, the amount of molten solder forming small lumps is reduced compared to before contact, and the amount of molten solder forming large lumps is increased compared to before contact.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), when the molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b and the molten solder of the jet 821 are continuous, the molten solder around the second pin 784b Due to the small amount, part of the small amount of molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b is drawn into the jet 821. FIG. Therefore, a smaller amount of molten solder remains around the second pin 784b than the molten solder that initially adheres, and as shown in FIG. 94(c), the molten solder remaining around the second pin 784b causes the second A solder fillet 798 is formed over the bond hole 762 formed around the pin 784b.

FIG. 95(a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 for explaining the state in which the third pin 784c of the one-row connector 782 is out of contact with the jet 821, and FIG. 95(b). 95(c) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 for explaining a state in which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is out of contact with the jet stream 821, and FIG. is a vertical cross-sectional view of a comparative printed wiring board 831 showing a state in which a solder bridge 751 is formed between a third pin 784c and a fourth pin 784d of FIG. 95(a) to 95(c) are vertical cross-sectional views of the comparative printed wiring board 831 taken along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the comparative printed wiring board 831. FIG. .

When the third pin 784 c is out of contact with the jet 821 , some of the molten solder remaining around the third pin 784 c in the early stages of forming the solder fillet 798 is drawn into the jet 821 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95(a), a smaller amount of melted solder remains around the third pin 784c than the melted solder that initially adheres, and the remaining melted solder around the third pin 784c causes the third pin to melt. A solder fillet 798 is formed over the bonding hole 762 formed around the pin 784c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the fourth pin 784d located at the right end of the row formed by the four pins 784a to 784d (FIG. 93(b)) of the first row connector 782 is the jet 821. , the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d at the initial stage of forming the solder fillet 798 and the jet 821 are not in contact. Therefore, the amount of melted solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d in the initial stage is maintained as it is without being reduced.

In the printed wiring board 831 for comparison, the same joint hole 762 as around the first pin 784a to the third pin 784c is formed around the via hole 793 through which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is inserted. . An excessive amount of melted solder with respect to the area of the joint hole 762 tends to remain around the fourth pin 784d. When surplus molten solder that cannot be accommodated around the fourth pin 784d is generated, as shown in FIG. easy to do

When the melted solder around the fourth pin 784d and the melted solder around the third pin 784c merge to form a continuous state, the two pins 784c and 784d are placed between the two pins 784c and 784d. A solder bridge 751 is formed to electrically connect the . Thereby, a short circuit is formed in the main control board using the printed wiring board 831 for comparison. In this case, manual correction work is required after the automatic soldering work, and the manufacturing efficiency of the main control board using the comparative printed wiring board 831 decreases and the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the main control board 61 of this embodiment using the printed wiring board 741, as already explained in FIG. are arranged so that they are not located at both ends of the In the soldering process, the third via hole 793c is not positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, both when the printed wiring board 741 is transported rightward and when it is transported leftward.

As the temperature of the molten solder around the third pin 784c connected to the GND plane 851 decreases, the fluidity of the molten solder decreases, and the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is likely to occur. This configuration does not extend around the via holes 793a and 793d that may be positioned at the rear end of the plate 741 in the conveying direction. This reduces the possibility that solder bridges 751 are formed around the via holes 793 a and 793 d located at the ends of the back surface region 842 for one row due to the influence of the GND solid 851 .

In addition, in the one-row connector 782, the third pin 784c connected to the GND plane 851 is located inside the row of the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782. The amount of melted solder that forms the solder fillet 798 at the bottom is less than the amount of melted solder that initially adheres around the third pin 784c. This can prevent a solder bridge 751 from being formed around the third pin 784c connected to the GND plane 851 for grounding in the first row connector 782, thereby preventing a short circuit.

As already explained in FIG. 92(b), a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed instead of the joining hole 762 around the fourth via hole 793d through which the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is inserted. This prevents the melted solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d from joining the melted solder remaining around the third pin 784c, thereby suppressing the formation of solder bridges 751. FIG. Returning to FIG. 92(b), the details of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), in a one-row back surface region 842 in which via holes 793a to 793d are arranged from right to left, a first via hole 793a located at the right end of the row of via holes 793a to 793d and a via hole 793a at the left end A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the fourth via hole 793d located, and a joining hole 762 is formed around the second via hole 793b and the third via hole 793c located inside the row. As described above, short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed at both ends of the row of via holes 793a to 793d parallel to the conveying direction. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 around the via hole 793 located at the right end, which is the rear end in the transport direction.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), in the one-row back surface region 842, the distance LA1 from the center of the via holes 793a to 793d to the center of the adjacent via holes 793a to 793d is It is 1.5 mm, which is the same as the distance between (FIG. 89(a)).

As shown in FIG. 92(b), the distance LB1 from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793a to the right end of the joint hole 762 around the second via hole 793b, and the distance LB1 from the joint hole 762 around the third via hole 793c. The distance LB1 from the left end to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793d is the same as the distance LB1 from the left end of the joint hole 762 around the second via hole 793b to the right end of the joint hole 762 around the third via hole 793c. be.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), around the fourth via hole 793d, the fourth via hole 793d is positioned to the right of the center of the short circuit preventing hole 761, and the short circuit preventing hole 761 is positioned in the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. Located on the outside. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth via hole 793d extends outward from the row of via holes 793a-793d. Further, around the first via hole 793a, the first via hole 793a is located on the left side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761, and the short circuit prevention hole 761 is provided on the outer side of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. . A short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793a extends outward from the row of via holes 793a-793d.

By providing the short-circuit prevention holes 761 having a longer diameter than the diameter of the joint holes 762 toward the outer side of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d, the melted solder adhering to the joint holes 762 and the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are prevented in the soldering process. The possibility of approaching and merging with the molten solder adhering to the top is reduced. Thereby, the possibility of forming a short circuit on the printed wiring board 741 can be reduced.

Next, a solder fillet 799 formed around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 by a soldering process will be described with reference to FIG. 96 is a longitudinal sectional view of printed wiring board 741 showing solder fillet 799 formed around fourth pin 784d of one-row connector 782. FIG. Here, the longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 96 is a longitudinal sectional view of the cut surface when the printed wiring board 741 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the printed wiring board 741 .

As shown in FIG. 96, the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourth pin 784d in the printed wiring board 741 is larger than the area of the joining hole 762 around the fourth pin 784d in the comparative printed wiring board 831 described above. have. Therefore, a solder fillet 799 having a bottom surface larger in area than a solder fillet 798 that can be formed over the joint hole 762 can be formed over the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . Thus, the amount of melted solder that stably fits around the fourth pin 784d of the first row connector 782 in the printed wiring board 741 having the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is than the amount of melted solder that can stably fit around the fourth pin 784d. By forming short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the fourth pins 784d of the one-row connector 782 in the printed wiring board 741, the possibility of excess melted solder being generated around the fourth pins 784d is reduced. , the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 due to the molten solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), the short-circuit preventing holes 761 around the fourth via hole 793d are formed to extend outward from the row of the via holes 793a to 793d, and are accumulated on the short-circuit preventing holes 761. The center of gravity of the molten solder is located in the direction away from the adjacent third via holes 793c in the row. Therefore, even if excess molten solder is generated around the fourth pin 784 d in the soldering process, the excess molten solder joins the molten solder around the third pin 784 c which is far away to form the solder bridge 751 . can be suppressed.

As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the main control board 61 on which the single-row connector 782 is installed, a single-row connector having pins 784 (FIG. 91) with an interval of more than 1.5 mm is installed. and a substrate to which a single row connector narrower than 1.5 mm is mounted. In these one-row connectors, the pins 784 connected to the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) for grounding are arranged in the soldering process so that the pins 784 are positioned other than the leading end and the trailing end in the conveying direction. are placed off the ends of the columns. Since part of the molten solder remaining around the pin 784 connected to the GND plane 851 in the initial stage of forming the solder fillet 798 (FIG. 91) is drawn into the jet flow 821, the molten solder remaining around the pin 784 is decreases from the initial amount. In this way, the temperature of the molten solder around the pin 784 connected to the GND plane 851 decreases and the viscosity of the molten solder increases, which reduces the probability of solder bridges 751 forming around the pin 784. has been reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10, joint holes 762 (FIG. 90(a)) are formed around all the pins 784 of the one-row connector having an interval between the pins 784 larger than 1.5 mm. On the other hand, when a single-row connector in which the interval between pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is attached to a printed wiring board, if joint holes 762 are used around the pins 784 at both ends of the row, the printed wiring board is transported in the direction of travel. It has been found experimentally that the probability of forming a solder bridge 751 by merging the melted solder around the pin 784 located at the rear end and the melted solder around the pin 784 adjacent to the pin 784 increases. I know.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when a single-row connector in which the interval between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is attached to the printed wiring board, the pin 784 positioned at the end of the row is joined. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 90(a)) having a larger area than the hole 762 is provided. By using the short-circuit prevention hole 761 instead of the joint hole 762, the bottom area of the solder fillet 798 that can be formed is increased, and more molten solder is stably accommodated around the pin 784 located at the trailing end in the transport direction. making it possible. This can reduce the probability that the solder bridge 751 will be formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction in the one-row connector.

A short-circuit prevention hole 761 formed around the pin 784 located at the end of the row in the one-row connector avoids the adjacent pin 784 existing inside the row and is provided in such a manner as to extend toward the outside of the row. there is In this manner, the center of gravity of the melted solder accumulated in the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is positioned in the direction opposite to the adjacent pin 784 , so that the melted solder accumulated in the short-circuit prevention hole 761 once moves toward the adjacent pin 784 . It can be inhibited from migrating and merging with molten solder around adjacent pins 784 to form solder bridges 751 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a single-row connector in which the interval between the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is attached to the printed wiring board, not only the pin 784 located at one end of the row but also the other end of the row is mounted. A short-circuit preventing hole 761 having an area larger than that of the joining hole 762 and extending outward from the row of pins 784 is also provided around the pin 784 located at . As a result, in the soldering process, it is possible to reduce the probability that solder bridges 751 are formed around the pins 784 positioned at both ends of the row in the one-row connector regardless of the direction in which the printed wiring board is conveyed. Since the direction in which the printed wiring board is conveyed in the soldering process is not limited to one direction, the direction in which the printed wiring board is conveyed can be flexibly determined in the soldering process, and the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

It should be noted that the pin 784 spacing reference value of 1.5 mm, in which the holes formed around the pins 784 located at both ends of the row change from the joining holes 762 to the short-circuit prevention holes 761, is one row for a certain number of printed wiring boards. The probability that a solder bridge 751 is formed around a pin 784 located at the rear end in the conveying direction of a single-row connector when soldering for mounting the connector is smaller than a predetermined reference value. is a defined value.

As already explained in FIG. 89(a), the distance between the pins 784a to 784d of the single-row connector 782 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 (FIG. 92(b)) is 1.5 mm, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 ( It satisfies the conditions for setting FIG. 92(b)). For this reason, as shown in FIG. 92(b), short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided around the first via hole 793a and the fourth via hole 793d in the one-row rear surface region 842 of the printed wiring board 741, thereby The possibility of forming a short circuit on the wiring board 741 is reduced.

Next, the configuration around the pin 784 that constitutes the 2-pole connector 781 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described. As shown in FIG. 92( a ), on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 , a 2-pole back surface area 841 , which is the area around the mounted 2-pole connector 781 , is formed over the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . There are two elliptical solder fillets 799 .

Here, the configuration of the bipolar back surface region 841 on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 97(a). FIG. 97(a) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged 2-pole rear surface area 841 before the 2-pole connector 781 is attached. Two via holes 793 are formed in the bipolar back surface region 841 so as to be aligned in the horizontal direction. Here, the via hole 793 positioned on the right side of the bipolar back surface region 841 is referred to as a first via hole 793e, and the via hole 793 positioned on the left side is referred to as a second via hole 793f.

As shown in FIG. 97( a ), in the bipolar back surface region 841 , both the first via hole 793 e and the second via hole 793 f are located at the ends of the bipolar back surface region 841 . For this reason, unlike the case of the one-row back surface area 842 (FIG. 92(b)) described above, the via holes 793e and 793f connected to the GND plane 851 cannot be arranged at positions other than both ends in the transport direction. As already explained, the temperature of the molten solder decreases around the via holes 793e and 793f connected to the GND plane 851, so there is a probability that solder bridges 751 (FIG. 95(c)) will occur around the via holes 793e and 793f. is expensive. Also, around the via holes 793e and 793f positioned at the rear ends in the conveying direction, excessive melted solder tends to adhere in the initial stage of forming the solder fillets 798, so there is a high probability that solder bridges 751 will occur. expensive.

In the printed wiring board constituting the board provided with the pachinko machine 10, on the printed wiring board to which the 2-pole connector is attached, the two pins 784 (Fig. 91) constituting the 2-pole connector Both of them may become the pin 784 located at the rear end in the transport direction in the soldering process. When the pin 784 connected to the GND plane 851 becomes the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the surroundings of the pin 784 become an environment where solder bridges 751 are very likely to occur.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10, the standard for the spacing of the pins 784 for determining whether or not to provide short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the pins 784 of the 2-pole connector is the standard for the 1-row connector. It is set to 2.5 mm, which is longer than the value of 1.5 mm. In other words, in the board provided with the pachinko machine 10, when a two-pole connector with a pin 784 interval of 2.5 mm or less is attached, a short-circuit prevention hole 761 (FIG. 90(a)) is formed around two pins 784. ) are formed, and joint holes 762 (FIG. 90(a)) are formed around the two pins 784 when a two-pole connector in which the distance between the pins 784 is wider than 2.5 mm is mounted. ing.

Returning to the description of FIG. 97(a), the distance LA2 between the centers of the two via holes 793e and 793f in the bipolar back surface region 841 is 2.5 mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97(a), a short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the two via holes 793e and 793b formed in the bipolar back surface region 841. As shown in FIG.

As already explained, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed by positioning the via holes 793e and 793f at the rear ends in the conveying direction in the soldering process, and the pins 784e and 784f (see FIG. 89(b)) inserted through the via holes 793e and 793f. )) has a large area necessary to hold the melted solder on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 even when the amount of melted solder adhering to the hole 761 increases. Therefore, the possibility of forming a solder bridge 751 between the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) constituting the two-pole connector 781 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), the short circuit prevention holes 761 around the second via hole 793f extend in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first via hole 793e adjacent to the second via hole 793f exists. formed. Therefore, the center of gravity of the melted solder accumulated on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be positioned in the direction opposite to the first via hole 793e. As a result, even if the second via hole 793f is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder adhering to the second via hole 793f is unlikely to move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793e. The occurrence of solder bridges 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), around the first via hole 793e, a short circuit prevention hole 761 identical to the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f is formed. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed so as to extend in the direction opposite to the direction in which the second via hole 793f exists. Therefore, in the soldering process, even if the first via hole 793e is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the solder bridge 751 is formed around the two pins 784e and 784f that constitute the two-pole connector 781. can reduce the possibility of

As shown in FIG. 97(a), the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793e located on the right side of the second via hole 793f in the bipolar back surface region 841 is such that the first via hole 793e is located at the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761. It is formed on the right side so that it is located on the left side of the . Further, the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the second via holes 793f located on the left side of the first via holes 793e in the bipolar back surface region 841 are arranged so that the second via holes 793f are located on the right side of the center of the short-circuit prevention holes 761. , is formed to the left.

In this way, the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in such a manner that the distance LB2 from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793e to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793f is kept wide. . Therefore, the melted solder adhering around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) forming the 2-pole connector 781 is prevented from approaching the two pins 784e and 784f. It is possible to suppress formation of a solder bridge 751 due to merging of melted solder adhering around 784f.

Next, the configuration around the pins 784g to 784p forming the two-row connector 783 mounted on the printed wiring board 741 will be described. As shown in FIG. 92( a ), on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 , a two-row back surface area 843 , which is an area around the mounted two-row connector 783 , is formed over the joining holes 762 . There is a circular solder fillet 798 formed over the anti-shorting hole 761 and an elliptical solder fillet 799 formed over the anti-shorting hole 761 .

Here, the configuration of the two-row back surface region 843 on the back surface of the printed wiring board 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 97(b). FIG. 97(b) is a back view of the printed wiring board 741 showing an enlarged two-row back area 843 before the two-row connector 783 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), two rows of via holes 793 extending in the horizontal direction of the printed wiring board 741 are formed in the two-row rear surface region 843 in the vertical direction. Here, the via holes 793 forming the upper row are referred to as the 11th via hole 793g, the 12th via hole 793h, the 13th via hole 793i, and the 14th via hole 793j in order from the right side. The via holes 793 forming the lower row are, in order from the right side, a 21st via hole 793k, a 22nd via hole 793m, a 23rd via hole 793n, and a 24th via hole 793p.

Here, the two-row connector attached to the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this pachinko machine 10, the pins 784 (Fig. 91) constituting the two-row connector and connected to the GND plane 851 (Fig. 97(b)) for grounding are connected to both ends of the upper row. , and at positions other than both ends of the lower row. In this way, by not arranging the pin 784 connected to the GND solid 851 at the rear end in the transport direction, an environment is created in which the solder bridge 751 is likely to occur around the pin 784 which is the rear end in the transport direction. can be prevented.

Regarding the criteria for judging whether or not short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided around the pins 784 positioned at both ends in the transport direction in a two-row connector, if the interval between the upper and lower rows is sufficiently wide, the upper row and The same criteria apply for the bottom row as for the single row connector. Here, the interval between the upper and lower rows is the distance between the center of the pin 784 positioned at the tip of the upper row and the center of the pin 784 positioned at the tip of the lower row aligned parallel to the upper row. is.

In the pachinko machine 10, if the distance between the upper row and the lower row is wider than 2.5 mm, the same standard as for the single row connector is applied. In this case, in each row, when the center-to-center distance between the pins 784 is equal to or less than the distance LA1 (1.5 mm), the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the pins 784 positioned at both ends in the conveying direction. In each row, when the center-to-center distance between the pins 784 is longer than the distance LA1 (1.5 mm), joint holes 762 are formed around the pins 784 positioned at both ends in the transport direction.

On the other hand, when the interval between the upper row and the lower row is 2.5 mm or less, short-circuit prevention holes are provided around the pins 784 located at both ends of each row in the conveying direction regardless of the single-row connector standard. 761 is formed. As already explained, around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction, more melted solder is present than around the other pins 784 in the initial stage of forming the solder fillets 798 and 799 . adhere to. In a two-row connector, if the distance between the upper row and the lower row is 2.5 mm or less, a large amount of melted solder adheres, and the pins 784 that are likely to cause solder bridges 751 are formed in each row. There is a possibility that it will be in a state of approaching at the edge. For this reason, in the case of a two-row connector in which the distance between rows is narrow, even if the distance between pins 784 in each row is wider than 1.5 mm, short-circuit prevention holes are provided around pins 784 positioned at both ends of each row. By forming 761, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges 751 between the pins 784 positioned at the end of the upper row and the pins 784 positioned at the end of the lower row.

In the following, the two-row connector in which the short-circuit prevention holes 761 are formed around the pins 784 located at both ends will be described by taking the two-row connector 783 provided on the main control board 61 as an example.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), around a thirteenth via hole 793i that constitutes the upper row of the two-row connector 783 (FIG. 89(c)) and through which pins 784i that are not positioned at both ends of the row are inserted. A bonding hole 762 formed in the GND plane is connected to the GND plane 851 for grounding. In this way, by not arranging the pins 784g to 784p connected to the GND plane 851 at both ends of the row, it is possible to prevent an environment where the solder bridge 751 is likely to occur at the end of the row of the pins 784g to 784p. can be done.

As already explained with reference to FIG. 92(b), the distance LA1 between the centers of the adjacent via holes 793a to 793d in the one-row back region 842 is 1.5 mm. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the distance LA3 between the centers of the adjacent via holes 793g to 793p in the two-row back region 843 is 2 mm longer than the distance LA1 (FIG. 92(b)). . However, the distance LA4 from the center of the via holes 793g-793j in the upper row to the center of the via holes 793k-793p in the lower row is 2.5 mm. Therefore, in order to prevent a solder bridge 751 from being formed between the pins 784j and 784p (FIG. 89(c)) of the two-row connector 783 inserted into the via holes 793j and 793p positioned at the left end in each row, , around the 14th via hole 793j and around the 24th via hole 793p.

As already explained, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is positioned at the rear end of the 14th via hole 793j and the 24th via hole 793p in the conveying direction in the soldering process. Even if the amount of melted solder adhering to the pin 784p (FIG. 89(c)) inserted through the via hole 793p increases, the large area necessary to hold the melted solder on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is provided. have. Therefore, the possibility of solder bridge 751 being formed between pins 784j and 784p (FIG. 89(c)) located at the left end of the row of pins 784g to 784p in two-row connector 783 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the fourteenth via hole 793j are formed to extend toward the outside of the row, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent thirteenth via hole 793i exists. It is Therefore, the center of gravity of the melted solder accumulated on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be positioned in the direction opposite to the thirteenth via hole 793i. As a result, even if the 14th via hole 793j is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder adhering to the 14th via hole 793j is unlikely to move toward the adjacent 13th via hole 793i. The occurrence of solder bridges 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the twenty-fourth via hole 793p are formed to extend toward the outside of the column, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent twenty-third via hole 793n exists. It is Therefore, the center of gravity of the melted solder accumulated on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be positioned in the direction opposite to the 23rd via hole 793n. As a result, even if the 24th via hole 793p is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the molten solder adhering to the 24th via hole 793p is unlikely to move toward the adjacent 23rd via hole 793n. The occurrence of solder bridges 751 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), around the eleventh via hole 793g, a short circuit prevention hole 761 identical to the short circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourteenth via hole 793j is formed. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed to extend toward the outside of the row, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent twelfth via hole 793h exists. A short-circuit preventing hole 761 identical to the short-circuit preventing hole 761 around the 24th via hole 793p is formed around the 21st via hole 793k. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed so as to extend toward the outside of the row, which is the direction opposite to the direction in which the adjacent 22nd via hole 793m exists. Therefore, in the soldering process, the via holes 793g, 793j, and 793k located at both ends of the row of the via holes 793g to 793p are formed regardless of whether the printed wiring board 741 is conveyed rightward or leftward. , 793p can reduce the likelihood of solder bridges 751 forming.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), short-circuit prevention holes 761 around via holes 793g, 793j, 793k, 793p located at the ends of the columns in the two-column back surface region 843 are formed on the outer sides of the columns. Specifically, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 11th via hole 793g is formed in such a manner that the 11th via-hole 793g is located to the left of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the 21st via hole 793k The prevention hole 761 is formed such that the 21st via hole 793k is located on the left side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761 . In addition, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the fourteenth via hole 793j is formed so that the fourteenth via-hole 793j is located on the right side of the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the twenty-fourth via hole 793p. is formed such that the 24th via hole 793p is located on the right side of the center of the short circuit prevention hole 761. As shown in FIG.

In this manner, the molten solder adhering to the short-circuit preventing hole 761 is prevented from approaching the molten solder adhering to the joint hole 762 adjacent to the short-circuit preventing hole 761 . This can reduce the possibility that the molten solder adhering to the short-circuit preventing hole 761 joins the molten solder adhering to the joint hole 762 adjacent to the short-circuit preventing hole 761 to form a solder bridge 751 .

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Among the pins 784 arranged in a row on the printed wiring board 741, if the distance between the adjacent pins 784 in the row is equal to or less than the reference distance, the pins 784 that are not positioned at the end of the row A bonding hole 762 is formed around it, and an anti-shorting hole 761 having a larger area than the bonding hole 762 is formed around the pin 784 located at the end of the row. Therefore, compared to the case where the joint holes 762 are also formed around the pin 784 at the end of the row, a large amount of melted solder is stably applied around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction. , and the probability of forming a solder bridge 751 around the pin 784 is reduced.

The shape of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is oval. For this reason, the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set to be large enough to hold the melted solder around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction. It is possible to avoid the melted solder on the top of the pin 784 from merging with the melted solder adhering around the pins 784 in the vicinity of the pin 784 in question.

A short-circuit prevention hole 761 around a pin 784 positioned at the end of the row is formed extending outward from the row. Therefore, the center of gravity of the melted solder accumulated on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 can be positioned in the direction where the adjacent pin 784 does not exist. When the pin 784 positioned at the end of the row is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction, the molten solder accumulated around the pin 784 merges with the molten solder around the adjacent pin 784. can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges 751 between the pin 784 at the end of the row and the pin 784 adjacent to this pin 784 .

A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the pin 784 located at one end of the row and also around the pin 784 located at the other end of the row, extending outwardly of the row. Therefore, in the soldering process, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the pin 784 located at the rear end of the transport direction is reduced regardless of the transport direction of the printed wiring board 741 . can do.

The short-circuit preventing holes 761 formed around the via holes 793 protrude from the via holes 793 toward the inside of the row (adjacent pin 784 side), and the solder fillets formed on the short-circuit preventing holes 761 It is set to the minimum length necessary to maintain the strength of 799. If the short-circuit prevention holes 761 protrude from the via holes 793 to the inner side of the row in order to secure a large area of the short-circuit prevention holes 761 , the melted solder adhering to the short-circuit prevention holes 761 may flow into the adjacent joining holes 762 or the adjacent short-circuit prevention holes 761 . There is a possibility that the distance to the molten solder adhering to the hole 761 will be shortened, and the confluence of the molten solder will be likely to occur. In this case, the effect of suppressing the formation of solder bridges 751 by securing a large area for short-circuit prevention holes 761 is halved. On the other hand, by minimizing the length of the short-circuit preventing holes 761 protruding from the via holes 793 toward the inside of the row, the molten solder adhering to the short-circuit preventing holes 761 moves toward the adjacent via holes 793 . Possibility can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to avoid halving the effect of suppressing the formation of the solder bridges 751 by providing the short-circuit prevention holes 761 .

In addition, when the interval between the pins 784 is wider than the reference value, in the row of the pins 784 , the area around the pin 784 located at the end of the printed wiring board 741 in the conveying direction is larger than the bonding hole 762 . This configuration does not use the large short-circuit prevention hole 761 . By omitting the unnecessary short-circuit prevention holes 761 on the printed wiring board 741 whose area is limited, the number of insertion mounting components that can be mounted on the printed wiring board 741 can be increased, and the density of the board can be increased. can.

In addition, except for the case of the two-pole connector 781 where it is not possible to avoid arranging the pin 784 connected to the GND plane 851 at the end of the line composed of a plurality of pins 784, the pin 784 connected to the GND plane 851 is arranged in the line. It is a configuration that is not arranged at the end. In the 2-pole connector 781, the interval between the pins 784 serving as a reference for providing the short-circuit prevention holes 761 is set wider than the interval between the pins 784 serving as a reference for providing the short-circuit prevention holes 761 in the one-row connector 782 and the two-row connector 783. ing. This can reduce the possibility of solder bridges 751 occurring due to a drop in the temperature of the molten solder around the pin 784 connecting to the GND solid 851 .

When the printed wiring board 741 has a plurality of rows of via holes 793, the via holes 793 positioned at the end of the first row and the via holes 793 positioned at the end of the second row different from the first row. and are arranged closer than the reference value on the printed wiring board 741, even if the distance between the centers of the adjacent via holes 793 in each row is wider than the reference for providing the short-circuit prevention holes 761. , short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in both of the via holes 793 located at the ends of the two columns. This reduces the likelihood of solder bridges 751 forming between pins 784 that are inserted into two via holes 793 that are located at the ends of different rows and are each in an environment of high molten solder deposition. be able to.

<Another Form of the Nineteenth Embodiment>
- In the above-described nineteenth embodiment, the direction in which the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the pins 784 positioned at both ends of the row are extended is not limited to the opposite direction of the adjacent pins 784 . For example, in a row of pins 784 arranged in the left-right direction, the direction in which the short-circuit prevention holes 761 around the pin 784 positioned at the right end and the pin 784 positioned at the left end are formed by extending is You may incline at a predetermined angle. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the horizontal direction is referred to as an inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861, and the inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 98(a).

A printed wiring board 863 is different from the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment in that it has a one-row rear surface region 862 in which an inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 is formed. FIG. 98(a) is a backside view of a printed wiring board 863 showing an enlarged one-row backside region 862 having inclined short-circuit prevention holes 861. FIG. Here, in FIG. 98(a), illustration of the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) is omitted. A case in which the printed wiring board 863 is transported rightward in the soldering process will be described below. As shown in FIG. 98(a), two 1-row connectors 782 (FIG. 89(a)) are mounted side by side on the 1-row rear surface area 862 of the printed wiring board 863. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 98( a ), the one-row rear surface region 862 is provided with four pins 784 ( FIG. 91 ) of the first connector, which is the first one-row connector 782 , for inserting therethrough. As via holes, first via holes 864 are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction at intervals of 1.5 mm. Here, the first via hole 864 has the same configuration as the via hole 793 (FIG. 90(b)) in the nineteenth embodiment.

In the one-row back surface area 862, second via holes 865, which are via holes for inserting four pins 784 of the second connector, which is the second one-row connector 782, are formed at intervals of 1.5 mm. are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. Here, the second via hole 865 has the same configuration as the via hole 793 (FIG. 90(b)) in the nineteenth embodiment.

Also, the centers of the four first via holes 864 and the centers of the four second via holes 865 are aligned on the same straight line. In addition, the second via hole 865 is located to the right of the first via hole 864 , and from the center of the first via hole 864 located at the right end of the four first via holes 864 to the left end of the four second via holes 865 . The distance to the center of the second via hole 865 located at 3 mm.

Joining holes 762 are formed around the first via holes 864 that are not positioned at both ends of the row of the first via holes 864 and around the second via holes 865 that are not positioned at both ends of the row of the second via holes 865 . Around the first via hole 864 located at the right end of the four first via holes 864 and around the second via hole 865 located at the right end of the four second via holes 865, each An inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 is formed extending upward. The inclined short-circuit preventing hole 861 has an elliptical shape with the same shape and size as the short-circuit preventing hole 761 in the nineteenth embodiment. ing.

In addition, around the first via hole 864 located at the left end of the four first via holes 864 and around the second via hole 865 located at the left end of the four second via holes 865, each An oblique short-circuit prevention hole 861 is formed extending downward. The inclined short-circuit preventing hole 861 has an elliptical shape with the same shape and size as the short-circuit preventing hole 761 in the nineteenth embodiment. ing.

Thus, in the configuration in which the pin 784 positioned at the right end of the first connector and the pin 784 positioned at the left end of the second connector are close to each other in the conveying direction, the pin 784 positioned at the right end of the first connector A slanted short-circuit prevention hole 861 around the pin 784 located at the left end of the second connector is formed so as to extend obliquely upward to the right. It is a configuration formed by extending downward. As a result, the molten solder accumulated in the inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 at the right end of the first connector and the molten solder accumulated in the inclined short-circuit prevention hole 861 at the left end of the second connector merge to form a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)). ) can be prevented from forming.

- In the nineteenth embodiment described above, the via hole 793 is positioned at the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, and the distance between the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and the joint hole 762 is the same as the distance between the joint holes 762. A certain configuration may be used. A specific example of the configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 98(b).

The printed wiring board 866 has a distance from the center of the rightmost via hole 793 to the center of the via hole 793 adjacent to the rightmost viahole 793 , and from the center of the leftmost viahole 793 to the center of the via hole 793 adjacent to the leftmost via hole 793 . is set wider than the distance between the centers of the via holes 793 inside the row, unlike the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 98(b) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 866 showing an enlarged rear surface area 867 for one row. Here, in FIG. 98(b), illustration of the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 98(b), in the one-row rear surface region 867 of the printed wiring board 866, there are via holes 793 for inserting four pins 784a to 784d constituting the one-row connector 782 in the horizontal direction. are arranged in a row on the A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 located at the right end so that the via hole 793 at the right end is located at the center, and the via hole 793 at the left end is formed at the center around the via hole 793 located at the left end. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed in a manner located at . Around the second via hole 793 from the right and the third via hole 793 from the right, bonding holes 762 are formed such that the via hole 793 is positioned at the center.

Here, the distance between the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the via hole 793 positioned on the right end and the right end of the joining hole 762 around the via hole 793 positioned second from the right is defined as a distance LC1, The distance between the left end of the joint hole 762 around the located via hole 793 and the right end of the joint hole 762 around the third via hole 793 from the right is defined as a distance LC2. Also, the distance between the left end of the joining hole 762 around the via hole 793 positioned third from the right and the right end of the short circuit prevention hole 761 positioned at the left end is defined as a distance LC3.

In this case, by configuring the distances LC1, LC2, and LC3 to be the same distance, compared to the configuration in which all the via holes 793 are equally spaced, the molten solder adhering to the short-circuit prevention holes 761 is reduced. is far from the center of gravity of the molten solder adhering to the joint hole 762, and the probability that the molten solder on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and the molten solder on the joint hole 762 merge to form a solder bridge 751 is reduced. can be done. In addition, since the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are fixed in the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, the strength of the solder fillet 799 formed on the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is increased to reduce vibration during use. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the solder fillet 799 will be damaged due to such factors as to extend the service life of the main control board 61 .

- In the nineteenth embodiment described above, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 may be configured such that the via hole 793 positioned inside the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is positioned at the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . The configuration will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 98(c).

The printed wiring board 868 differs from the printed wiring board 741 in the nineteenth embodiment in that it has a one-row rear surface area 869 in which the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed with the via hole 793 in the center. FIG. 98(c) is a rear view of the printed wiring board 868 showing an enlarged one-row rear surface area 869 of the printed wiring board 868. FIG. Here, in FIG. 98(c), the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 98(c), the printed wiring board 868 has four via holes 793 in the horizontal direction at intervals of 1.5 mm for inserting the four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782. As shown in FIG. They are formed in a row. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the via hole 793 located on the right end in a manner centered on the via hole 793 on the right end, and around the via hole 793 located on the left end centered on the via hole 793 on the left end. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed in such a manner as to A bonding hole 762 is formed around the via hole 793 located second from the right in a manner centered on the via hole 793, and a via hole 793 is formed around the via hole 793 located third from the right. A joint hole 762 is formed in a manner centered at .

In this way, the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 are inserted into the via hole 793 formed in the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 and soldered. The solder fillets 799 formed around the pins 784a and 784d are stronger against forces acting in the lateral direction than the solder fillets 799 formed when the via holes 793 are formed at the ends of the short-circuit prevention holes 761. Strong against force. For this reason, the main control board 61 can be made into a board with a low probability of breaking even if vibrations or the like are applied.

The interval between the four via holes 793 formed in the one-row back surface region 869 is 1.5 mm, which is the same as the interval between the four via holes 793 formed in the one-row back surface region 842 in the nineteenth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to make the main control board 61 resistant to vibration without adjusting the intervals between the pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782 before the soldering process.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the nineteenth embodiment in that a joint hole 762 and a separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 are formed instead of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the nineteenth embodiment are basically omitted.

The main control board 61 of this embodiment includes a printed wiring board 872 . In the printed wiring board 872, around the pins 784a and 784d (FIG. 89(a)) at both ends of the single row connector 782 and around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) of the 2-pole connector 781 , and around pins 784g, 784j, 784k, 784p at both ends in each row of two-row connector 783, and separate short-circuit prevention holes for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges 751 (FIG. 95(c)). 871, 874 are formed. The configuration around the one-row connector 782 of the printed wiring board 872 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b). 99(a) is a rear view of a printed wiring board 872 showing an enlarged rear surface area 873 for one row, and FIG. 99(b) is an enlarged printed wiring board showing the periphery of pins 784 of a one row connector 782. FIG. 872 is a longitudinal sectional view of FIG. Here, in FIGS. 99(a) and (b), illustration of the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) is omitted.

First, the shape of the joint hole 762 formed in the printed wiring board 872 of the main control board 61 will be described. As shown in FIG. 99(a), the printed wiring board 872 is formed with four via holes 793 for inserting four pins 784a to 784d of the one-row connector 782. As shown in FIG. The via holes 793 are arranged in the horizontal direction at intervals of 1.5 mm.

Bonding holes 762 are formed around the four via holes 793 in the printed wiring board 872 . The joint hole 762 is a circular hole slightly larger than the via hole 793 , and is formed in such a manner that the via hole 793 is positioned at the center of the joint hole 762 .

Among the four pins 784a to 784d forming the one-row connector 782, the n-th pin 784 from the right is called the n-th pin 784. As shown in FIG. For example, the second pin 784 from the right is the second pin 784b. Also, among the four via holes 793 formed in the printed wiring board 872, the via hole 793 formed nth from the right is referred to as the nth via hole 793. FIG. For example, the third via hole 793 from the right is the third via hole 793c. Also, the bonding hole 762 formed around the n-th via hole 793 is referred to as the n-th bonding hole 762 . For example, the bonding hole 762 formed around the fourth via hole 793d is the fourth bonding hole 762d. Here, n is a natural number from 1 to 4.

Four via holes 793a to 793d are arranged in a row in the left-right direction in the one-row back surface area 873 of the printed wiring board 872, and a first via hole 793a is formed at the right end of the row of the via holes 793a to 793d. In addition, a fourth via hole 793d is formed at the left end. A separate short-circuit preventing hole 871, which is a short-circuit preventing hole separated from the fourth joining hole 762d, is formed near the left side of the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the row of via holes 793a to 793d. The separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 has a semi-circular reservoir 871a having a diameter larger than that of the joint hole 762, and a constriction that is continuous with the reservoir 871a and gradually narrows toward the fourth joint hole 762d. and a width portion 871b. The narrowed width portion 871b has a width substantially equal to the diameter of the reservoir portion 871a in the vertical direction of the one-row back surface region 873 in a region that is continuous with the reservoir portion 871a. Also, the distance LD1 from the right end of the reduced width portion 871b to the left end of the fourth joint hole 762d is shorter than the distance LD2 from the right end of the fourth joint hole 762d to the left end of the third joint hole 762c.

A separate short-circuit prevention hole 874, which is a short-circuit prevention hole separated from the first joining hole 762a, is formed near the right side of the first via hole 793a positioned at the right end of the row of via holes 793a to 793d. The separate short-circuit prevention hole 874 has a semi-circular reservoir 874a having a larger diameter than the joining hole 762 and a contiguous recess 874a that gradually narrows toward the first joining hole 762a. and a width portion 874b. The reduced-width portion 874b has a width that is substantially the same as the diameter of the reservoir 874a in the vertical direction of the one-row back surface region 873 in a region that is continuous with the reservoir 874a. Also, the distance LD1 from the left end of the reduced width portion 871b to the right end of the first joint hole 762a is shorter than the distance LD2 from the left end of the first joint hole 762a to the right end of the second joint hole 762b.

Next, in the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 872 is transported rightward and the fourth pin 784d of the first row connector 782 is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, A mechanism for suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 around the fourth pin 784d will be described below with reference to FIG. 99(b). In the soldering process, just before the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 comes out of contact with the jet flow 821 (FIG. 93(b)), the fourth joint hole 762d formed around the fourth pin 784d and its rear portion are closed. A separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 formed nearby is in contact with the jet 821 .

Immediately after the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is out of contact with the jet 821, the melted solder adhering to the fourth joint hole 762d and the melted solder adhering to the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 are continuous, the melted solder adhering to the fourth joint hole 762d and the melted solder adhering to the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 become independent of each other.

In an intermediate state before the melted solder adhering to the fourth joint hole 762d becomes an independent state, the melted solder remaining around the fourth pin 784d is separated from the upper part of the fourth joint hole 762d and the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871. divided into above and above. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 is not formed around the fourth joining hole 762d, as shown in FIG. It is possible to reduce the amount of melted solder adhering to the 4th joint hole 762d and reduce the possibility of excessive melted solder that causes the solder bridge 751 to be generated on the 4th joint hole 762d.

As already explained with reference to FIG. 99(a), the separate short-circuit preventing hole 871 is formed so as not to be continuous with the fourth joining hole 762d. It is configured such that it is difficult to move over the 4-joint hole 762d. This configuration reduces the possibility that the molten solder cannot be completely contained on the fourth bonding hole 762d and the solder bridge 751 is formed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 99(a), the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 has a larger area than the fourth joining hole 762d. Therefore, in the intermediate state, the amount of melted solder that moves onto the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 can be increased, and the amount of melted solder that moves onto the fourth joint hole 762d can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that surplus molten solder, which causes solder bridges 751, is generated above the fourth joint hole 762d.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the reservoir portion 871a has an area larger than that of the reduced-width portion 871b and has a large width in the vertical direction of the one-row back surface region 873. Therefore, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), most of the melted solder accumulated on the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 moves onto the reservoir 871a due to the surface tension of the melted solder.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), in order to keep most of the melted solder pooled above the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 away from the melted solder pooled above the fourth joint hole 762d, the pool portion 871a is provided at a position farther from the fourth joint hole 762d than the reduced width portion 871b. This reduces the possibility that the melted solder above the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 contacts the melted solder above the fourth joint hole 762d and moves toward the fourth joint hole 762d.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when surplus molten solder is generated on the fourth joint hole 762d, in order to move the surplus melted solder in a direction different from that of the third joint hole 762c, a contraction is performed. A distance LD1 from the width portion 871b to the fourth joint hole 762d is set shorter than a distance LD2 from the fourth joint hole 762d to the third joint hole 762c.

In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 872 is transported leftward, the first via hole 793a positioned at the right end of the back surface area 873 for one row is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. As shown in FIG. 99(a), a separate short-circuit prevention hole 874 is formed in the vicinity of the right side of the first joint hole 762a in order to suppress the formation of solder bridges 751 around the first via hole 793a. ing.

A separate short-circuit prevention hole 874 formed near the right side of the first joint hole 762a has the same size and shape as the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 formed near the left side of the fourth joint hole 762d. doing. The separable short-circuit preventing hole 874 is formed so that the reservoir portion 874a is wider than the reduced width portion 874b in order to hold most of the molten solder adhering to the separable short-circuit preventing hole 874 at a position away from the first joint hole 762a. is also provided in a manner located far from the first joint hole 762a.

Here, in the substrate provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the standard for providing the separate short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 around the pin 784 (FIG. 91) is the pachinko machine of the nineteenth embodiment described above. 10, the same criteria for providing short-circuit prevention holes 761 (FIG. 92(b)) around pins 784 apply. Specifically, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a single-row connector is attached to the board, the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is satisfied. Separable short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)) are provided around the pins at both ends of the one-row connector. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, mating holes 762 (FIG. 90) are provided around the pins 784 of single row connectors where the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is greater than 1.5 mm.

A two-pole connector that satisfies the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 2.5 mm or less when a two-pole connector is attached to the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)) are provided around the two pins 784 of . This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, there are mating holes 762 (FIG. 90) around the pins 784 of the 2-pole connector where the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is greater than 2.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a case where two rows of connectors are attached to the board, and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is 1.5 mm or less, or If at least one of the conditions that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is 2.5 mm or less is satisfied, the pins 784 located at both ends of each row of the two-row connector are provided with separate short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)). This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, if the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is greater than 1.5 mm and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is greater than 2.5 mm, then the Bonding holes 762 (Fig. 90) are provided.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

A separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 is provided on the left side of the fourth joint hole 762d at the left end of the one-row back surface region 873 so as not to be continuous with the fourth joint hole 762d. As a result, the amount of melted solder adhering to the fourth joint hole 762d can be reduced, and the possibility of excess melted solder causing the solder bridge 751 being generated above the fourth joint hole 762d can be reduced. can. Since the fourth joint hole 762d and the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 are not continuous, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the melted solder that has once moved onto the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 returns onto the fourth joint hole 762d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that surplus molten solder is generated on the fourth bonding hole 762d and a solder bridge 751 is formed.

Since the area of the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 is set larger than the area of the fourth joint hole 762d, the melted solder that moves onto the separable short-circuit prevention hole 871 in the intermediate state where the solder fillet 798 is formed is prevented. The amount can be increased to reduce the amount of melted solder that moves over the fourth bonding hole 762d. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that surplus molten solder, which causes solder bridges 751, is generated above the fourth joint hole 762d.

In the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871, the reservoir portion 871a has a larger area than the narrowed width portion 871b, and holds more melted solder than the narrowed width portion 871b. The reservoir portion 871a is provided further to the left from the fourth joint hole 762d than the reduced width portion 871b. Therefore, most of the melted solder accumulated on the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 is kept away from the melted solder accumulated on the fourth joint hole 762d. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the amount of melted solder existing above the fourth joint hole 762d is less likely to increase, it is possible to prevent the melted solder from being completely contained above the fourth joint hole 762d. The occurrence can be suppressed.

In this configuration, the distance LD1 from the narrowed width portion 871b to the fourth joint hole 762d is set shorter than the distance LD2 from the fourth joint hole 762d to the third joint hole 762c. For this reason, the surplus melted solder generated above the fourth joint hole 762d is merged with the melted solder above the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871, and the surplus melted solder merges with the melted solder above the third joint hole 762c. merging can be prevented. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 is formed between the pin 784d inserted through the fourth joint hole 762d and the pin 784c inserted through the third joint hole 762c.

At the right end of the back surface area 873 for one row, a separate short circuit prevention hole 874 is provided on the right side of the first joint hole 762a so as not to be continuous with the first joint hole 762a. As a result, even if the printed wiring board 872 is transported leftward in the soldering process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges 751 around the first via holes 793a positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. can be done.

<Another form of the twentieth embodiment>
- In the above-described twentieth embodiment, the number of separate short-circuit prevention holes 871 formed in the vicinity of the fourth joint hole 762d is not limited to one. Also, the number of separate short-circuit prevention holes 874 formed in the vicinity of the first joining hole 762a is not limited to one. For example, in the vicinity of the fourth joint hole 762d, a left separation type short circuit prevention hole 886 having the same size and shape as the separation type short circuit prevention hole 871 of the twentieth embodiment, an upper left separation type short circuit prevention hole 875, and a left lower separation are provided. A right separated short-circuit prevention hole 876 is provided, and a right separated short-circuit prevention hole having the same size and shape as the separated short-circuit prevention hole 874 of the twentieth embodiment is provided in the vicinity of the first joining hole 762a. 887 , an upper right separable short-circuit preventing hole 877 and a lower right separable short-circuit preventing hole 878 may be provided. The configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 100(a).

FIG. 100(a) is a rear view of a printed wiring board 879 showing an enlarged rear surface region 885 for one row in which six separate short-circuit prevention holes 875 to 878, 886 and 887 are formed. Here, in FIG. 100(a), illustration of the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) is omitted. As shown in FIG. 100(a), the separated type short-circuit prevention hole 871 already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed as the left side separated type short-circuit prevention hole 886 in the vicinity of the left side of the fourth joint hole 762d. there is An upper left separable short-circuit prevention hole 875 is formed diagonally to the upper left of the fourth joint hole 762d, and a lower left separable short-circuit prevention hole 876 is formed diagonally to the lower left of the fourth joint hole 762d. .

The upper left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 875 is composed of an upper left reservoir portion 875a and an upper left reduced width portion 875b. It is provided close to the joining hole 762d. In the upper left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 875, the upper left reservoir 875a is provided at a position further to the left from the fourth joint hole 762d than the upper left reduced width portion 875b. The left lower separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876 is composed of a left lower reservoir portion 876a and a left lower narrowed width portion 876b. It is provided close to the fourth joint hole 762d. In the lower left separation type short-circuit prevention hole 876, the lower left reservoir 876a is provided at a position farther to the upper left from the fourth joint hole 762d than the lower left reduced width portion 876b.

In the vicinity of the right side of the first joining hole 762a, the separated short-circuit prevention hole 874 already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed as the right separated short-circuit prevention hole 887. As shown in FIG. An upper right separable short-circuit prevention hole 877 is formed obliquely above the right of the first joint hole 762a, and a lower right separable short-circuit prevention hole 878 is formed obliquely below the right of the first joint hole 762a. there is

The upper right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 877 is composed of an upper right reservoir portion 877a and a right reduced width portion 877b. It is provided close to the joining hole 762a. In the upper right separation type short-circuit prevention hole 877, the upper right reservoir portion 877a is set at a position farther to the upper right from the first joining hole 762a than the right reduced width portion 877b. In addition, the right lower separation type short-circuit prevention hole 878 is composed of a lower right reservoir portion 878a and a lower right reduced width portion 878b, and the width of the lower right reduced width portion 878b gradually increases toward the first joining hole 762a. It is set close to the first bonding hole 762a in a decreasing manner. In the lower right separable short-circuit prevention hole 878, the lower right reservoir portion 878a is set at a position further to the lower right from the first joint hole 762a than the lower right reduced width portion 878b.

By forming the left separable short-circuit preventing hole 886, the upper left separable short-circuit preventing hole 875, and the left lower separable short-circuit preventing hole 876 around the fourth joining hole 762d, When excessive melted solder adheres, the surplus melted solder is pulled in three directions different from the third joint hole 762c adjacent to the fourth joint hole 762d, and is drawn into the three pools 875a, 876a, and 886a. can accumulate. Therefore, even if excessive melted solder adheres to the fourth joint hole 762d, it is possible to prevent the melted solder from joining the melted solder on the adjacent third joint hole 762c to form a solder bridge 751. can be done.

When the printed wiring board 879 is conveyed leftward in the soldering process, the first joint hole 762a is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction in the back surface area 885 for one row. When excessive melted solder adheres to the first joint hole 762a, the surplus melted solder is pulled in three different directions from the second joint hole 762b adjacent to the first joint hole 762a. It can be stored in the reservoirs 877a, 878a, and 887a. Therefore, even if excessive melted solder adheres to the first joint hole 762a, it is possible to prevent the melted solder from joining the melted solder on the adjacent second joint hole 762b to form a solder bridge 751. can be done.

- Instead of the separate short-circuit preventing hole 871 of the twentieth embodiment, a three-way separate short-circuit preventing hole 881 surrounding the fourth joint hole 762d from three directions may be provided. The three-way separation type short-circuit prevention hole 881 will be described with reference to FIG. 100(b).

The printed wiring board 882 differs from the printed wiring board 872 of the twentieth embodiment in that it has a one-row rear surface region 883 in which two three-way separated short-circuit prevention holes 881 and 884 are formed. FIG. 100(b) is a backside view of a printed wiring board 882 showing an enlarged one-row backside region 883 in which two three-way separation type short-circuit prevention holes 881 and 884 are formed. Here, in FIG. 100(b), illustration of the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) is omitted.

First, in the printed wiring board 882, the configuration around the fourth joint hole 762d located at the left end of the one-row back surface region 883 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100(b), the periphery of the fourth joint hole 762d has a U-shaped shape surrounding the upper, left, and lower sides of the fourth joint hole 762d. A three-way separable short circuit prevention hole 881 is formed. The left three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 881 has an upper portion 881a located above the fourth joint hole 762d, a left portion 881b located to the left of the fourth joint hole 762d, and a lower portion of the fourth joint hole 762d. and a lower portion 881c located at the . Between the fourth joint hole 762d and the upper part 881a of the left three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 881, between the fourth joint hole 762d and the left part 881b, and between the fourth joint hole 762d and the lower part 881c. is shorter than the distance from the right end of the fourth joint hole 762d to the left end of the third joint hole 762c. Also, the total area of the left three-way separable short-circuit prevention holes 881 is larger than the area of the joining holes 762 .

In the left three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 881, the upper part 881a, the left part 881b, and the lower part 881c form a projection 881d extending toward the fourth joint hole 762d in a manner that is not continuous with the fourth joint hole 762d. I have.

If excessive melted solder adheres to the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 and cannot be accommodated on the fourth joint hole 762d, the surplus melted solder is directed in a direction different from that of the third joint hole 762c. Excess molten solder can be drawn into the left three-way separable shorting hole 881 by contacting the molten solder above the left three-way separable shorting hole 881, which has a larger area than the joint hole 762. can.

The convex portions 881d of the upper portion 881a, the left portion 881b, and the lower portion 881c are closer to the fourth joint hole 762d from three directions, and the convex portions 881d are closer to the fourth joint hole than the third joint hole 762c. Located near 762d. This can increase the probability that the molten solder generated above the fourth joint hole 762d will move in three directions different from the third joint hole 762c.

By adopting a configuration in which surplus melted solder generated above the fourth joint hole 762d is not directed toward the adjacent third joint hole 762c, the surplus melted solder moves onto the third joint hole 762c to form a solder bridge 751. can be reduced.

In addition, since the configuration is such that the molten solder drawn in three different directions in contact with the three projections 881d is held in the common left three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 881, the occurrence of solder bridges 751 in the printed wiring board 882 is prevented. The area occupied by the structure for suppressing can be minimized, and high density printed wiring board 882 can be accommodated.

Next, in the printed wiring board 882, the configuration around the first joint hole 762a located at the right end of the one-row back surface region 883 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100(b), the periphery of the first joint hole 762a has a U-shaped shape surrounding the upper, right, and lower sides of the first joint hole 762a. A three-way separable short circuit prevention hole 884 is formed. The right three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 884 has an upper portion 884a located above the first joining hole 762a, a right portion 884b located to the right of the first joining hole 762a, and a lower portion below the first joining hole 762a. and a lower portion 884c located at the . Between the first joint hole 762a and the upper part 884a of the right three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 884, between the first joint hole 762a and the right part 884b, and between the first joint hole 762a and the lower part 884c. is shorter than the distance from the right end of the first joint hole 762a to the right end of the third joint hole 762c. Also, the total area of the right three-way separable short-circuit prevention holes 884 is greater than the area of the joining holes 762 .

In the right three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 884, an upper portion 884a, a right portion 884b, and a lower portion 884c form a convex portion 884d that extends toward the first joint hole 762a in a manner that is not continuous with the first joint hole 762a. I have.

When the printed wiring board 882 is conveyed leftward in the soldering process, the first joint hole 762a is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction in the back surface area 883 for one row. By providing the right three-way separable short-circuit preventing hole 884 around the first joining hole 762a in the same manner as the left three-way separable short-circuit preventing hole 881 is provided around the fourth joining hole 762d, the first joint Even if excessive melted solder adheres to the hole 762a, it is possible to prevent the melted solder from joining the melted solder on the adjacent second bonding hole 762b to form a solder bridge 751.

Since the configuration holds the molten solder drawn in three different directions in contact with the three projections 884 d in the common right three-way separable short-circuit prevention hole 884 , the solder bridge 751 is formed at the right end of the one-row back surface region 883 . The area of printed wiring board 882 occupied by the configuration for suppressing the generation can be minimized, and high density printed wiring board 882 can be accommodated.

<Twenty-first Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the nineteenth embodiment in that short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 and 921 to 925 are formed in place of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . Hereinafter, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the nineteenth embodiment are basically omitted.

The main control board 61 of this embodiment includes a printed wiring board 897 . In the printed wiring board 897, around the pins 784a and 784d (FIG. 89(a)) at both ends of the single row connector 782 and around the two pins 784e and 784f (FIG. 89(b)) of the 2-pole connector 781 , and pins 784g, 784j, 784k, 784p at both ends in each row of the two-row connector 783, and around the pins 784g, 784j, 784k, 784p at both ends of the connector 783, respectively. ˜895, 921-925 are formed. The configuration around the one-row connector 782 of the printed wiring board 897 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a rear view of a printed wiring board 897 showing an enlarged rear surface area 896 for one row in which short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 and 921 to 925 are formed to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges 751. FIG. Here, in FIG. 101, the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 (FIG. 92(b)) are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 101, via holes 793a to 793d for inserting four pins 784a to 784d (FIG. 89(a)) of the one row connector 782 are formed in the one row rear surface region 896. As shown in FIG. In the one-row back surface area 896, the four via holes 793a to 793d are arranged in one row in the horizontal direction, and the spacing between the via holes 793a to 793d in the row is 1.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 101, among the four via holes 793a to 793d, the via hole located nth from the right is called the nth via hole. For example, the rightmost via hole is the first via hole 793a. Here, n is a natural number from 1 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 101, circular bonding holes 762 are formed around the second via hole 793b and the third via hole 793c. The joint hole 762 has a larger area than the via holes 793b and 793c, and is formed in such a manner that the via holes 793b and 793c are positioned at the center of the joint hole 762. As shown in FIG.

Short-circuit prevention hole groups 891-895 are formed on the left side of the fourth via hole 793d located at the left end of the row of via holes 793a-793d. Short circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 are formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a positioned at the right end of the row of via holes 793a to 793d. First, the group of short circuit prevention holes 891 to 895 formed on the left side of the fourth via hole 793d will be described.

As shown in FIG. 101, a small short-circuit prevention hole 891 having the same size and shape as the joining hole 762 is formed around the fourth via hole 793d. The small short-circuit prevention hole 891 is formed in such a manner that the fourth via hole 793 d is positioned at the center of the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 . A large short-circuit prevention hole 892 having an area larger than that of the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 is formed to the left of the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 . A first passage area 894 having a passage width smaller than the diameter of the hole 891 is connected.

Medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 having an area larger than that of the small short-circuit prevention holes 891 and smaller than those of the large short-circuit prevention holes 892 are formed obliquely above and to the right of the large short-circuit prevention holes 892 . The large short-circuit preventing hole 892 and the medium short-circuit preventing hole 893 are connected by a second passage area 895 having a passage width wider than that of the first passage area 894 .

In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 897 is conveyed rightward, the fourth pin 784d (FIG. 89(a)) positioned at the left end of the one-row connector 782 is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction. It will be done. In this case, when the fourth pin 784d located at the rear end in the conveying direction of the one-row connector 782 comes out of contact with the jet flow 821 (FIG. 93(a)), the small short-circuit preventing hole 891 and the medium short-circuit preventing hole 893 , and large short-circuit prevention holes 892 are adhered with molten solder. Since a large amount of molten solder remains on the large-area holes, the amount of molten solder remaining on the small short-circuit preventing holes 891 and medium-sized short-circuit preventing holes 893 is the same as the amount of molten solder remaining on the large short-circuit preventing holes 892 . less than quantity.

The melted solder mass remaining above the small short-circuit preventing hole 891 is connected to the melted solder mass remaining above the large short-circuit preventing hole 892 at a first passage region 894 . The melted solder mass remaining above the medium-sized short-circuit preventing hole 893 is connected to the melted solder mass remaining above the large short-circuit preventing hole 892 at the second passage region 895 .

Molten solder has surface tension, and when a small lump of molten solder contacts a large lump of molten solder, the molten solder moves from the small lump of molten solder to the large lump of molten solder. Therefore, after the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 (FIG. 89(a)) comes out of contact with the jet 821, the melted solder adhering around the fourth pin 784d is cooled and solidified. In the meantime, molten solder moves from small shorting holes 891 and medium shorting holes 893 toward large shorting holes 892 .

In a configuration in which a small-area hole is formed around a pin located at the trailing end in the conveying direction, and a large-area hole is formed downstream of the small-area hole, dynamic factors cause the small-area After the molten solder moves from the large-area hole to the large-area hole, surplus molten solder generated in the large-area hole flows back toward the small-area hole, and the solder around the pin located at the rear end in the conveying direction A bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) may be formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101, after the melted solder moves from the small short-circuit preventing hole 891 to the large short-circuit preventing hole 892, when surplus molten solder is generated in the large short-circuit preventing hole 892, the second passage region The width of the passage 895 is wider than that of the first passage area 894, and the area of the two medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 is larger than the area of the small short-circuit prevention holes 891, so that the surplus melted solder flows back mainly to the medium-sized holes. It becomes a short-circuit prevention hole 893 . As a result, the amount of melted solder flowing back from the large short-circuit preventing hole 892 toward the small short-circuit preventing hole 891 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the melted solder flows backward from the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 and the solder bridge 751 is formed around the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 .

Next, the group of short circuit prevention holes 921 to 925 formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, a small short-circuit prevention hole 921 having the same size and shape as the bonding hole 762 is formed around the first via hole 793a. The small short-circuit prevention hole 921 is formed in such a manner that the first via hole 793 a is positioned at the center of the small short-circuit prevention hole 921 . A large short-circuit prevention hole 922 having an area larger than that of the small short-circuit prevention hole 921 is formed on the right side of the small short-circuit prevention hole 921 . A first passage area 924 having a passage width smaller than the diameter of the hole 921 is connected.

Medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 923 having an area larger than that of the small short-circuit prevention holes 921 and smaller than those of the large short-circuit prevention holes 922 are formed obliquely above and to the right of the large short-circuit prevention holes 922 . The large short-circuit preventing hole 922 and the medium short-circuit preventing hole 923 are connected by a second passage area 925 having a passage width wider than that of the first passage area 924 .

In the soldering process, when the printed wiring board 897 is conveyed leftward, the first pin 784a (FIG. 89(a)) positioned at the right end of the one-row connector 782 is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction. It will be done.

Short-circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 are formed on the right side of the first via hole 793a. It is possible to reduce the amount of melted solder flowing back from the large short-circuit prevention hole 922 . Further, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the melted solder flows back from the large short-circuit prevention hole 922 and the solder bridge 751 is formed around the first pins 784a of the one-row connector 782 .

Here, in the board provided with the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the standards for providing the short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 and 921 to 925 around the pin 784 (FIG. 91) are the above-described nineteenth embodiment. 92(b)) is applied around the pin 784. Specifically, in the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a single-row connector is attached to the board, the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 1.5 mm or less is satisfied. Short-circuit preventing hole groups 891 to 895 and 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) are provided around the pins at both ends of the one row connector. Therefore, the amount of melted solder flowing back from the large short-circuit preventing holes 892, 922 toward the small short-circuit preventing holes 891, 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the conveying direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, mating holes 762 (FIG. 90) are provided around the pins 784 of single row connectors where the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is greater than 1.5 mm.

A two-pole connector that satisfies the condition that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is 2.5 mm or less when a two-pole connector is attached to the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 and 921 to 925 (FIG. 101) are provided around the two pins 784 of . Therefore, the amount of melted solder flowing back from the large short-circuit preventing holes 892, 922 toward the small short-circuit preventing holes 891, 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the conveying direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, there are mating holes 762 (FIG. 90) around the pins 784 of the 2-pole connector where the distance between the centers of the pins 784 is greater than 2.5 mm.

In the board provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a case where two rows of connectors are attached to the board, and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is 1.5 mm or less, or If at least one of the conditions that the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is 2.5 mm or less is satisfied, the pins 784 located at both ends of each row of the two-row connector is provided with short circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 and 921 to 925 (FIG. 101). Therefore, the amount of melted solder flowing back from the large short-circuit preventing holes 892, 922 toward the small short-circuit preventing holes 891, 921 around the pin 784 located at the rear end in the conveying direction is reduced. This reduces the possibility that a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) is formed around the pin 784 positioned at the rear end in the transport direction. On the other hand, if the distance between the centers of the pins 784 in each row is greater than 1.5 mm and the distance between the centers of the pins 784 located at the ends of each row is greater than 2.5 mm, then the Bonding holes 762 (Fig. 90) are provided.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A small short-circuit preventing hole 891 and a large short-circuit preventing hole 892 formed around the fourth via hole 793d are connected by a first passage area 894 having a narrow passage width, and the large short-circuit preventing hole 892 and the medium short-circuit preventing hole 893 are connected to each other. are connected by a second passage region 895 having a wide passage width. Therefore, the melted solder remaining in the small short-circuit preventing holes 891 easily moves to the large short-circuit preventing holes 892 . In addition, since surplus molten solder that can be generated in the large short-circuit preventing holes 892 preferentially moves to the medium-sized short-circuit preventing holes 893, backflow of molten solder from the large short-circuit preventing holes 892 to the small short-circuit preventing holes 891 is suppressed. It is Therefore, in the soldering process, when the fourth pin 784d of the one-row connector 782 is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction, the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed around the fourth pin 784d is eliminated. can be reduced.

Further, short-circuit prevention hole groups 921 to 925 are set on the right side of the first via hole 793a. Therefore, in the soldering process, when the first pin 784a of the one-row connector 782 is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction, the melted solder does not flow back from the large short-circuit preventing hole 922 to the small short-circuit preventing hole 921. By suppressing the occurrence, the possibility of solder bridge 751 being formed around first pin 784a can be reduced.

<Another Form of the 21st Embodiment>
The group of short-circuit preventing holes 891 to 895 of the above-described twenty-first embodiment includes a small short-circuit preventing hole 891, a large short-circuit preventing hole 892, a medium short-circuit preventing hole 893, and a second passage area 895 except for the first passage area 894. may be configured. Specifically, the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 is set as a hole that is not continuous with the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 , but is not continuous with the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 . In this case, during the soldering process until the melted solder solidifies, surplus melted solder adhering to the large short-circuit prevention holes 892 is more likely to pass through the second path than the small short-circuit prevention holes 891 that are not physically in contact with each other. It tends to migrate toward medium short-circuit prevention hole 893 which is in physical contact through region 895 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive melted solder initially adhering to the large short-circuit prevention hole 892 from flowing back into the small short-circuit prevention hole 891 and forming a solder bridge 751 around the fourth pin 784d.

The number of medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 constituting the short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 of the twenty-first embodiment described above is not limited to two. For example, the number of medium-sized short-circuit prevention holes 893 constituting the short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 may be one. The printed wiring board while leaving one medium-sized short-circuit preventing hole 893 that prevents the excess molten solder on the large short-circuit preventing hole 892 from moving to the small short-circuit preventing hole 891 before the molten solder solidifies in the soldering process. By reducing the area occupied by the short-circuit prevention hole groups 891 to 895 on 741, it is possible to cope with high density of the main control board 61. FIG.

<Twenty-Second Embodiment>
The game board 931 of the present embodiment is provided with a first special figure display portion 932a corresponding to the first operation opening 938, and a second special figure display portion 932b corresponding to the second operation opening 939. is provided. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as those of the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 931 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board 931 in this embodiment. On the surface of the game board 931, as in the first embodiment, a guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26, and a game ball is shot when the player rotates the operation handle. A game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) shot from the mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The guide rail is formed so that its exit portion faces the upper center of the game area PA on one side of the game area PA. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the operation handle by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball B1 in the upper part of the game area PA shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail is formed to the exit portion. It shifts to the side of the side opposite to the formed side. The exit portion of the guide rail is provided on the left side of the game area PA.

The game area PA is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a variable display unit 36, and the like, as in the first embodiment. Here, the game board 931 of the present embodiment is provided with the second operation opening 939 at a location different from the first operation opening 938 and the pair of through gates 935 and 936. It differs from the first embodiment. These positional relationships will be described below with reference to the position of the variable display unit 36 .

The variable display unit 36 is arranged on the center side of the game area PA so that the downflow area of the game ball B1 is ensured on the top, bottom, left, and right. That is, in the game area PA, there are a downflow area 941 above the variable display unit 36, a downflow area 942 under the variable display unit 36, a downflow area 943 on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and a downflow area 943 on the left side of the variable display unit 36 as the downflow area of the game ball B1. A flow area 944 to the right of the variable display unit 36 is provided. The center frame 252, which constitutes a part of the variable display unit 36, is provided at the lower part of the center frame 252 because the roof unit 253, which constitutes the portion extending from the upper part to the left and right sides, extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. The game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA does not traverse or traverse the variable display unit 36, except for the game ball B1 introduced to the stage where it is drawn.

A first working port 938, one of a pair of working ports 938, 939, is provided in the lower flow region 942 as a first working port device. The first working port 938 corresponds to the first working port 33 (FIG. 3) in the first embodiment. Here, each of the above flowing areas 941 to 944 is provided with a dispersing member for dispersing the flowing direction of the game ball B1 by colliding with the game ball B1. A guide member is provided for guiding in a predetermined direction upon collision with the ball B1. The dispersing member includes the nail 24b, and the guiding member includes the roof unit 253 and the decorative member 945 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PA. The dispersing member and the guiding member allow the game ball B1 shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 to flow down toward the first operating port 938 regardless of the position in the upper part of the game area PA. provided as possible.

That is, the game ball B1 that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and begins to flow down on the exit side of the guide rail in the upper part of the game area PA, i.e., on the left side of the game area PA, is transferred from the upper flow area 941 to the left flow area 943. → It will flow down the game area PA on the left path (first path) called the lower flow area 942 . In this case, the dispersing member and the guiding member are provided so that the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA on the left path can reach the first operation port 938 depending on the flow-down manner. It is In addition, the game ball B1, which is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and starts to flow down on the opposite side of the exit portion of the guide rail in the upper part of the game area PA, that is, on the right side of the game area PA, is transferred from the upper flow area 941 to the right flow area. It will flow down the game area PA in the right path (second path) of the area 944 → the lower flowing area 942 . In this case, the dispersing member and the guiding member are provided so that the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA on the right path can reach the first operation port 938 depending on the flow manner. It is

A second working port 939, the other of the pair of working ports 938, 939, is provided in the right flow area 944 as a second working port device. The second working port 939 corresponds to the second working port 34 (FIG. 3) in the first embodiment. That is, for the second operation port 939, an electric accessory 939a is provided as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 939a operates between the closed state and the open state in the same manner as the general electric accessory 34a in the first embodiment. The trigger for this operation and the details of the operation are the same as those of the universal electrical accessory 34a in the first embodiment, so the description is omitted. In this case, a nail 24b is provided above the second operating port 939, and when the electric accessory 939a is in a closed state, the nail 24b allows the winning of the second operating port 939 (the entry of the game ball B1). ball) is not allowed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that it is difficult to win a prize instead of disabling the prize.

Here, as already explained, since the second operation port 939 is provided in the right flow down region 944, the game ball is fired from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and is on the opposite side to the exit portion of the guide rail in the upper part of the game area PA, that is, the game ball. A game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) that has started to flow down on the right side of the area PA can flow down toward the second operation port 939, but is shot from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and ends up in the game area PA. The game ball B1 that started to flow down on the exit part side of the guide rail in the upper part, that is, on the left side of the game area PA, cannot flow down toward the second operation port 939 .

As described above, the winning to the first operation port 938 can occur when the game ball B1 flows to the first path side or when the game ball B1 flows to the second path side. On the other hand, winning to the second operation port 939 can occur only when the game ball B1 flows to the second path side. As a result, the player can play the game aiming at winning the first operation opening 938 while preventing the second operation opening 939 from winning by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle. , and a game can be played with the aim of winning a prize to the second operation port 939 .

As for the pair of through gates 935 and 936 , one first through gate 935 is provided in the left flowing region 943 and the other second through gate 936 is provided in the right flowing region 944 . In this case, the second through gate 936 provided in the flow-down region 944 on the right side is provided upstream of the second working port 939, but is not limited to this. may also be provided downstream.

An internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gates 935 and 936 as a trigger, and the normal pattern display section 38a of the normal pattern unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is the area where the game ball B1 does not pass in the game area PA Then, the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is an electric role open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the normal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric role open state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 939a is in an open state in a predetermined manner.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of game balls B1 winning through gates 935 and 936 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the frequency with which the electric accessory 939a of the second actuation opening 939 is in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low, which has already been described in the first embodiment. A high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode are set. In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation port 938 is higher than the second operation port 939, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation port 939 is more likely than the first operation port 938. Higher chance of winning.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 938 or the second operating port 939 as a trigger. And, the lottery result of the winning lottery is clearly shown through the special figure unit 932 and the display effect in the pattern display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

The special figure unit 932 is provided with a first special figure display portion 932a and a second special figure display portion 932b. The display area of the first special figure display portion 932a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special figure display portion 932b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the area of the display area including the first special figure display portion 932a and the second special figure display portion 932b is also narrower than the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display portion 932a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation port 938 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display portion 932b, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning to the second operation opening 939 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

In the special figure unit 932, the first special figure reservation display portion 932c and the second special figure reservation display portion 932d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display portion 932a and the second special figure display portion 932b. . The number of game balls B1 winning the first operation opening 938 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first special figure reservation display section 932c. In addition, the number of game balls B1 winning the second operation opening 939 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the second special figure reservation display section 932d.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the first special symbol display unit 932a based on the winning to the first operation port 938, the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed accordingly. Along with being performed, when the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the second special figure display unit 932b based on the winning to the second operation port 939, the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed accordingly. .

When a big win or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 938, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. Similarly, even when a big win or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the second operation port 939, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible.

On the back surface of the game board 931, discharge passage portions (not shown) for guiding the entered game ball B1 to a discharged ball recovery portion (not shown) are provided corresponding to the first operating port 938 and the second operating port 939, respectively. ) is formed. As shown in FIG. 102, in the discharge passage portion through which the game ball B1 entering the first operation port 938 passes, there is provided a first operation port detection sensor 951 for detecting the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage portion. is provided, and in the discharge passage portion through which the game ball B1 entering the second operation port 939 passes, a second operation port detection sensor 952 for detecting the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage portion is provided.

FIG. 103( a ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the connection mode between the first working port detection sensor 951 and the second working port detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61 . As shown in FIG. 103(a), the first operating port detection sensor 951 is connected to the main control board 61 via a first harness 951a, and the second operating port detection sensor 952 is connected to the first harness 951a. It is connected to the main control board 61 via a different second harness 952a. The first harness 951a is a fluorescent harness having a yellow fluorescent color, and the second harness 952a is a fluorescent harness having a green fluorescent color. The first harness 951a and the second harness 952a have a fluorescent color that allows visual identification. Here, the yellow fluorescent color used for the first harness 951a and the green fluorescent color used for the second harness 952a are not used for other harnesses used in the pachinko machine 10. Color. Therefore, the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a can be visually distinguished from other harnesses.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), the first harness 951a is a bundle of two signal lines 958, one end of which is connected to the first operating opening detection sensor 951, and the other end of which is connected to a male type A two-pole connector 953 is provided. The second harness 952a is a bundle of two signal lines 958, one end of which is connected to the second operating opening detection sensor 952, and the other end of which is equipped with a male two-pole connector 954. . The signal line 958 is covered with an insulator.

The main control board 61 connects the first working opening detection sensor 951 to the main control board 61, a first working opening connector 955 which is a female two-pole connector, and a second working opening detection sensor 952. A second operating port connector 956 that is a female type two-pole connector for connecting to the main control board 61 is provided. The two-pole connector 953 of the first harness 951a is connected to the first operating port connector 955 of the main control board 61, whereby the first operating port detection sensor 951 is connected to the main control board 61, and the second harness The second working opening detection sensor 952 is connected to the main control board 61 by connecting the two-pole connector 954 of 952 a to the second working opening connector 956 of the main control board 61 .

The first working port connector 955 has a yellow fluorescent color like the first harness 951a, and the second working port connector 956 has a green fluorescent color like the second harness 952a. . Therefore, when connecting the first working port detection sensor 951 and the second working port detection sensor 952 to the main control board 61, the yellow first harness 951a is connected to the yellow first working port connector 955, and the green The second harness 952a is connected to the green connector 956 for the second operating port. This suppresses the occurrence of a mistake in which the connection destinations of the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a are switched. Here, the yellow fluorescent color used for the connector 955 for the first working port and the green green fluorescent color used for the connector 956 for the second working port are the connectors used in the pachinko machine 10. It is a color that is not used in Therefore, the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956 can be visually distinguished from other connectors, and the occurrence of connection errors is suppressed.

Two signal lines 958 extending from the first working opening detection sensor 951 and two signal lines 958 extending from the second working opening detection sensor 952 are bundled together, and one end of the bundle has four pins 784 (FIG. 91). A configuration in which a single row connector is provided is also conceivable. However, when this configuration is adopted, by simply connecting an unauthorized board that transmits an unauthorized signal to the main control board 61 to one place, the output from the first working opening detection sensor 951 and the second working opening detection sensor 952 It becomes possible to illegally manipulate the signal input to the main control board 61 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of connectors that need to be connected in order to use a fraudulent board is increased to two, thereby making it difficult to commit fraud.

In addition, if the signal lines 958 extending from the first working opening detection sensor 951 and the second working opening detection sensor 952 are bundled together, there is a possibility that the illegal board cannot be found because the bundle of the signal lines 958 is blocked. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the signal lines 958 are subdivided and bundled in units of the operation opening detection sensors 951 and 952, thereby making it easier to find an unauthorized board from among the bundles of the signal lines 958. FIG.

The main control board 61 is an electronic circuit mounting board configured by mounting a large number of electronic components on a printed wiring board 957 . The manner in which the first operating port connector 955 and the second operating port connector 956 are attached to the printed wiring board 957 of the main control board 61 will be described with reference to FIG. 103(b).

FIG. 103(b) shows an enlarged view of a first working port region 961 to which a first working port connector 955 is attached and a second working port region 962 to which a second working port connector 956 is attached. FIG. 11 is a back view of a printed wiring board 957; Here, in FIG. 103(b), in order to explain how the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956 are attached to the printed wiring board 957, the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956 are shown. It shows a state where the solder fixing the operating port connector 956 to the printed wiring board 957 is removed. FIG. 103(b) shows a state in which the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(a) is turned upside down. Therefore, horizontal reversal does not occur between the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(a) and the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(b). The left side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(a) is the left side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(b), and the right side of the main control board 61 in FIG. 103(a) is the main control board in FIG. 103(b). It is the right side of the substrate 61 .

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the second working port region 962 is provided on the right side of the first working port region 961. As shown in FIG. The two-pole connector 953 (FIG. 103(a)) of the first harness 951a (FIG. 103(a)) has a first pin 784q on the right side and a second pin 784r on the left side in the first operating port area 961. It has Further, the two-pole connector 954 (FIG. 103(a)) of the second harness 952a (FIG. 103(a)) has the first pin 784s on the right side and the second pin 784s on the left side in the second operating port region 962. It has a pin 784t.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the printed wiring board 957 has a first via hole 793q through which the first pin 784q of the first harness 951a (FIG. 103(a)) is inserted in the first operation port region 961. and a second via hole 793r through which the second pin 784r is inserted. In addition, the printed wiring board 957 has a first via hole 793s in the second operation port area 962, through which the first pin 784s of the second harness 952a (FIG. 103(a)) is inserted. It has a second via hole 793t through which the pin 784t is inserted. Here, the via holes 793q to 793t of the present embodiment are the same through holes as the via holes 793 (FIG. 90(a)) already described in the nineteenth embodiment, and penetrate the printed wiring board 957 in the vertical direction. ing.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), in the second working port region 962, the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the second via hole 793t is provided on the left side of the first via hole 793s. It is The distance from the center of the first via hole 793s to the center of the second via hole 793t is 2.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), around the first via hole 793s, the wiring shown in FIG. ) are formed around the second via hole 793t to ground the second via hole 793t, which has already been described in FIG. 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment. A GND solid 851 is formed. On the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851, the solder resist 792 already explained with reference to FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment is formed. Therefore, molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 in the soldering process.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), in the second working port region 962, around the first via hole 793s and the second via hole 793t, the short circuit already described in FIG. 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment is provided. A prevention hole 761 is provided. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793t is connected to the GND plane 851 by the connecting portion 763 already described in FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment.

On the printed wiring board 957, in addition to the first working port connector 955 and the second working port connector 956, an electronic component having the terminal 775 already described in FIG. It is As shown in FIG. 103(b), on the printed wiring board 957, below the first operating port region 961 and the second operating port region 962, via holes 793 through which terminals 775 of electronic components are inserted are provided. It is The via hole 793 is the through hole already described in FIG. 90(a) of the nineteenth embodiment, and is the same through hole as the via holes 793q to 793t.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the distance from the via hole 793 around the terminal 775 to the pins 784q, 784r of the first working port connector 955 and the pins 784s, 784t of the second working port connector 956 is is longer than the reference value for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 described in the embodiment of . In the printed wiring board 957, around the via holes 793 through which the terminals 775 of the electronic component are inserted, the bonding holes 762 already described in FIG. 92(b) of the nineteenth embodiment are provided.

In the printed wiring board 957, even if the terminal 775 exists at the shortest distance from the first via hole 793q or the second via hole 793r of the first working port area 961, the distance from the terminal 775 to the first via hole 793q or the second via hole 793r is set to be longer than the reference value for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . Further, even if the terminal 775 exists at the shortest distance from the first via hole 793s or the second via hole 793t of the second working port region 962, the distance from the terminal 775 to the first via hole 793s or the second via hole 793t is It is set to be longer than the standard value for providing the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . Therefore, the solder bridge 751 is formed between the pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955, the pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956, and the terminals 775 of other electronic components existing nearby. formation is suppressed.

As already explained, on the game board 931 , the second operating port 939 is provided in the flow-down area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36 . The player can aim to win a prize to the second operating port 939 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operating handle. In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpot results that can be selected when a jackpot is won are more likely to go to the second operation port 939 than when a prize is won to the first operation port 938 and a winning lottery is performed. is set so that the winning lottery is more advantageous for the player. Details of the winning lottery will be described later. In the winning lottery for each game round to be described later, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second operating port 939 is given priority over the holding information acquired based on the winning to the first operating port 938. is set to Therefore, the player aims at the second working opening 939 with greater expectations than when aiming at the first working opening 938 .

As shown in FIG. 102, in the game area PA, the second operating opening detection sensor 952 provided in the right-side flow-down area 944 of the variable display unit 36 detects when the player moves the operation handle aiming at the right-side flow-down area 944. The game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) is detected for the first time when the rotation amount is adjusted. Therefore, while the player is aiming at the flow-down area 943 on the left side of the variable display unit 36 and adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle, the solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)) in the area 962 for the second operation opening is is formed, the short circuit may not be known. In this case, the problem of the main control board 61 becomes apparent only when the player raises his expectations and aims at the flow-down area 944 on the right side of the variable display unit 36 and wins the second operation opening 939 . The game is interrupted while the player has strong expectations, and the player is greatly disappointed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(b) of the embodiment is provided. The area of the short circuit prevention hole 761 is set larger than the area of the joint hole 762 around the terminal 775 described above, and the first pin 784s inserted through the first via hole 793s in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957 and the A solder bridge 751 is formed between the second pin 784t inserted in the second via hole 793t and the possibility of short circuit is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 has an elliptical shape in which the width in the horizontal direction is wider than the width in the vertical direction. By extending the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the left-right direction, the width in the vertical direction is widened, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 approaches the terminal 775 (FIG. 88(a)) of the electronic component other than the connector 956 for the second operation port. The area is enlarged to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784s and the second pin 784t of the second working port connector 956 while suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge 751 .

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793s has the first via-hole 793s as a reference, and the center of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is the second via hole adjacent to the first via hole 793s. 793t, and the short-circuit preventing holes 761 around the second via hole 793t are arranged such that the center of the short-circuit preventing hole 761 is located at the second via hole 793t with respect to the second via hole 793t. is provided so as to exist on the side opposite to the first via hole 793s adjacent to the . Since the two short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided in such a manner as to keep a wide distance from the left end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the first via hole 793s to the right end of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793t, the short-circuit prevention hole 761 The center of gravity of the melted solder accumulated on the via holes 793s and 793t can be positioned in the opposite direction to the adjacent via holes 793s and 793t.

As a result, when the first via hole 793s is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the first via hole 793s is less likely to move toward the adjacent second via hole 793t. When the second via hole 793t is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction, an environment can be created in which the molten solder around the second via hole 793t is less likely to move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793s, resulting in a solder bridge. 751 is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103(b), in the first working port area 961, the first via hole 793q and the second via hole 793r are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the second via hole 793r is located on the left side of the first via hole 793q. is provided in The distance from the center of the first via hole 793q to the center of the second via hole 793r is 2.5 mm.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), a wiring pattern 776 is formed around the first via hole 793q in the same manner as around the first via hole 793s of the second working port region 962 described above. A GND solid 851 is formed around the two via holes 793r, similarly to the second via holes 793r in the second working port region 962 described above. A solder resist 792 is formed on the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 in the same manner as the above-described second working port region 962 . Therefore, molten solder does not adhere to the wiring pattern 776 and the GND plane 851 in the soldering process.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), in the first working port region 961, short-circuit prevention holes 761 are provided around the first via hole 793q and the second via hole 793r similarly to the second working port region 962 described above. is provided. The short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793r is connected to the GND plane 851 by a connecting portion 763, like the second via hole 793t in the second working port region 962 described above.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the area of the short-circuit prevention hole 761 is set larger than the area of the bonding hole 762 around the terminal 775 described above, and the first via hole 793q is formed in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957. As shown in FIG. A solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784q inserted through the second via hole 784r and the second pin 784r inserted through the second via hole 793r, thereby reducing the possibility of short circuit.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the short-circuit prevention hole 761 has an elliptical shape in which the width in the horizontal direction is wider than the width in the vertical direction. By extending the short-circuit prevention hole 761 in the left-right direction, the width in the vertical direction is increased, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 approaches the terminal 775 (FIG. 88(a)) of the electronic component other than the first working port connector 955. The area is enlarged to reduce the possibility that the solder bridge 751 is formed between the first pin 784q and the second pin 784r of the first working port connector 955 while suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the short-circuit preventing holes 761 around the first via hole 793q are arranged so that the center of the short-circuit preventing hole 761 is the second via hole adjacent to the first via hole 793q. 793r, and the short-circuit prevention hole 761 around the second via hole 793r is located on the second via hole 793r. is provided so as to exist on the side opposite to the first via hole 793q adjacent to the . Since the two short-circuit preventing holes 761 are provided in such a manner as to keep a wide distance from the left end of the short-circuit preventing hole 761 around the first via hole 793q to the right end of the short-circuit preventing hole 761 around the second via hole 793r, the short-circuit preventing hole 761 The center of gravity of the melted solder accumulated on the .

As a result, when the first via hole 793q is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the first via hole 793q is less likely to move toward the adjacent second via hole 793r. , when the second via hole 793r is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction, it is possible to create an environment in which the molten solder around the second via hole 793r is difficult to move in the direction of the adjacent first via hole 793q. 751 is suppressed.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery Draws by Main Side CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for executing a winning lottery in the main CPU 63 (FIG. 5) will be described. For the winning lottery, the reservation information acquired based on the occurrence of winning to the first operation opening 938 (FIG. 102) or the second operation opening 939 (FIG. 102) is used.

The main CPU 63 stores a winning random number counter C1, a big winning type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, and a variation type counter CS in the lottery counter area 65b already described in FIG. 6 of the first embodiment. , and a general electric accessory opening counter C4. In addition, the main CPU 63 is provided with a general electricity reservation area 65c, and in the reservation storage area 65a, in addition to the execution area AE, a first special figure reservation area as a reservation area RE corresponding to the first operation port 938 (not shown), and has a second special figure reservation area (not shown) as a reservation area RE corresponding to the second operation port 939. In this embodiment, the execution area AE (FIG. 6) in the pending storage area 65a (FIG. 6) is hereinafter referred to as a special figure execution area AE.

The first special figure reservation area comprises the first area for the first special figure, the second area for the first special figure, the third area for the first special figure, and the fourth area for the first special figure, which are not shown. When winning to the 1 operation port 938 occurs, in accordance with the winning history to the 1st operation port 938, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved on the special figure side It is stored in one of the areas as information.

In this case, in the first area for the first special figure to the fourth area for the first special figure, when the winning to the first operation port 938 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area for the first special figure → 2nd area for 1st special figure → 3rd area for 1st special figure → 4th area for 1st special figure are stored chronologically. Since four areas are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls B1 (FIG. 53(a)) to the first operating port 938 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, It may be singular.

The second special figure reservation area comprises a second special figure first area, a second special figure second area, a second special figure third area, and a second special figure fourth area (not shown). When the winning to the 2 operation port 939 occurs, according to the winning history to the 2nd operation port 939, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved on the special figure side It is stored in one of the areas as information.

In this case, in the first area for the second special figure to the fourth area for the second special figure, when the winning to the second operation opening 939 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area for the second special figure → 2nd area for 2nd special figure → 3rd area for 2nd special figure → 4th area for 2nd special figure are stored chronologically. Since four areas are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 to the second operation opening 939 are reserved and stored.

In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more, It may be singular.

Execution area AE for special figures, when starting the variable display in one of the special figure display units 932a and 932b, hold information of the object to perform the right or wrong judgment and distribution judgment for special figures is stored. area. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display unit 932a, the reservation information stored in the first area for the first special figure of the first special figure reservation area is displayed in the execution area for the special figure. Moved to AE. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display part 932b, the reservation information stored in the second special figure first area of the second special figure reservation area moves to the special figure execution area AE be done.

Next, the success or failure determination performed using the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special figure reservation area or the second special figure reservation area will be described.

The values of the random numbers that are selected for the winning judgment are stored in the main-side ROM 64 (FIG. 5) as a winning/failing table. In the hit/fail table, a big win result, a small win result, and a losing result are set as win/fail results. The jackpot result is a winning/failing result that can trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, and can trigger a transition to at least one of the winning/failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small winning result is a winning result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, but does not trigger a transition to both the winning lottery mode and the support mode. The deviation result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

In this embodiment, as the success/failure table stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5), the first special figure used when determining the success/failure of the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 938 A success/failure table and a success/failure table for the second special figure used when judging the success/failure of the reserved information acquired based on the winning to the second operation port 939 are set. Furthermore, the validity table for the first special figure includes a low validity table and a high validity table. There is a right or wrong table. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has different win/fail tables for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operation opening 938 and the holding information acquired based on the winning to the second operation opening 939. In addition to being referred to, in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes in the lottery.

To explain each hit/fail table specifically, the low-probability hit/fail table for the first special figure has two random number values (for example, "5" and "305") that result in a big hit, and results in a small hit. There are three random numbers (for example, "55", "355", and "555"). The other values are random numbers that result in outliers.

The high probability table for the first special figure is set to have a larger number of random number values that result in a big hit than the low probability table for the first special figure, specifically 20. (e.g. "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit result is the same as in the case of the low certainty table for the first special figure.

The low probability table for the second special figure is the same as the low probability table for the first special figure in the value of the random number resulting in the big hit. On the other hand, the number of random number values that result in a small hit is set more than in the case of the low certainty table for the first special figure, specifically 40 (for example, "3", "8" , "31", "37", "55", "68", "127", "133", "160", "166", "189", "195", "217", "223", " 242", "248", "273", "279", "302", "308", "331", "337", "355", "368", "389", "395", "417" , "423", "467", "473", "492", "498", "517", "523", "555", "561", "572", "578", "596", "598" ”). In addition, the number of random number values that result in small hits may be configured to be the same as in the case of the low certainty table for the first special figure, and is set to be smaller than in the case of the low certainty table for the first special figure. It may be configured as

The high probability table for the second special figure is the same as the high probability table for the first special figure in the value of the random number that results in the big hit. Therefore, the number of random number values that result in the jackpot result is a larger number than in the case of the low certainty table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number resulting from the small hit is the same as in the case of the low probability table for the second special figure.

It should be noted that, if the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low-probability mode, the jackpot result is determined. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may be partially included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high-probability mode, or may not be included. .

Next, distribution determination performed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first special figure reservation area or the second special figure reservation area will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the above-described A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode, which have already been described in the first embodiment, are set.

The number of openings and closings of the special electric prize winning device 32, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are lower in the high frequency winning mode. It is set so that the frequency of winning to the special electric winning device 32 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than in the frequency winning mode.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5). In addition to the low-probability jackpot result and the maximum-probability jackpot result already described in the first embodiment, a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result and an explicit high-probability jackpot result are set in the distribution table as types of jackpot results. ing.

The non-explicit high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode before switching to the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode. be. This high-probability mode continues at least until the next big win results, resulting in transition to the opening/closing execution mode. If the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. This support mode continues at least until the next jackpot result, which causes a transition to the opening and closing execution mode.

The result of the explicit high-probability jackpot is that the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is entered regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing execution is performed. Regardless of the support mode before the mode shift, the jackpot result is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue at least until the next big win results and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made accordingly.

In the main ROM 64 of the present embodiment, as a distribution table, a distribution table for the first special figure used when determining the distribution of the pending information acquired based on the winning to the first operation port 938, A distribution table for the second special figure used when determining the distribution of the reserved information acquired based on the winning to the 2 operation port 939 is set.

Specifically describing each distribution table, the distribution table for the first special figure includes low probability jackpot results, non-explicit high probability jackpot results, and explicit high probability jackpot results as types of jackpot results to be distributed. All of the jackpot result and the maximal jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" is an unspecified high It corresponds to the definite jackpot result, "15 to 19" corresponds to the explicit high definite jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to the maximum advantageous jackpot result. In the case of the distribution table for the first special figure, if the jackpot is won, the probability of a low probability jackpot result is 1/3, and the non-explicit high probability jackpot result, the explicit high probability jackpot result, and the best advantage The probability of a high probability jackpot outcome, such as a jackpot outcome, is 2/3. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the probability of the high frequency winning mode is 2/3, and the probability of the low frequency winning mode is 1/3.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special figure, only low probability jackpot results and maximum profit jackpot results are set as types of jackpot results to be distributed, and non-explicit high probability jackpot results and explicit high probability jackpot results Jackpot result is not set. In the distribution table for the second special figure, of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 29" is the maximum profit jackpot. correspond to the results. In the case of the distribution table for the second special figure, when a big win is won, the probability of a low-probability jackpot result is 1/3, and the probability of a maximum profit jackpot result is 2/3. Also, the opening/closing execution mode is always the high-frequency winning mode.

That is, the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the probability of becoming the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. More specifically, while the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low frequency winning mode, the distribution table for the second special figure cannot be in the low frequency winning mode. Therefore, as for the types of jackpot results that can be selected when the jackpot is won, the winning to the second operating port 939 occurs rather than the case where the winning to the first operating port 938 occurs and the winning lottery is performed. A winning lottery is more advantageous for the player.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, in the special figure special electric control processing of the present embodiment that is executed to control the execution of the game round and the execution control of the opening and closing execution mode, the special figure special electric control processing of the first embodiment (first implementation Differences from the timer interrupt processing (step S213 in FIG. 8) of the configuration will be described.

First, the acquisition processing of the holding information on the side of the special figure in the special figure special electric control process of the present embodiment will be described. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball B1 (FIG. 53(a)) to the first operation port 938 has occurred, the number of reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area is read, When the number of pending information is less than the upper limit (specifically "4"), hit random number counter C1 (Fig. 6), jackpot type counter C2 (Fig. 6) and reach random number counter C3 (Fig. 6) Each value is stored in the highest side area in which the reservation information is not stored among the first special figure reservation areas. In addition, in the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball B1 to the second operation opening 939 occurs, read the number of reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area, the number of the reservation information is less than the upper limit (specifically "4"), the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first special figure reservation area. stored in the area on the highest side that is not

In the acquisition process, when the hold information for the first special figure reservation area or the hold information for the second special figure reservation area is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (FIG. 5). The sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 82 (FIG. 5). In the display control device 82, by receiving the pending command, the display of the number of pending information on the pattern display device 41 (FIG. 102) is changed corresponding to the increase in the pending number. In this case, since the hold command contains information indicating which hold information has increased from the first special figure hold area and the second special figure hold area, the pattern display device 41 has increased The display of the pending number corresponding to the side is changed.

Further, when the number of pending information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the first special figure pending display unit 932c (FIG. 102) and the second special The display control is performed so that the display content corresponding to the increase in the number of reservations is changed to the side corresponding to the increase in the number of reservations in the diagram reservation display portion 932d (FIG. 102).

In the special figure special electric control process of the present embodiment, in addition to the acquisition process of the reservation information on the special figure side described above, there is a process for controlling the effect for the game round, a process for controlling the opening and closing execution mode. ,It is included. As a process for controlling the effect for the game round, special figure fluctuation start processing, which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, processing for advancing the effect for the game round, and A process for ending the production is set.

Further, as the processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, the processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, the processing for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32 (FIG. 102), and the special electric prize winning device 32, a process for controlling the state during closing, and a process for controlling the ending of the opening/closing execution mode and the transition of the game state at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

The main side RAM 65 (FIG. 5) has a special special electric counter as a counter for the main side CPU 63 (FIG. 5) to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed. In addition, the main ROM 64 (FIG. 5) has a special special electric address table in which the start address of the program for executing the plurality of types of processing is set.

When the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed, the special special electric counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the special special electric control in the next processing time It is incremented by 1, decremented by 1, or cleared to "0" in correspondence with the processing executed in the processing. In the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter is executed.

Next, the special figure fluctuation start processing executed in the special figure special electric control processing of the present embodiment will be described. The special figure fluctuation start process includes the propriety determination process, the distribution determination process, and the reach determination process. The success/failure determination process is executed on the condition that it is not during a game run or during the opening/closing execution mode and that the suspension information is stored.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of common reservations, which is the total number of pieces of reservation information in the first special figure reservation area and the second special figure reservation area, is 1 or more. If the common number of reservations is less than 1, it means that the reservation information is not stored in the first special figure reservation area and the second special figure reservation area, so the success or failure determination process and distribution determination process are not executed . On the other hand, when the common pending number is 1 or more, data setting processing is executed.

In the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is "0". If the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure is executed, and if the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is not "0" 2 Perform the data setting process for the special figure.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special figure reservation area is "0". When the reservation information is stored, regardless of whether the number of reservations in the first special figure reservation area is 1 or more, the data stored in the second special figure reservation area is set for variable display. I made it Thereby, when the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure reservation area and the second special figure reservation area, the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation area corresponding to the second operation port 939 Information is prioritized as a target for starting a game cycle.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, the data stored in the first area for the first special figure of the first special figure reservation area is moved to the execution area AE for the special figure (FIG. 6). After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area for the first special figure to the fourth area for the first special figure to the lower area side.

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main side RAM 65 (FIG. 5) is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying which of the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b the start of the current variable display is. Then, output a shift command, which is information for making the voice emission control device 81 (FIG. 5), which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the first special figure reservation area has been shifted, End this data setting process. In the voice emission control device 81, by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 82 (FIG. 5), the number of reservation information corresponding to the first special figure reservation area in the pattern display device 41 Change the display to correspond to the decrease in the pending number.

Also, as described above, when the number of pending information in the first special figure pending area is reduced, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the first special figure pending display unit 932c On the other hand, display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of reserved items.

In the second special figure data setting process, the data stored in the second special figure first area of the second special figure reservation area is first moved to the special figure execution area AE (FIG. 6). After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area for the second special figure to the fourth area for the second special figure to the lower area side.

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Then, a shift time command, which is information for making the sound emission control device 81 recognize that the data of the second special figure reservation area has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is terminated. In the voice emission control device 81, by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 82, the display of the number of pending information corresponding to the second special figure pending area in the pattern display device 41 is displayed. change to correspond to the decrease in

Also, when the number of pending information in the second special figure pending area is reduced as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the second special figure pending display unit 932d On the other hand, display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of reserved items.

After executing the data setting process, the propriety determination process is executed. In the success/failure determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set to the second special figure flag of the main side RAM 65, the current game round is the first special figure reservation area and the second special figure reservation area. It is determined which of the pending information corresponds. Also, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Then, the correctness tables corresponding to these determination results are the low certainty table for the first special figure, the high certainty table for the first special figure, the low certainty table for the second special figure, and the second special figure. Select from among the high-probability tables for After the selection of the corresponding table, the information for determining whether or not among the pending information stored in the execution area AE for the special figure (FIG. 6), that is, the numerical information obtained from the random number counter C1 is the above selection It is determined whether or not it matches with any of the numerical information set as the jackpot results in the success/failure table. In addition, when it does not match with the numerical information set as the big hit result, it is determined whether or not it matches with any of the numerical information set as the small hit result in the selected success/failure table.

When the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result, the distribution determination process is executed. In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not the second special figure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", the current game round is the first special figure reservation area and the second special figure reservation area. It is determined which of the pending information corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is selected from the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure. After selecting the distribution table, the information for distribution determination among the pending information stored in the execution area AE for special figures (FIG. 6), that is, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, It is grasped which kind of jackpot results the selected sorting table corresponds to. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special figure is selected, any one of the low probability jackpot result, the non-explicit high probability jackpot result, the explicit high probability jackpot result and the maximum advantage jackpot result Find out if it is compatible with Also, when the distribution table for the second special figure is selected, it is grasped which one of the low-probability jackpot result and the maximum-benefit jackpot result corresponds.

Thereafter, a process of setting a flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result identified this time in the main side RAM 65 (FIG. 5) is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that it is a low probability jackpot result, the low probability flag is set to "1", and when it is specified that it is a non-explicit high probability jackpot result, the non-explicit flag is set to "1" ”, set “1” to the explicit flag when specifying that it is an explicit high probability jackpot result, and set “1” to the most advantageous flag when specifying that it is a maximum winning jackpot result set. Incidentally, in the following description, the determination of whether or not it is a result of various jackpots is performed by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the main side RAM 65 is set.

After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b in this game round is stored in advance in the main side ROM 64 (FIG. 5). It is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加In this stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the picture mode stopped and displayed in the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b is set differently for each kind of the jackpot result. Information on the form of the pattern according to the type of the specified jackpot result is stored in the main side RAM 65. - 特許庁

Information on the type of symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the picture patterns may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of picture patterns may be set for each jackpot result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit result, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process is a small hit result. If the result is a small hit, the small hit flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Then, the stop result setting process for the small winning result is executed. Specifically, information on the form of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 932a or the second special figure display unit 932b in this game round is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

Moreover, when it determines with it not being a small hit result, the stop result setting process for an out result is performed. Specifically, information on the form of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 932a or the second special figure display unit 932b in this game round is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65 . In this case, the information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the big win result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the small win result.

After executing any one of the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the small win result, and the stop result setting process for the losing result, the display duration grasping process is executed. In such processing, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game round this time is the result of the maximum advantageous jackpot or the result of the low-probability jackpot, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, if the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the special figure execution area AE (FIG. 6) is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the reach display is displayed. Determined to occur.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display duration table for reach generation stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, it is determined whether the current game round is either the explicit high probability jackpot result, the non-explicit high probability jackpot result, or the small hit result, If there is, the display continuation time table corresponding to the result is read from the main ROM 64, and the display continuation time information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. In this case, at least in the game cycle triggered by the reservation information retained and stored in the first special reservation area, it is impossible or difficult to identify whether it is a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result or a small hit result. The display continuation time is selected so that the pattern display device 41 (FIG. 102), the display light emitting unit 53 (FIG. 1), and the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) perform the effect in the manner. However, since the display duration table referred to in the case of the non-explicit high probability jackpot result and the case of the small hit result are different, the degree of expectation that the success/fail lottery mode after the open/close execution mode is the high probability mode It is possible to make the selection rate of the high performance effect different in both cases. It's getting easier. On the other hand, if the reach display is not generated, and neither the explicit high-probability jackpot result, the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result, nor the small hit result, the display duration table for failure is read from the main side ROM 64, and this time The display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired.

It should be noted that the display duration information when the display duration table for out is referred to is in the first special figure reservation area if it is a game turn triggered by the reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area It is set so that the display duration time becomes shorter as the number of stored pending information increases, and if it is a game turn triggered by the pending information stored in the second special figure pending area, the second special The display continuation time is set to be shorter as the number of pending information stored in the figure pending area increases. In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to when the number of pending information is the same, compared to when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, a shorter display duration is selected. A display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the display duration does not change according to the number of pieces of pending information and the support mode may be employed, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display duration time when reach occurs.

After that, the grasped display duration information is set in the special special electric timer counter. The numerical information set in the timer counter is updated by the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process of the main CPU 63 (FIG. 8). By the way, as an effect for the game cycle, the fluctuation display of the pattern in the first special figure display portion 932a or the second special figure display portion 932b and the fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 are performed. When the game is terminated, the final stop display is performed for the final stop time in a state in which the stop result of the game round is displayed (in the state where a combination of predetermined symbols is waiting on the activated line in the pattern display device 41). . In this case, the acquired display continuation time is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game. In this regard, the display continuation time can be rephrased as the time before the final stop.

After setting the display duration information to the special special electric timer counter, the command for variation and the type command are output. The variation command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration acquired by referring to the display duration table for outliers as described above is different from the display duration acquired by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence, so the command for variation does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the sound emission control device 81 can identify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information on the display duration time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence. Also, the type command includes information on the game result. The output variation command and type command are received by the sound emission control device 81, which is a sub-side control device.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display part on the execution target side of the game cycle of this time among the first special figure display part 932a and the second special figure display part 932b. Then, by adding "1" to the special figure special electric counter, in the next special figure special electric control process, the processing for advancing the effect for the game round is executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The game board 931 has a structure in which the player can separately aim for winning the first operating port 938 and winning the second operating port 939 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the operating handle. . Also, in each game round, the winning lottery performed using the holding information acquired based on the winning to the second operation port 939 is the holding information acquired based on the winning to the first operation port 938 It is set more advantageous to the player than the winning lottery performed using . In the winning lottery of each game round, the holding information acquired based on the winning to the second operating port 939 is prioritized over the holding information acquired based on the winning to the first operating port 938. be. In other words, the configuration is such that the player can expect a better result when aiming at winning at the second operating port 939 than when aiming at winning at the first operating port 938 . In this configuration, the printed wiring board 957 of the main control board 61 is provided with a second working opening connector 956 to which a two-pole connector 954 of a second harness 952a extending from the second working opening detecting sensor 952 is attached. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed in the wiring board 957 around the two pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956 . Therefore, in the soldering process, the possibility that molten solder adhering around the two pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956 merges to form a solder bridge is suppressed. This reduces the possibility that a connection failure occurs in the connection of the second actuation opening detection sensor 952 to the main control board 61 and the winning to the second actuation opening 939 is not detected. It is possible to reduce the possibility of disappointing the player by reducing the possibility that winning is not detected in the second operation port 939 that the player aims for in anticipation of a good result.

A signal line 958 extending from the first working opening detection sensor 951 and the second working opening detection sensor 952 is bundled in units of the working opening detection sensors 951 and 952 and connected to the main control board 61 . Therefore, a gap is formed between the bundles of the signal lines 958, and the illegal board can be found from the gap.

A first harness 951 a extending from the first operating opening detection sensor 951 and a second harness 952 a extending from the second operating opening detecting sensor 952 are connected to separate operating opening connectors 955 and 956 on the main control board 61 . be. Assuming that an illegal board is used, by setting a large number of connectors to which the illegal board is to be connected, it is possible to make it difficult to use the illegal board in the game hall.

The fluorescent color of the first harness 951a and the first working port connector 955 to which the first harness 951a is connected is the second working port to which the second harness 952a and the second harness 952a are connected. It is different from the fluorescent color that the connector 956 has. Therefore, in the work of connecting the first working port detection sensor 951 and the second working port detection sensor 952 to the main control board 61, the connection destinations of the harnesses 951a and 952a can be identified by color, and the harness 951a can be identified by color. , 952a can be prevented from occurring.

The printed wiring board 957 includes a first working opening connector 955 to which the two-pole connector 953 of the first harness 951a extending from the first working opening detection sensor 951 is attached. A short-circuit prevention hole 761 is formed around the two pins 784q and 784r of the connector 955 for use. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a solder bridge 751 and a short circuit in the connection of the first working port detection sensor 951 to the main control board 61 .

<Another Form of the 22nd Embodiment>
- In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the first working port connector 955 may be configured to have four pins 784 (Fig. 91). For example, two signal lines 958 extending from the first operating port detection sensor 951 and two signal lines extending from other electronic components connected to the main control board 61 are connected to the first operating port connector 955. may be configured. As a result, the effect of suppressing the connection error of the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a, the effect of making it difficult to use the illegal board in the game hall, and the second operation opening detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61 While maintaining the effect of suppressing the formation of the solder bridge 751 in the connection, it is possible to facilitate the connection work of the electronic components including the first operation port detection sensor 951 to the main control board 61 . Further, for example, the first working port detection sensor 951 may include four signal lines 958, and the four signal lines may be connected to the first working port connector 955 having four pins 784. good. By adopting a configuration in which the number of signal lines 958 that the first working opening detection sensor 951 has is not limited to two, the types of sensors that can be used as the first working opening detection sensor 951 are increased and the degree of freedom in design is increased. can be done.

- In the twenty-second embodiment described above, only one of the two signal lines 958 constituting the first harness 951a has a yellow fluorescent color, and the other does not have a fluorescent color. good too. Alternatively, only one of the two signal lines 958 forming the second harness 952a may have a green fluorescent color, and the other may not have a fluorescent color. By visually checking the first harness 951a, the connection destination of the first harness 951a can be known in relation to the color of the connector 955 for the first operating port. Since the connection destination of the second harness 952a can be identified from the color of the connector 956, connection errors between the first harness 951a and the second harness 952a can be suppressed.

- In the second working port region 962 of the twenty-second embodiment described above, the structure for preventing the formation of the solder bridge 751 is not limited to the short-circuit prevention hole 761 . For example, in place of the short-circuit prevention hole 761, a configuration using the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 already described in FIG. 99(a) of the twentieth embodiment may be employed. The configuration will be described below.

Around the first via hole 793s of the second working port region 962 (FIG. 103(b)), the joining hole 762 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed, On the right side of the joint hole 762, the separate short-circuit prevention hole 874 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is provided. The separated short-circuit prevention hole 874 is not continuous with the joining hole 762 around the first via hole 793s, and is formed in such a manner that the reduced width portion 874b (FIG. 99(a)) faces the direction of the first via hole 793s. ing. Therefore, in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957, when the first via hole 793s is positioned at the rear end in the conveying direction, the pin 784s (FIG. 103(b)) inserted through the first via hole 793s may ) moves toward the second via hole 793t to form a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)).

The joining hole 762 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is formed around the second via hole 793t of the second working port region 962 (FIG. 103(b)), On the left side of the joint hole 762, the separate short-circuit prevention hole 871 (FIG. 99(a)) already described in the twentieth embodiment is provided. The separated short-circuit prevention hole 871 is not continuous with the joining hole 762 around the second via hole 793t, and is formed in such a manner that the narrowed width portion 871b (FIG. 99(a)) faces the direction of the second via hole 793t. ing. Therefore, in the soldering process of the printed wiring board 957, when the second via hole 793t is positioned at the rear end in the transport direction, the pin 784t (FIG. 103(b)) inserted through the second via hole 793t ) is less likely to move toward the first via hole 793s and form a solder bridge 751 (FIG. 95(c)).

In this way, separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 are provided around the two via holes 793s and 793t of the second working port area 962, and solder bridges are provided in connection between the second working port detection sensor 952 and the main control board 61. By reducing the possibility that 751 is formed, even if the winning to the second operating port 939 occurs, the winning is not detected, disappointing the player aiming at the second operating port 939 with high expectations. Possibility can be reduced.

Similarly to the two via holes 793s and 793t in the second working port region 962, around the two via holes 793q and 793r (FIG. 103(b)) in the first working port region 961 (FIG. 103(b)) By providing separate type short circuit prevention holes 871, 874 (Fig. 99(a)) in the , the possibility of forming solder bridges 751 (FIG. 95(c)) can be reduced.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, all of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are configured to store history information (or ball entry history). However, it is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 is the object of storing the history information. It is good also as a structure which has become. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. It's okay. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls enter the ball-entering portion for which the history information is to be stored in a predetermined period.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the information corresponding to the game ball entry result is transmitted in association with the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. Although the signal paths 118a to 118c are set for the same type of ball-entering unit, the information corresponding to the ball-entering result for the same type of ball-entering unit is not limited to this. , and a plurality of ball-entering detection sensors corresponding thereto, or a configuration in which one type of information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 .

(3) In the first embodiment and the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, it is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, there is no need to execute processing for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence information, so the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(4) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to be performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, it is not limited to this. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main side CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, it is configured to be stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to use the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. Thereby, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63 . For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. , the master side CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound light emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are displayed using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41. The configuration may be such that the corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the pattern display device 41, and the like. In this case, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entry state in the game area PA was normal on the business day immediately before the opening of the game hall.

(8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. may be As a configuration that prevents the game from starting, for example, it may be configured to prohibit the shooting of game balls, or may be configured to disable the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. A configuration may be adopted in which the winning/failure determination process is not executed even if a prize is won to the 33 or the second operating opening 34 . Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erasing switch is ON, and the operation is possible when the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner.

(9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main side CPU 63 or the management side CPU 112. may not be executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by the operator of the reading operation. A reading device may be configured to calculate various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main side CPU 63 may be provided with the function of executing the history information storage process and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. The CPU 92 may have a configuration, or the audio emission control device 81 may have a configuration. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 has these functions, the information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control body having the functions. It will happen.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be capable of outputting information of history information or various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

(12) The reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is configured to be used also as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with a reading device, but this is not the only option. Instead, a terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64 . In this case, the terminals used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62 or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 .

(13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as flash memory. Any one of 116, 117 and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is reduced. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, and backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. good too.

(14) It is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timing.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. , a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66 . Specifically, for the configuration, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main side CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the case of the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main side CPU 63, the signal is received. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that point in time when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment. Further, when an external output opportunity to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters, which are the calculation results, and also outputs the history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, a configuration in which the occurrence of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is stored as history information. The transition timing to the open/close execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information. The occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, by using the history information as described above, a configuration may be employed in which the probability of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, or a configuration in which the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode is calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, while the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to entering a ball into a privilege opportunity ball entering portion that triggers payout of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and the winning/failure determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball entry part with respect to the total number of discharged game balls while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball entry part. Become.

(19) A configuration may be adopted in which items other than those in each of the above embodiments are included as objects to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a has become full, the timing at which the full-tank state started, and the timing at which the full-tank state is canceled may be stored as history information. At least one of the no-ball state, the timing at which the no-ball state was started, and the timing at which the no-ball state was canceled may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 was in an abnormal state. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, it is assumed that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, it is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. may be configured. In this case, there is no need to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of entering balls was grasped using the history information. may be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball entry portion in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. Also, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurred, and the calculated number of balls entering is an abnormal number. In some cases, an anomaly notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with a fraudulent act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entering section.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that in the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the master side CPU 63 executes the processing for changing the output state of each signal and the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing for the buffers 122a to 122o match.

(24) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64, the configuration may be such that either the program or the data can be selectively output. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only the data can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reader. As a configuration for selectively outputting information, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. can be considered.

(25) Different information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. may store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality, and the stored history information may be output to the outside through the reading terminal 102 .

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a Although the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of game balls detected by the above, it is not limited to this, for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA A passage area through which the game balls pass one by one may be provided, and an ejection detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area may be provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in this configuration, similarly to the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 By providing 42a to 47a, it becomes possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entering each ball entry portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) Display control based on commands sent from the main controller 60 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on commands sent from the main controller 60 The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these two control devices may be changed. may be integrated into the main controller 60 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 60 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever, the result of the lottery process executed for the winning combination is stored as history information. , and the history information may be used to calculate the actual winning probability of each combination. The information may be used to calculate the actual probability of transition to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special game state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may provide notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the above-described first to twelfth embodiments may be mutually applied in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined.

(30) In the thirteenth to sixteenth embodiments, the nails 213, 214, 262, and 322 and the platform 351 that distribute the course of the game ball B1 in two ways are different in the probability of one distribution result and the other distribution result. The course of the game ball B1 may be distributed in such a manner that there is a significant difference between the resulting probability. For example, in the first left and right dividing nail 213 of the thirteenth embodiment, the area of the first dividing surface 217a is larger than the area of the second dividing surface 218a. All the game balls B1 positioned and a part of the game balls B1 positioned on the front side are distributed to the right side, and only the remaining game balls B1 positioned on the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the left side. In this way, by adopting a structure that hits the first distribution surface 217a more easily than the second distribution surface 218a, the probability that the game ball B1 colliding with the first left-right distribution nail 213 wins the operation openings 33, 34 is increased. , the player's attention can be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 around the first left and right dividing nail 213.例文帳に追加

Further, for example, in the front and rear dividing nail 262 of the fourteenth embodiment, the area of the first dividing surface 264a is larger than the area of the second dividing surface 265a. All the game balls B1 positioned in the front side and a part of the game balls B1 positioned on the front side are distributed to the back side, and only the remaining game balls B1 positioned on the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the front side. . In this way, by adopting a structure that hits the first distribution surface 264a more easily than the second distribution surface 265a, the probability that the game ball B1 colliding with the front and rear distribution nail 262 will enter the operation openings 33 and 34 is increased. The player's attention can be drawn to the behavior of the game ball B1 around the sorting nail 262.例文帳に追加

Further, for example, in the repulsion nail 322 of the fifteenth embodiment, the length of the high repulsion portion 334d is longer than the length of the low repulsion member 333, so that the game ball B1 located on the far side of the game area PA and a part of the game ball B1 located on the front side collide with the repulsion nail 322 and rebound greatly, and only the remaining game ball B1 located on the front side of the game area PA collides with the repulsion nail 322. Bounce small. In this way, the high repulsion portion 334d is more likely to hit than the low repulsion member 333, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball B1 that collides with the repulsion nail 322 will enter the operation openings 33 and 34, and the game ball around the repulsion nail 322 is increased. The player's attention can be drawn to the behavior of B1.

Further, for example, in the front and rear distribution table 351 of the sixteenth embodiment, the area of the first downstream surface 372 is larger than the area of the second downstream surface 373, so that the All the game balls B1 and some of the game balls B1 positioned on the front side are distributed to the back side, and only the remaining game balls B1 positioned on the front side of the game area PA are distributed to the front side. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which it is easier to roll on the first downstream surface 372 than on the second downstream surface 373, the game ball B1 rolling on the front and rear distribution table 351 wins the operation ports 33 and 34. It is possible to increase the probability of doing so, and attract the player's attention to the behavior of the game ball B1 around the front and rear distribution table 351.例文帳に追加

(31) The game board of each of the above embodiments is not limited to plywood, and may be an acrylic board. Further, in each of the above embodiments, a board made of polycarbonate may be used as the game board. In short, any plate-shaped member may be used as long as it can define the game area PA where the game ball B1 flows down. Here, the game board includes the game board 24 (FIG. 3) in the first to twelfth embodiments, the game board 233 (FIG. 50) in the thirteenth embodiment, and the game board in another form of the thirteenth embodiment. Board 235 (Fig. 59), game board 236 (Fig. 60), game board 237 (Fig. 61(b)), game board 238 (Fig. 62(b)), game board 261 in the fourteenth embodiment (Fig. 63) , the game board 321 in the fifteenth embodiment (FIG. 68), the game board 341 in the sixteenth embodiment (FIG. 72), the game board 381 in another form of the sixteenth embodiment (FIG. 75), the seventeenth embodiment A game board 421 in the form (Fig. 78), a game board 451 in the eighteenth embodiment (Fig. 82), a game board 452 in another form of the eighteenth embodiment (Fig. 87(a)), a game board in the twenty-second embodiment A game board 931 (Fig. 102) is included.

(32) The solder in the 19th to 22nd embodiments is a connection means made of an alloy of tin containing low-melting-point components such as lead and bismuth and silver. Lead-free solder (an alloy of tin containing copper, zinc, etc. and not containing lead) may be used as the connecting means. In addition to solder, metals such as iron, nickel, copper, zinc, silver, indium, gold, and bismuth, or alloys of these metals may be used as connection means. Any connecting means may be used as long as it adheres in a molten state to the terminals of the electronic component or the connector and the connection area of the substrate, and attaches the electronic component or connector to the substrate by solidifying. When using the connection means, by providing a hole for preventing a short circuit around the area for connection on the substrate, the possibility that the connection means around the adjacent terminals are communicated and a short circuit is formed. can be reduced. Here, the terminals include terminal 775 and pins 784, 784a-784t. Also, the area for connection on the substrate includes via holes 793, 793a to 793t. The connection region includes not only a through hole penetrating vertically through the substrate, but also a hole that is formed up to an intermediate position of the substrate and does not penetrate through the substrate. Further, the holes for preventing short circuits are the short circuit prevention holes 761 (FIG. 92(b)) in the nineteenth embodiment, the inclined short circuit prevention holes 861 (FIG. 98(a)) in another form of the nineteenth embodiment, and the Separable short-circuit prevention holes 871, 874 (FIG. 99(a)) in the twentieth embodiment, and separate short-circuit prevention holes 875 to 878, 886, 887 in another form of the twentieth embodiment (FIGS. 100(a), 3 direction separation type short-circuit prevention holes 881 and 884 (FIG. 100(b)), short-circuit prevention hole groups 891-895 and 921-925 (FIG. 101) in the twenty-first embodiment, short-circuit prevention holes 761 in the twenty-second embodiment ( FIG. 103(b)) and separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871 and 874 (FIG. 99(a)) in another form of the twenty-second embodiment.

In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to 22nd embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 65). function) and
Privilege for executing processing for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (function of executing the process of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92);
In a game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, the main side RAM 65) executes predetermined information (the first Predetermined storage executing means (the first In the ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2320 and S2323.

According to the feature A1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player. be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entering means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means, and the number of game balls entered into the prescribed ball entry means or the frequency of entry is determined. can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine is stored in the prescribed storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not serve as a trigger for execution of processing for awarding a privilege to the player.

According to feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means by not triggering the execution of the processing for giving a privilege to the player based on the predetermined information. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature A3. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, and stores the information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball-entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Feature A4. All the ball entering means for ejecting the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball entering means, are objects to be stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the entering game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball-entering means.

According to feature A4, all ball entry means for discharging game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in the predetermined storage means. can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entry means to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using the information stored in the prescribed storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to feature A5, the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means is included in the predetermined information. It is possible to grasp the ball entry history in detail.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entering means.

According to feature A6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball-entering means, the amount of information of the predetermined information is suppressed, and the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means. can be managed.

Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809; in the eighth embodiment, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of step S2104; function of executing the process of step S2203 in the side CPU 112).

According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation.

Feature A8. Any of features A1 to A7, characterized by comprising external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the game machine and analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by using the read information.

Feature A9. A program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main side CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature A9, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. A means (main A function of executing the processing of step S902 in the side CPU 63).

According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be output to the outside is the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A11, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means has the predetermined memory execution means, so that the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing the undesired operation.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature A13. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, thereby enabling the game to be played to the specific ball entering means. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, ninth to third In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
First transmission means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means function to output either) and
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball-entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means. A second signal path is used to transmit the second information to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature A14. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; A gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means and the entry mode of the game ball to the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the first information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature A15. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, characterized by comprising means for transmitting identification information (function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, there is no need to store in advance the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature A17. Characteristic feature A15 or A16, characterized in that the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature A18. The second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means when the identification information is received. Any one of the features A15 to A17, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the second control means is provided with the information that enables the second control means to specify the ball-entering means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic A15, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of A18.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage the entry state of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the entry state of the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. In the second control means, as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, there are more types of information than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to the feature A20, the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units that is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the model of the gaming machine Accordingly, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the receiving unit. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. First external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
A second external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to determine the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the state of the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. It becomes possible to specify the manner of entering the ball. In addition, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means is externally output, and the specific information and the correspondence to the specific ball entry means Information in combination with information that makes it possible to recognize that the person is doing is output to the outside. This makes it possible to specify each ball-entering mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112. In the seventh embodiment, the function of the management side CPU 112 The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2005 (a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). .

According to the feature A22, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means stores information that enables identification of whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (first storage means). A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a management side in the ninth embodiment A function to execute the processing of step S2203 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation, and calculates the mode information (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, step S1408 in the management side CPU 112; A function of executing the processing of steps S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, A feature A22 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment. The game machine described.

According to the feature A23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the predetermined situation exists and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game ball entry mode.

Feature A24. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means. A function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature A25. Characteristic A22 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in A23.

According to the feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read out and the game ball is entered. When analyzing the mode, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the mode information is calculated.

According to feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature A27. Characteristic features A22 through A22, characterized in that the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. A gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to the feature A27, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs while operating power is being supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized by:

According to feature A28, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature A29, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein when the external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A31. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
Characteristic A29, wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or A gaming machine described in A30.

According to feature A31, in a configuration in which a processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). , and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112).

According to feature A32, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the game machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the manner of entering a game ball.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means is
means for determining whether or not the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S1603 in the management-side CPU 112);
means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

According to the characteristic A33, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storing and executing means causes the mode information to be accompanied by information that makes it possible to specify the timing at which the mode information was calculated, and causes the calculation result storing means to store the information. machine.

According to the feature A34, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature A35. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics A22 to A34, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to feature A35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that

According to feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game ball entry mode without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature A37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to feature A37, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature A38. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is performed when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute a second notification.

According to the feature A39, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. Characteristic A1 to characterized by comprising means for externally outputting correspondence information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main side CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to the feature A40, in the configuration in which the correspondence information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means is externally output, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, by using the corresponding information, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entering means and the frequency of entering the ball, while using the prescribed information stored in the prescribed storage means, It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entering the ball.

Feature A41. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature A41, the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit can exhibit the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features A1 to A41, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is Predetermined storage executing means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in
Information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments) for calculating mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period using the predetermined information Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management-side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the processing of step S2005 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. function, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage executing means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. functions to execute),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation to calculate the mode information (first, second, sixth, eighth, 9, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth and twelfth embodiments, and the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment , the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management side in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment.

According to the characteristic B2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the game is in the predetermined situation and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature B3. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means. A function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature B4. Characteristic B1 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of (1), it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B5. Characteristic B1, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The game machine according to any one of B4.

According to the characteristic B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information can be obtained on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature B6. Any one of characteristics B1 to B5, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature B6, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, it is possible to finely manage the mode information within the range of one business day. becomes possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by:

According to feature B7, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature B8, by outputting the state information to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is to be outputted to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B10. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or The gaming machine described in B9.

According to feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). , and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112).

According to feature B11, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized by:

According to the characteristic B12, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, characterized in that the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that enables identification of the timing at which the mode information is calculated, accompanying the mode information. machine.

According to the feature B13, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature B14. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics B1 to B13, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to characteristic B14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that

According to feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game during a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The game machine according to feature B15, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to feature B16, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature B17. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute a second notification.

According to the feature B18, the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is reported instead of the mode information as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed in the main RAM 65) is stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments; in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63;
Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112. In the seventh embodiment, the function of the management side CPU 112 a function of executing the process of step S2005 (a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage processing of the information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature B20. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature B20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features B1 to B20, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is Predetermined storage executing means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in
Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth , in the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 , the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). function to execute the process of (in the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. . As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Also, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized by:

According to the feature C2, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. The game according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the result storage executing means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that enables the specification of the timing at which the mode information is calculated to accompany the mode information. machine.

According to the feature C3, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature C4. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. functions to execute),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation to calculate the mode information (first, second, sixth, eighth, 9, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth and twelfth embodiments, and the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management side in the seventh embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature C4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the game is in the predetermined situation and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature C5. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means. any of the features C1 to C4 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the characteristic C5, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature C6. Characteristic C1 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of C5.

According to the characteristic C6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of (1), it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature C7. Characteristic C1, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The game machine according to any one of C6.

According to the characteristic C7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information can be obtained on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature C8. Any one of the characteristics C1 to C7, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature C8, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, it is possible to finely manage the mode information within the range of one business day. becomes possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized by:

According to feature C9, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature C10. Features C1 to C9 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature C10, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature C11, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature C12. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
Characteristic C10, wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or The gaming machine described in C11.

According to the feature C12, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics C1 to C12, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to the feature C13, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature C14. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, characterized in that

According to the feature C14, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game during a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature C15. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature C15, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature C16. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
with
The game machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature C16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature C17. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features C14 to C16, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature C17, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed in the main RAM 65) is stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments; in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63;
Each time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs, information calculation means (first, second In the second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the steps in the management side CPU 112 A function of executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. function, the function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). function of executing the process of (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage processing of the information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Also, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature C19. The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic C19, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features C1 to C19, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is First storage execution means (1st to 9th, 11th to 12th embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, in the 10th embodiment, the main side a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the CPU 63;
When a specific event occurs as a result of a game, specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments; Second storage executing means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. A function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment); ,
First external output means (management side CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event function to execute external output processing in
Second external output means (management side CPU 112) for outputting the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event function to execute external output processing in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D1, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is externally output in such a manner that it is possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so that it can be recognized. As a result, even if the information is not processed by the second control means, it is possible to specify the mode of occurrence of each event using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising means for externally outputting correspondence information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event (function for executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature D2, in a configuration in which correspondence information corresponding to a predetermined event is output to the outside when a predetermined event occurs, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, while the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be easily grasped by using the corresponding information, the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be accurately determined by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It is possible to grasp the

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to feature D3, the predetermined information is count information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times the specific event has occurred. It becomes possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event.

Feature D4. A program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

According to feature D4, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. A selection means ( The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S902 in the main side CPU 63 .

According to feature D5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be output to the outside is the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature D6. Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection unit selects the information stored in the predetermined storage unit and the control program for information to be output from the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized by specifying which one of them.

According to feature D6, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature D7. A chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section, the first external output means and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6.

According to feature D7, it is possible to integrate the signal paths for the information output section within the chip. This makes it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output section, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features D1 to D7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. Program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main side CPU 63) for outputting the control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output section (reading terminal 102);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the special information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature E2. Selection means for specifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and outputting information corresponding to the specified result (step S902 in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of

According to feature E2, in the configuration in which the special information is externally output using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature E3. The selection means selects, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by specifying.

According to feature E3, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature E4. Any one of characteristics E1 to E3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E4, it is possible to integrate the signal paths for the information output section within the chip. This makes it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output section, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features E1 to E4, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112) are provided,
The first control means is
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a predetermined event occurs (the function of executing the processing of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92);
Information transmission means (function for executing management output processing in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the event occurs;
with
When receiving the predetermined event information, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth memory). In the embodiment, the predetermined information (first to eighth , history information in the twelfth embodiment, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) are stored in the predetermined storage means (first to ninth , in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2323.

According to feature F1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the occurrence of the predetermined event. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege provision means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means is prevented from increasing excessively. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature F3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined memory executing means executes a process of storing information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined memory means, thereby storing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event in the game machine or outside the game machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. and
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event are stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the predetermined event occurs, but also the manner in which the specific event occurs. Moreover, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the rate of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Also, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is sent to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature F4. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; The gaming machine according to feature F3, further comprising a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the first information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature F5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized by comprising transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature F5, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, There is no need to store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature F6, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the predetermined event and the specific event can occur. Under certain circumstances, it is possible to allow the second control means to identify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means.

Feature F7. Characteristic feature F5 or F6, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature F7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature F8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, provides correspondence information that makes it possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. in correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in management side CPU 112). game machine.

According to the feature F8, the second control means stores the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event. Thereby, the information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature F9. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic F5, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of F8.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature F10, the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit can exhibit the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, and the feature group F, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a first control means (main side CPU 63);
a second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
with
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Identification information transmission means (master side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means a function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs, and the second signal path is used when the second event occurs. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Further, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information , need not be stored in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature G2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature G3. Characteristic feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature G4. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that means for storing relationship information in correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in management side CPU 112) The game machine described.

According to feature G4, the second control means stores the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means. Accordingly, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature G5. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic G1, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of G4.

According to the feature G5, it is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of the first event and the mode of occurrence of the second event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature G6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is larger than the number of types of information The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein a signal path is provided.

According to the characteristic G6, since the number of signal paths is greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be transmitted according to the model of the game machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration of the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G7. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature G7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features G1 to G7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group G, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration regarding communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 233), and the game ball (game ball B1) is placed in the game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent plate. ) from upstream to downstream,
The game board includes predetermined changing means (first left and right dividing nails 213, 242, second left/right dividing nail 214, reversing nail 251, front/rear dividing nail 262, repulsive nail 322, front/rear dividing bases 351, 391, 392, position changing passage 423, replacement position changing passage 442, inclined nail). A game machine characterized by

According to the feature H1, since the game balls in the game area can be dispersed in such a manner that the courses of the game balls are different according to the positions of the game balls in the depth direction, only the lateral positions of the game balls in contact As compared with a gaming machine in which the movement of the game ball is influenced by the movement of the game ball, the variation of the movement of the game ball in the game area can be increased to improve the interest of the game.

The game board in this feature H1 is a plate-like one provided with predetermined changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Feature H2. The predetermined change means rebounds the game ball by applying a resistance force to the game ball that contacts from the upstream side of the game area, and changes the movement mode of the game ball due to the rebound to the contact state of the game ball in the depth direction. The game machine according to feature H1, which is characterized in that it is made different according to the position.

According to the feature H2, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball after rebounding according to the contact position in the depth direction of the game ball, and by rebounding the game ball flowing down the game area, the movement mode can be changed. It is possible to add a novel movement mode of changing the rebound direction according to the position in the depth direction while adopting the conventional configuration of changing.

Feature H3. The predetermined change means rolls the game ball placed on the upper side from the upstream side of the game area, and changes the movement mode of the game ball by rolling according to the contact position of the game ball in the depth direction. The game machine according to feature H1 or H2, which is characterized by being different.

According to the feature H3, since the movement mode of the game ball is changed in the process of rolling the game ball, the movement mode of the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction is assumed in the game machine design stage. easier to control.

Feature H4. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein a plurality of the predetermined change means are arranged in parallel in the game area.

According to the characteristic H4, the game ball that has reached the area where the plurality of predetermined change means are arranged side by side is likely to come into contact with any one of the predetermined change means. This makes it easier to change the movement mode of the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H5. Another changing means (first left and right splitting nails 213, 242, second left and right splitting nails 214) in which the movement mode of the game ball after contact according to the position in the depth direction of the contacting game ball is different from the predetermined changing means , reversing nail 251, front and rear distribution nail 262, rear nail 271, front priority member 291, repulsion nail 322, front and rear distribution bases 351, 391, 392, position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, inclined nail). prepared,
The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the separate change means is arranged in parallel with the predetermined change means in the game area.

According to the feature H5, the game ball that has reached the area where the predetermined changing means and the separate changing means are arranged side by side is, for example, depending on which of the predetermined changing means and the separate changing means it contacts, the contact position in the depth direction. It becomes possible to make the movement mode of the game ball different according to it. In this case, the player pays attention to which one of the predetermined changing means and the separate changing means the game ball contacts while expecting the movement mode desired by the player. Further, for example, depending on the position in the depth direction when contacting one of the predetermined changing means and the other changing means, it is possible to have a configuration in which the game ball moves differently when it contacts the other after that. . In this case, it is possible to associate the movement modes of the game ball by both changing means with each other.

Feature H6. Characteristic features H1 to H5, characterized in that the predetermined changing means changes the lateral movement of the game ball in the game area after contact according to the position of the game ball in contact with the game ball in the depth direction. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to vary the lateral movement of the game ball according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to correlate the position of the game ball in the depth direction and the mode of movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction. Predict the movement of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H7. The predetermined change means is
First predetermined change means (first distribution surface 217a, 232a, 244a, first reversal surface 254a, rear nail 271, low-resilience member 333, first inclined portion of inclined nail);
A second predetermined change for changing the lateral movement mode of the game ball contacting a second predetermined range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap the first predetermined range in the depth direction to a second predetermined mode. Means (second distribution surfaces 218a, 234a, 245a, second reversal surface 254b, front priority member 291, high rebound portion 334d, second inclined portion of inclined nail);
The gaming machine according to feature H6, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H7, the lateral movement of the game ball after contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player can predict to some extent the movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction with respect to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It is possible to

Feature H8. The first predetermined change means applies a force including a leftward component to the game ball that contacts the first predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the second predetermined changing means applies a force including a rightward component to the game ball that contacts within the second predetermined range.

According to the feature H8, the lateral component of the force applied to the game ball is exactly opposite depending on the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to remarkably vary the movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H9. The first predetermined change means applies a force including a component in a predetermined direction, which is one of leftward and rightward, to the game ball that contacts the first predetermined range,
The second predetermined change means applies a force including a component in the predetermined direction to the game ball that contacts the second predetermined range, and the force in the predetermined direction is greater than the first predetermined change means. The gaming machine according to feature H7, characterized in that it provides.

According to the feature H9, the same horizontal force is applied to the game ball regardless of whether the contact position in the depth direction is within the first predetermined range or the second predetermined range, and the magnitude of the force is reduced. It is possible to make it different. As a result, while moving the game ball in the same horizontal direction, it is possible to vary the amount of movement according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H10. Any one of the characteristics H1 to H9, wherein the predetermined changing means changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact according to the position of the game ball in contact with the game ball in the depth direction. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H10, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the modes of movement of the game ball in the depth direction, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H11. The predetermined change means is
Third predetermined changing means (first reversing surface 254a, third 1 distribution surface 264a, first downstream surface 372, back side wall surface 443a),
A fourth predetermined change of changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with a fourth predetermined range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap the third predetermined range in the depth direction to a fourth predetermined mode. means (second reversing surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, second downstream surface 373, front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b);
The gaming machine according to feature H10, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H11, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player can predict to some extent the movement of the game ball in the depth direction after the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It is possible to

Feature H12. The third predetermined changing means applies a force including a forward component to the game ball that contacts the third predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature H11, wherein the fourth predetermined change means applies a force including a backward component to the game ball that contacts the fourth predetermined range.

According to the feature H12, the component in the depth direction of the force applied to the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction is opposite. As a result, it is possible to remarkably change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H13. The gaming machine according to feature H12, wherein the third predetermined range exists on the back side of the fourth predetermined range.

According to the feature H13, it is possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side due to the existence of the predetermined changing means.

Feature H14. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H13, wherein the predetermined changing means has a different coefficient of restitution depending on the position in the depth direction.

According to the feature H14, it is possible to apply different magnitudes of drag to game balls having different collision positions in the depth direction. Thereby, the rebound speed of the game ball after colliding with the predetermined changing means can be made different. In this way, by increasing the variation of movement of the game ball in the game area, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H15. The predetermined change means is
Resin members (first left-right distribution members 215, 243, second left-right distribution member 231, reversing member 254 , front and rear distribution member 263, plate member 292),
a metal member (fixing member 216, support members 293, 294) for fixing the predetermined changing means to the game board with the resin member exposed to the game area;
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H14, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H15, the member for changing the path of the game ball is made of a resin that can be easily molded, so that the degree of freedom in designing the member for changing the path of the game ball can be increased. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the resin member is firmly fixed with the metal member, the durability of the predetermined change means is improved, and a situation in which the game machine equipped with the predetermined change means requires frequent maintenance can be avoided. can be avoided.

Feature H16. Any one of features H1 to H15, wherein the predetermined change means is fixed to a base body (left guide member 255) provided separately from the game board and fixed to the game board The game machine described.

According to the feature H16, it is possible to provide the predetermined changing means on the game board by fixing the base body integrated with the predetermined changing means to the game board. As a result, it becomes possible to provide the predetermined changing means on the game board after the positioning of the predetermined changing means has been carefully performed.

Feature H17. A gaming machine according to feature H16, wherein a plurality of said predetermined changing means are fixed to said base body.

According to the feature H17, since it is possible to provide these predetermined changing means on the game board after carefully performing relative positioning of the plurality of predetermined changing means, relative positioning of the plurality of predetermined changing means It is possible to improve the accuracy.

Feature H18. Any one of features H1 to H17, wherein the game board is provided with an obstacle nail (obstruction nail 228) that changes the movement mode of the game ball after contact in a mode according to the contact position in the horizontal direction. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H18, it is possible to provide a sufficient number of means for dispersing the course of the game ball on the game board. When all the obstacle nails in the conventional game board are changed to predetermined change means, the number of predetermined change means that can be provided on the game board is limited if the predetermined change means is manufactured to be larger than the obstacle nail in order to ensure strength. put away. On the other hand, as a means for dispersing the paths of game balls on the game board, by mixing small obstacle nails and large predetermined changing means, it is possible to disperse the game balls that can be provided on the game board. It is possible to suppress the reduction of the means and sufficiently disperse the game balls. Then, it is possible to configure a game board capable of both changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the horizontal direction and changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature H19. The predetermined change means changes the lateral movement mode of the game ball in the game area after contact according to the position of the game ball in contact with the game ball in the depth direction,
The game board is provided with specific changing means (reverse nail 251, Any one of features H1 to H18, characterized by comprising a front-rear distributing nail 262, a front-rear distributing table 351, 391, 392, a position change passage 423, a replacement position change passage 442, and a guide passage 461). The game machine described.

According to the feature H19, it is possible to change the position of the game ball in the depth direction by providing the specific change means. In addition to the specific changing means, the game board is provided with predetermined changing means for changing the lateral movement of the game ball according to the contact position in the depth direction, thereby diversifying the movement of the game ball. It is possible to convert

Further, since the specific change means is provided upstream of the predetermined change means, depending on whether or not the position of the game ball in the depth direction is changed by the specific change means, the game ball by the predetermined change means after that is changed. It is possible to make different distribution modes in the horizontal direction. As a result, it is possible to associate the movement modes of the game balls by the specific change means and the predetermined change means with each other.

Feature H20. The game board has openings (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) that trigger the provision of advantageous benefits to the player when the game ball enters,
A game ball that contacts the predetermined changing means after the movement mode in the depth direction has changed to the specific mode by the specific changing means is more likely than a game ball that has contacted the predetermined changing means without becoming the specific mode. The gaming machine according to feature H19, wherein the specific changing means and the predetermined changing means are provided so that the ball can be easily entered into the opening.

According to the feature H20, when the specific change means changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction to the specific mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the opening, so that the player's attention to the specific change means is increased. becomes possible. In addition, even if the game ball has been changed to the specific mode for the movement in the depth direction by the specific change means, it will come into contact with the predetermined change means after that, and the movement in the depth direction will change to the specific mode in the process until the contact. can take different forms, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process until the game ball comes into contact with the predetermined changing means.

Feature H21. The game according to feature H19 or H20, wherein the specific change means changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact according to the position of the game ball in contact with the game ball in the depth direction. machine.

According to the feature H21, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the modes of movement of the game ball in the depth direction, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H22. The specific change means is
First specific change means (first reversal surface 254a, first reversal surface 254a, first 1 distribution surface 264a, back side wall surface 443a),
A second specific change that changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction that contacts a second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap the first specific range in the depth direction to a second specific mode Means (second reversing surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b);
The gaming machine according to feature H21, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H22, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player can predict to some extent the movement of the game ball in the depth direction after the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It is possible to

Feature H23. The first specific change means applies a force including a forward component to the game ball that contacts the first specific range,
The gaming machine according to feature H22, wherein the second specific change means applies a force including a backward component to the game ball that contacts the second specific range.

According to the feature H23, the component in the depth direction of the drag applied to the game ball is the exact opposite depending on the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to remarkably change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature H24. The gaming machine according to feature H23, wherein the first specific range exists on the back side of the second specific range.

According to the feature H24, it is possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side due to the existence of the specific changing means.

Feature H25. The specific change means has a guide passage (position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, guide passage 461) through which the game ball passes, and the game ball ejected from the guide passage moves in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features H19 to H24, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of making the above-described specific mode.

According to the feature H25, the player who pays attention to the position of the game ball in the depth direction will pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Feature H26. A gaming machine according to feature H25, characterized in that the manner of movement in the depth direction of a game ball discharged from the guide passage is changed according to the passage manner of the game ball through the guide passage.

According to the feature H26, the game ball enters the guide passage by setting the moving state of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction to a specific state according to the passage state of the game ball in the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the guide passage.

Feature H27. Characteristic feature H25 or H26, characterized in that the guide passage varies the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. The game machine described.

According to the feature H27, the game balls discharged from the guide passage move differently in the depth direction according to the positions of the game balls at the entrance of the guide passage, so that the game balls enter the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the entrance of the guide passage.

Feature H28. The guide passage is formed by being partitioned by a plurality of passage walls and is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction,
When a game ball passing through the guide passage comes into contact with predetermined passage walls (front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b, back side wall surface 443a) among the plurality of passage walls, the game ball is discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction. The game machine according to any one of features H25 to H27, wherein the moving mode of the player is the specific mode.

According to the feature H28, by changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction by contact with the passage wall of the guide passage, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the structure. becomes possible.

Feature H29. The guide path moves the game balls existing in the first range in the depth direction (near the surfaces of the game boards 421 and 451) at the entrance of the guide path to the front side of the first range at the exit of the guide path. , and the game balls existing in the second range (near the rear surface of the window panel 52) which is closer to the front side than the first range at the entrance of the guide passage are moved from the second range at the exit of the guide passage. The game machine according to any one of features H25 to H28, characterized in that it is configured to move the other side to the back side.

According to the feature H29, it is possible to guide the game ball to the position opposite to the position in the depth direction at the entrance of the guide passage. This makes it possible to positively change the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature H30. Said guide path is arranged in the depth direction at the exit of said guide path with respect to a game ball existing on the front side of said first range and on the far side of said second range at the entrance of said guide path. A gaming machine according to feature H29, characterized in that it is configured so as not to apply a force for changing the position of the .

According to the feature H30, it is possible to create a situation in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction does not change even when it passes through the guide passage. This makes it possible to diversify the positions in the depth direction of the game ball after passing through the guide passage.

Feature H31. Characteristic feature H25, characterized in that the guide path is configured such that the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide path in the depth direction is the specific mode regardless of the passage mode of the game ball in the guide path. The game machine described.

According to the feature H31, since the game ball entering the guide passage will surely move in a specific manner in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage, it is possible to increase the influence of the guide passage on the game board. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the movement of the game ball around the guide passage, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H32. The guide passage is provided in a passage forming member (passage forming member 422, replacement passage forming member 441, guide member 471, replacement guide member 561) provided separately from the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of features H25 to H31.

According to the feature H32, since the guide passage is provided in the passage forming body provided separately from the game board, the depth of the game ball can be adjusted while using the same game board by exchanging the passage forming body. It is possible to change the movement mode of the direction.

Feature H33. The game board has openings (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) that trigger the provision of advantageous benefits to the player when the game ball enters,
The predetermined change means divides the movement mode of the contacting game ball after contact into a movement mode with a high probability of hitting the opening and a movement mode with a low probability of hitting the opening. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H32.

According to the feature H33, the probability that the game ball enters the opening differs depending on the position of the game ball in the depth direction. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction upstream of the opening is reflected in the game result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature H34. The game board includes guiding means (stage unit 354) for guiding the game ball to a place where the probability of entering the opening is high,
Characteristic feature H33 characterized in that the predetermined change means guides the game ball to the guide means according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction and does not guide the game ball to the guide means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H34, by making the player pay attention to whether or not the game ball whose course has been changed by the predetermined changing means is guided to the guiding means, the player's interest in the movement of the game ball is increased and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of In addition, by reflecting the difference in the depth direction position of the game ball in the game area in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For the configuration of features H1 to H34, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 261), and a game ball (game ball B1) is placed in a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent plate. ) from upstream to downstream,
The game board is capable of being contacted by a game ball whose position in the depth direction in the game area is within a contactable range (for example, either one of the depth side or the front side of the game area PA). A game ball whose position does not exist in the contactable range cannot be contacted, and special changing means (rear nail 271, front priority member 291, passage forming member 422) capable of changing the movement mode of the contacting game ball , a replacement passage forming member 441).

According to the feature I1, only game balls whose positions in the game area in the depth direction are within the contactable range can contact the special change means. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to come into contact with the special changing means expects the game ball to exist in the contactable range, and the player's attention to the position of the game ball in the game area in the depth direction. It is possible to increase the degree. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game board in this feature I1 is a plate-like one provided with special changing means, and defines a game area for playing games.

Feature I2. The special changing means is characterized in that it exists from the surface of the game board to a midway position in the depth direction of the game area so that the contactable range is on the back side of the game area. The gaming machine described in I1.

According to the feature I2, only game balls existing on the far side of the game area can contact the special change means. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to come into contact with the special changing means expects the game ball to exist on the far side of the game area. In addition, since the special change means is configured to extend from the surface of the game board to the middle position in the depth direction, it is possible to provide the special change means with a simple configuration.

Feature I3. The game board has openings (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) that trigger the provision of advantageous benefits to the player when the game ball enters,
The game ball that has reached the area where the special change means is provided, depending on whether or not it contacts the special change means, whether or not the ball enters the opening or is likely to enter the opening The game machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that the game machines are different in size.

According to feature I3, depending on whether or not the special changing means is contacted, the presence or absence of entry of the game ball into the opening or the ease of entry of the game ball into the opening will differ. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the special changing means.

Feature I4. Any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the game board is provided with an obstacle nail (obstruction nail 228) that changes the movement of the game ball after contact in a manner corresponding to the contact position in the horizontal direction. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature I4, a sufficient number of means for dispersing the courses of game balls can be provided on the game board. When all the obstacle nails in the conventional game board are changed to predetermined change means, the number of predetermined change means that can be provided on the game board is limited if the predetermined change means is manufactured to be larger than the obstacle nail in order to ensure strength. put away. On the other hand, as a means for dispersing the paths of game balls on the game board, by mixing small obstacle nails and large predetermined changing means, it is possible to disperse the game balls that can be provided on the game board. It is possible to suppress the reduction of the means and sufficiently disperse the game balls. Then, it is possible to configure a game board capable of both changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the horizontal direction and changing the course according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature I5. On the upstream side of the special changing means, there is provided a specific changing means (front-rear dividing nail 262, obstacle nail 228, recessed front-rear dividing nail) with which the game ball can come into contact regardless of the position in the depth direction. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that

According to feature I5, the game ball reaching the position of the specific changing means surely contacts the specific changing means, whereas the game ball reaching the position of the special changing means does not contact the special changing means. can happen. And, by providing the specific change means on the upstream side of the special change means, the game ball does not come into contact with the special change means even though it has reached the position of the special change means. It is possible to give surprise.

Feature I6. The special change means and the specific change means are provided so as to be arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein a plurality of the specific change means are provided so as to sandwich the special change means in the predetermined direction.

According to the feature I6, according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction, the game ball is guided in a predetermined direction by the special change means and the specific change means, and the game ball is guided in a predetermined direction at the position of the special change means. It is possible to cause a situation in which the guidance of is terminated. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to be guided in a predetermined direction will pay attention to the arrangement area of the special changing means and the specific changing means, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or I6, wherein the specific changing means is capable of changing the position of the game ball in contact with the game ball in the depth direction.

According to the feature I7, by the game ball coming into contact with the specific change means, the position in the depth direction of the game ball before reaching the position of the special change means is changed from the previous position. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the presence or absence of contact of the game ball with the specific change means and the position of the game ball in the depth direction after contact.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the specific change means changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact according to the position of the game ball in contact with the game ball in the depth direction.

According to the feature I8, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the modes of movement of the game ball in the depth direction, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature I9. The specific change means is
First specific change means (first distribution surface 264a) for changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction in contact with the first specific range in the depth direction (for example, the back side of the game area PA) in the first specific mode When,
A second specific change that changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction that contacts a second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap the first specific range in the depth direction to a second specific mode. Means (second distribution surface 265a);
The gaming machine according to feature I8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I9, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player can predict to some extent the movement of the game ball in the depth direction after the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It is possible to

Features I10. The first specific change means applies a force including a forward component to the game ball that contacts the first specific range,
The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the second specific change means applies a force including a backward component to the game ball that contacts the second specific range.

According to the feature I10, the depth direction component of the drag applied to the game ball is exactly opposite depending on the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to remarkably change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature I11. The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the first specific range exists on the back side of the second specific range.

According to the feature I11, the existence of the specific changing means makes it possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side.

For the configuration of features I1 to I11, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. A transparent plate (window panel 52) is arranged on the front side of the game board (for example, the game board 261), and a game ball (game ball B1) is placed in a game area (game area PA) between the game board and the transparent plate. ) from upstream to downstream,
The game board includes specific changing means (reversing nail 251, front-rear distribution nail 262, front-rear distribution table 351, 391) that enables the movement of the game ball in contact with the game area in the depth direction to be a specific mode. , 392, a position change passage 423, a replacement position change passage 442, and a guide passage 461).

According to the feature J1, it is possible to change the position of the game ball in the depth direction by providing the specific change means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball in the game area not only in the horizontal direction but also in the depth direction, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game board in this characteristic J1 is a plate-like one provided with specific changing means, and defines a game area for playing a game.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific changing means changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact according to the position of the game ball in contact with the game ball in the depth direction.

According to the feature J2, it is possible to change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to diversify the modes of movement of the game ball in the depth direction, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J3. The specific change means is
First specific change means (first reversal surface 254a, first reversal surface 254a, second 1 distribution surface 264a, back side wall surface 443a),
A second specific change that changes the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction that contacts a second specific range (for example, the front side of the game area PA) that does not overlap the first specific range in the depth direction to a second specific mode. Means (second reversing surface 254b, second distribution surface 265a, front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b);
The gaming machine according to feature J2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J3, the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction after contact is uniquely changed according to the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, in a configuration in which the movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction is changed according to the contact position in the depth direction, the player can predict to some extent the movement of the game ball in the depth direction after the position of the game ball in the depth direction. It is possible to

Feature J4. The first specific change means applies a force including a forward component to the game ball that contacts the first specific range,
The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the second specific change means applies a force including a backward component to the game ball that contacts the second specific range.

According to the feature J4, the depth direction component of the drag applied to the game ball is exactly opposite depending on the contact position in the depth direction. As a result, it is possible to remarkably change the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction according to the contact position in the depth direction.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J4, wherein the first specific range exists on the back side of the second specific range.

According to the characteristic J5, it is possible to reversely change the position of the game ball in the depth direction between the back side and the front side due to the existence of the specific changing means.

Feature J6. The specific change means has a guide passage (position change passage 423, replacement position change passage 442, guide passage 461) through which the game ball passes, and the game ball ejected from the guide passage moves in the depth direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of making the above-described specific mode.

According to the feature J6, the player who pays attention to the position of the game ball in the depth direction will pay attention to whether or not the game ball enters the guide passage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Feature J7. The game machine according to feature J6, wherein the moving manner of the game ball ejected from the guide passage in the depth direction is changed according to the passage manner of the game ball through the guide passage.

According to the feature J7, the game ball enters the guide passage by setting the moving state in the depth direction of the game ball discharged from the guide passage to a specific state according to the passage state of the game ball in the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the guide passage.

Feature J8. Characteristic J6 or J7, characterized in that the guide passage varies the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction according to the position of the game ball at the entrance of the guide passage. The game machine described.

According to the feature J8, the game balls discharged from the guide passage move differently in the depth direction according to the positions of the game balls at the entrance of the guide passage, so that the game balls enter the guide passage. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the entrance of the guide passage.

Feature J9. The guide passage is formed by being partitioned by a plurality of passage walls and is provided to extend in the vertical direction,
Game balls passing through the guide passage come into contact with predetermined passage walls (front side wall surfaces 422b, 443b, back side wall surface 443a) among the plurality of passage walls, and game balls discharged from the guide passage are discharged from the guide passage in the depth direction. The game machine according to any one of features J6 to J8, wherein the movement mode of the is the specific mode.

According to the feature J9, by changing the movement mode of the game ball in the depth direction by contact with the passage wall of the guide passage, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the structure. becomes possible.

Feature J10. The guide path moves the game balls existing in the first range in the depth direction (near the surfaces of the game boards 421 and 451) at the entrance of the guide path to the front side of the first range at the exit of the guide path. , and the game balls existing in the second range (near the rear surface of the window panel 52) which is closer to the front side than the first range at the entrance of the guide passage are moved from the second range at the exit of the guide passage. The game machine according to any one of features J6 to J9, characterized in that it is configured to move the other side to the back side.

According to the feature J10, it is possible to guide the game ball to the position opposite to the position in the depth direction at the entrance of the guide passage. This makes it possible to positively change the position of the game ball in the depth direction.

Feature J11. Said guide path is arranged in the depth direction at the exit of said guide path with respect to a game ball existing on the front side of said first range and on the far side of said second range at the entrance of said guide path. The game machine according to feature J10, characterized in that it is configured so as not to apply a force for changing the position of the .

According to the feature J11, it is possible to create a situation in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction does not change even when it passes through the guide passage. This makes it possible to diversify the positions in the depth direction of the game ball after passing through the guide passage.

Feature J12. Characteristic J6, characterized in that the guide path is configured such that the movement mode of the game ball discharged from the guide path in the depth direction is the specific mode regardless of the passage mode of the game ball in the guide path. The game machine described.

According to the feature J12, since the game ball that enters the guide passage surely moves in a specific manner in the depth direction after passing through the guide passage, it is possible to increase the influence of the guide passage on the game board. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the movement of the game ball around the guide passage, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J13. The guide passage is provided in a passage forming member (passage forming member 422, replacement passage forming member 441, guide member 471, replacement guide member 561) provided separately from the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J12.

According to the feature J13, since the guide passage is provided in the passage forming body provided separately from the game board, the depth of the game ball can be increased while using the same game board by exchanging the passage forming body. It is possible to change the movement mode of the direction.

Feature J14. The game board has openings (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) that trigger the provision of advantageous benefits to the player when the game ball enters,
The specific change means divides the movement mode after the contacting game ball into a movement mode with a high probability of hitting the opening and a movement mode with a low probability of hitting the opening. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J13.

According to the feature J14, the probability of the game ball winning the opening differs depending on the position of the game ball in the depth direction. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the position of the game ball in the depth direction upstream of the opening is reflected in the game result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature J15. The game board includes guiding means (stage unit 354) for guiding the game ball to a place where the probability of entering the opening is high,
Characteristic J14 characterized in that the specific change means guides the game ball to the guiding means according to the position of the game ball in the depth direction and does not guide the game ball to the guiding means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature J15, by making the player pay attention to whether or not the game ball whose course has been changed by the predetermined changing means is guided to the guiding means, the player's interest in the movement of the game ball is heightened and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of In addition, by reflecting the difference in the depth direction position of the game ball in the game area in the game result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For the configuration of features J1 to J15, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the characteristic group H, the characteristic group I, and the characteristic group J, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a game board that defines a game area in which game balls flow down. Various members such as a windmill are arranged. In addition, the game board is provided with openings from which game balls are paid out, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. A game ball launched from the game ball launching device flows down the game area while colliding with a nail or the like. Game balls are paid out to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately disperse the game balls in the game area, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Insertion holes (via holes 793, 793a to 793t) and a connection area (short-circuit prevention hole 761, joining hole 762) provided around the insertion hole, and the terminal of the mounting part is inserted through the insertion hole. A gaming machine comprising a board (for example, a main control board 61) in which the terminals of the mounted part and the connection area are electrically connected by soldering,
The board has a first connection region (bonding hole 762) and a second connection region having a larger area than the first connection region as the connection regions provided for the different insertion holes. 2 connection areas (short-circuit prevention holes 761).

According to the feature K1, since the second connection region is formed to have a larger area than the first connection region, when soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported, the melting point that adheres to the predetermined terminal The likelihood of solder migrating toward adjacent terminals is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of forming a solder bridge.

Feature K2. The mounting part includes terminal rows in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in rows (a row of pins 784a to 784d of a single-row connector 782, a row of pins 784e and 784f of a two-pole connector 781, and a pin 784g of a two-row connector 783). 784p, a row of pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955, and a row of pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956),
The second connection region is provided so as to correspond to the insertion hole through which a terminal (for example, the fourth pin 784d of the first row connector 782) existing at least one end of the terminal row is inserted. The game machine according to feature K1, characterized by:

According to the feature K2, the second connection area is provided corresponding to a predetermined terminal positioned at the end of the terminal row, to which the amount of melted solder that adheres tends to increase when soldering is performed while the board is conveyed. there is As a result, the possibility of molten solder moving from the vicinity of a predetermined terminal positioned at the end of such a terminal row toward a terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal is reduced, resulting in the formation of a solder bridge. It is possible to reduce the possibility of

Feature K3. The second connection area includes at least the insertion hole through which the terminal present at one end of the terminal row is inserted and the terminal present at the other end of the terminal row (for example, the first row connector 782). The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the first pin 784a) is provided corresponding to each of the insertion holes through which the first pins 784a) are inserted.

According to the feature K3, when soldering is performed while the board is transported, the board can be designed before the transport direction of the board is determined. Also, even if the direction of transport of the substrate is reversed before soldering, the probability of occurrence of solder bridges can be reduced.

Feature K4. The terminal row is provided with three or more terminals including grounding terminals (pins 784c, 784e, and 784i connected to the GND plane 851) for grounding,
The game machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the ground terminal is arranged to avoid the end of the terminal row.

According to the feature K4, since there is no grounding terminal at the end of the terminal row around which the temperature of the molten solder tends to drop, the predetermined terminal at the end of the terminal row is connected to the predetermined terminal. This reduces the possibility that the molten solder will migrate toward the terminals adjacent to the terminals. By reducing the possibility that the melted solder will move in this manner, it is possible to prevent the area required for the second connection region from becoming extremely large.

Feature K5. Characteristic feature K2, wherein the first connection region is provided corresponding to the insertion hole through which a terminal existing at a position different from an end of the terminal row in the terminal row is inserted. The game machine according to any one of K4.

According to the feature K5, the terminals located at positions different from the ends of the terminal row (for example, the second pin 784b and the third pin 784c of the first row connector 782) are provided with the first connection area instead of the second connection area. By providing the connection regions, it is possible to prevent the range occupied by these connection regions on the substrate from becoming extremely wide.

Feature K6. In the second connection area, the dimension between two adjacent terminals is a predetermined dimension (a reference value of 1.5 mm for the pin spacing within a row of a single-row connector, and a reference value of 2.5 mm for the pin spacing of a two-pole connector). a reference value of 1.5 mm for pin spacing within a row of a two-row connector and a reference value of 2.5 mm for row spacing), at least one of the plurality of terminals is inserted through the insertion; The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein the game machine is provided corresponding to the common hole.

According to the characteristic K6, by providing the second connection region only in a place on the substrate where the probability of occurrence of a solder bridge is high, it is possible to prevent the range occupied by the connection region on the substrate from becoming extremely wide. It becomes possible.

Feature K7. As the mounting components, a first mounting component (for example, a 2-pole connector 781) in which the terminals are arranged in the first arrangement mode, and a second mounting component (for example, in a single row) in which the terminals are arranged in the second arrangement mode. connector 782), and
The game machine according to feature K6, wherein the predetermined dimension is different between the first arrangement mode and the second arrangement mode.

According to feature K7, the predetermined dimension between the terminals, which serves as a reference for providing the second connection area, differs according to the layout of the terminals. It is possible to provide two connection areas. As a result, it is possible to prevent the range occupied by the connection region on the substrate from becoming extremely wide.

Feature K8. The first arrangement mode is an arrangement mode (arrangement of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781) in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The second arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction (for example, the arrangement of pins 784a to 784d of a single-row connector 782),
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode.

According to feature K8, in the case of the first arrangement mode in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction, the terminal present at the end of the arrangement direction serves as a grounding terminal. Solder bridges are more likely to occur than in the second arrangement mode in which the electrodes are arranged in one direction. In this case, according to the feature K8, the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is set to be larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode, so that the second arrangement pattern is applied to the terminals where solder bridges are likely to occur. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals for which the second connection area is to be formed while providing the connection area.

Feature K9. The first arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which two terminal rows in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction exist in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction (for example, the arrangement of pins 784g to 784p of a two-row connector 783). and
The second arrangement mode is an arrangement mode in which there is only one terminal row in which three or more terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction (for example, the arrangement of pins 784a to 784d of a one-row connector 782),
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode.

According to feature K9, solder bridges are more likely to occur in the first arrangement mode in which two terminal rows are arranged side by side than in the second arrangement mode in which there is only one terminal row. In this case, according to feature K9, the predetermined dimension in the first arrangement mode is set to be larger than the predetermined dimension in the second arrangement mode. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals for which the second connection area is to be formed while providing the connection area.

Feature K10. The attachment component has a predetermined terminal row (row of pins 784e and 784f of the two-pole connector 781) in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The second connection area is provided corresponding to each of the insertion holes through which the two terminals present in the predetermined terminal row are individually inserted. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature K10, in the case of a predetermined terminal array in which two terminals are arranged in a predetermined direction, the terminal present at the end of the arrangement direction is a grounding terminal. Solder bridges are more likely to occur than in terminal arrays arranged in rows. In this case, according to feature K10, the second connection regions are provided corresponding to each of the two terminals in the predetermined terminal row, thereby reducing the possibility of solder bridges occurring. becomes possible.

Feature K11. The second connection area is formed so that the area on the side different from the terminal closest to the terminal inserted through the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection area is larger. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K10, characterized in that:

According to the feature K11, when soldering is performed while the board is conveyed, the molten solder adhering around the predetermined terminal can be held in a direction different from that of the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the molten solder held in the second connection area from joining the molten solder around the adjacent terminal before solidifying to form a solder bridge.

Feature K12. The second connection region has the largest area on the opposite side of the terminal that is closest to the terminal that is inserted into the insertion hole corresponding to the second connection region. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K11, characterized in that it is formed.

According to the feature K12, the melted solder adhering around the predetermined terminal can be held on the farthest side from the terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal, so that solder bridges can be made difficult to form.

Feature K13. The mounting part includes terminal rows in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in rows (a row of pins 784a to 784d of a single-row connector 782, a row of pins 784e and 784f of a two-pole connector 781, and a pin 784g of a two-row connector 783). 784p, a row of pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955, and a row of pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956),
The second connection area is formed such that the length dimension thereof is larger in the arrangement direction of the plurality of terminals in the terminal row than in a direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction. A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K12.

According to the characteristic K13, it is possible to provide the second connection area while suppressing the influence on the board design in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction of the terminals in the terminal row on the board.

Feature K14. The second connection area is
Surrounding regions (small short-circuit prevention holes 891, 921) formed around the insertion holes corresponding to the second connection regions;
an external region (large short-circuit prevention holes 892, 922) provided outside the peripheral region in the substrate;
a connecting region (first passage regions 894, 924) connecting the peripheral region and the external region;
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K13, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K14, it is possible to separate and hold the molten solder in the outer region separated from the surrounding region with the connecting region interposed therebetween. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the melted solder will move to the surrounding area side.

Feature K15. The gaming machine according to feature K14, wherein the outer area is wider than the surrounding area.

According to the feature K15, the outer region has a larger area than the surrounding region, so the melted solder that accumulates in the surrounding region is drawn toward the outer region. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the melted solder will move to the surrounding area side.

Feature K16. The gaming machine according to feature K14 or K15, wherein the connection area is narrower than the outer area.

Characteristic K16 reduces the possibility that melted solder held in the external region will migrate to the surrounding region through the connecting region.

For the configuration of features K1 to K16, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Insertion holes (via holes 793, 793a to 793t) and a connection area (joining hole 762) provided around the insertion hole, and the attachment is performed in a state in which the terminal of the attachment component is inserted through the insertion hole. In a gaming machine comprising a board (main control board 61) in which the terminal of a component and the connection area are electrically connected by soldering,
The board is provided at a position outside the connection area without communicating with the connection area, and is a special area (separate type short-circuit prevention holes 871, 874, 875 to 878, 886, 887, 3-way separation type short-circuit prevention holes 881, 884).

According to feature L1, when soldering is performed while the substrate is being conveyed, it is possible to separate and hold molten solder adhering to the connection area in the special area. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a solder bridge will be formed. In particular, by holding the molten solder separated from the connection area in the special area, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the molten solder moving from the special area to the connection area.

Feature L2. As the connection area,
a predetermined connection area (for example, the fourth joint hole 762d of the back surface area 873 for one row) provided corresponding to the insertion hole through which the predetermined terminal is inserted;
a specific connection area (for example, the third joint hole 762c of the back surface area 873 for one row) provided corresponding to the insertion hole through which the adjacent terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal is inserted;
with
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the special area is provided on a side different from the specific connection area side with respect to the predetermined connection area.

According to the feature L2, it is possible to prevent the molten solder held in the special area from moving toward the specific connection area.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the special area is provided on a side opposite to the specific connection area with respect to the predetermined connection area.

According to the feature L3, it is possible to hold the melted solder adhering to the predetermined connection area in the direction away from the specific connection area. Further, when the predetermined connection area exists behind the specific connection area in the transport direction, the special area exists behind the predetermined connection area in the transport direction. As a result, the melted solder adhering to the predetermined connection area can be easily held in the special area.

Feature L4. The special region is provided at a position where the distance (distance LD1) to the predetermined connection region is shorter than the distance (distance LD2) between the predetermined connection region and the specific connection region. The gaming machine according to feature L2 or L3, characterized in that

According to the feature L4, the special area exists closer to the predetermined connection area than the specific connection area. As a result, when soldering is performed while the substrate is being transported, surplus melted solder generated on the surface of the predetermined connection area is more likely to be held in the special area than in the specific connection area.

Feature L5. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the special area has a larger area than the connection area.

According to feature L5, since the special area has a larger area than the connection area, the molten solder is easily attracted to the special area.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the special area is formed such that a side farther from the connection area has a larger area than a side closer to the connection area.

According to feature L6, most of the melted solder held in the special area is held on the far side from the connection area, making it difficult for the melted solder held in the special area to move toward the connection area.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the special areas are provided so as to exist in a plurality of directions with respect to the connection area.

According to feature L7, the special areas are provided so as to exist in a plurality of directions with respect to the connection area, so that many moving paths for the molten solder moving from the connection area to the special area can be secured. It becomes possible. Therefore, surplus melted solder generated on the surface of the connection area is easily retained in the special area.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein a plurality of the special areas are provided around one connection area.

According to the feature L8, a plurality of special areas for evacuating surplus molten solder generated on the surface of the connection area exist around the connection area, thereby retaining the molten solder in the special area. becomes easier.

Feature L9. The mounting part includes terminal rows in which a plurality of terminals are arranged in rows (a row of pins 784a to 784d of a single-row connector 782, a row of pins 784e and 784f of a two-pole connector 781, and a pin 784g of a two-row connector 783). 784p, a row of pins 784q and 784r of the first working port connector 955, and a row of pins 784s and 784t of the second working port connector 956),
The special area is provided for the connection area corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal present at least one end of the terminal row (for example, the fourth pin 784d of the first row connector 782) is inserted. The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, characterized in that

According to feature L9, a special area is provided corresponding to a predetermined terminal located at the end of the terminal row, to which a large amount of molten solder tends to adhere when soldering is performed while the substrate is being conveyed. As a result, the possibility of molten solder moving from the vicinity of a predetermined terminal positioned at the end of such a terminal row toward a terminal adjacent to the predetermined terminal is reduced, resulting in the formation of a solder bridge. It is possible to reduce the possibility of

Feature L10. The special region includes at least the connecting region corresponding to the insertion hole through which the terminal present at one end of the terminal row is inserted, and the terminal present at the other end of the terminal row (for example, The gaming machine according to feature L9, wherein the connecting regions are provided corresponding to the insertion holes through which the first pins 784a) of the one-row connector 782 are inserted.

According to the feature L10, when soldering is performed while the board is transported, the board can be designed before the transport direction of the board is determined. Also, even if the direction of transport of the substrate is reversed before soldering, the probability of occurrence of solder bridges can be reduced.

Feature L11. The terminal row is provided with three or more terminals including grounding terminals (pins 784c, 784e, and 784i connected to the GND plane 851) for grounding,
The game machine according to feature L9 or L10, wherein the grounding terminal is arranged to avoid an end of the terminal row.

According to the feature L11, since there is no grounding terminal at the end of the terminal row around which the temperature of the molten solder tends to drop, the predetermined terminal at the end of the terminal row is connected to the predetermined terminal. This reduces the possibility that the molten solder will migrate toward the terminals adjacent to the terminals. By reducing the possibility of the melted solder moving in this way, it is possible to prevent the area required for the special area from becoming extremely large.

Feature L12. The special area corresponds to the insertion hole through which the terminals (for example, the second pin 784b and the third pin 784c of the first-row connector 782) that are located at positions different from the ends of the terminal row in the terminal row are inserted. The gaming machine according to any one of features L9 to L11, wherein the corresponding connection area is not provided.

According to the characteristic L12, no special area is provided for the terminal located at a position different from the end of the terminal row, so that the area occupied by the special area on the substrate does not become extremely wide. It becomes possible to

For the configuration of features L1 to L12, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PA) based on a shooting operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 938, second operation port 939) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Ball entry detection means (first operation opening detection sensor 951, second operation opening detection sensor 952) for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry portion;
Connecting means (first working port connector 955, second working port connector 955, second working port connector) electrically connected to transmission means (first harness 951a, second harness 952a) for transmitting information on detection results of the entering ball detection means 956) provided with a specific control means (main control device 60) having a specific board (main control board 61);
with
At least a first starting ball entrance portion (first operating port 938) and a second starting ball ball portion (second operating port 939) are provided as the starting ball ball portion,
As the ball entry detection means, a first ball entry detection means (first operation opening detection sensor 951) for detecting a game ball entering the first start ball entry portion, and a ball entry into the second start ball entry portion At least a second ball entry detection means (second operation opening detection sensor 952) that detects a game ball that has been played,
As the transmission means, a first transmission means (first harness 951a) for transmitting information on the detection result of the first ball entry detection means, and a second transmission means for transmitting information on the detection result of the second ball entry detection means. means (second harness 952a),
As the connection means, the first connection means (first operation port connector 955) to which the first transmission means is connected, and the second connection means (second operation port connector 956) to which the second transmission means is connected. ) and
The first connection means and the second connection means are provided individually for the specific substrate,
The connection terminals provided on the second connection means are two, a first connection terminal (first pin 784s) and a second connection terminal (second pin 784t),
The specific substrate is
a first insertion hole (first via hole 793s) through which the first connection terminal is inserted;
a second insertion hole (second via hole 793t) through which the second connection terminal is inserted;
a first connection region (short-circuit prevention hole 761) provided around the first insertion hole;
a second connection region (short-circuit prevention hole 761) provided around the second insertion hole;
a predetermined insertion hole (via hole 793) through which a predetermined terminal of a predetermined mounting component is inserted;
a predetermined connection area (joint hole 762) provided around the predetermined insertion hole;
with
The first connection terminal and the first connection region are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the first connection terminal is inserted through the first insertion hole,
The second connection terminal and the second connection region are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the second connection terminal is inserted through the second insertion hole,
The predetermined terminal and the predetermined connection area are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the predetermined terminal is inserted through the predetermined insertion hole,
In the game area, the first starting ball entry part is provided at a position where the game ball shot when the shooting operation is performed at least in the first operation mode can reach,
In the game area, the second starting ball entering portion is a position where the game ball fired when the shooting operation is performed according to the first operation mode is impossible or difficult to reach, and the second operation mode is provided at a position where the game ball fired when the shooting operation is performed by
The specific control means is
A first acquiring means (function of executing the process of step S213 in the main side CPU 63) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first entering ball detecting means;
A first acquired information storage means (first special figure reservation area, a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main side CPU 63) for storing the special information acquired by the first acquisition means;
a second acquiring means (function for executing the process of step S213 in the main side CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second ball entry detecting means;
A second acquisition information storage means (second special figure reservation area, function of executing the process of step S213 in the main side CPU 63) for storing the special information acquired by the second acquisition means;
Attachment determination means (main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined attachment information. a function to execute the process of step S213 in
Privilege giving means ( a function of executing the process of step S213 in the main CPU 63;
Acceptance control capable of switching the second starting ball entry section between a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter or impossible to enter, and a second state in which game balls are more likely to enter. means (function for executing the process of step S214 in the main CPU 63);
with
The acceptance control means has a first mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the second state is more likely to occur than the first mode, as the control modes of the second start-up ball entrance section. ), and
The special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is subject to the addition determination rather than the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is subject to the determination of addition. In the case of
The first connection region and the second connection region are formed to have a larger area than the predetermined connection region,
The first connection region is formed to have a larger area on a side different from the second insertion hole side with respect to the first insertion hole,
A gaming machine, wherein the second connection area is formed to have a larger area on a side different from the first insertion hole with respect to the second insertion hole.

According to the feature M1, the award determination performed when the ball enters the second start-up portion is more advantageous to the player than the award determination performed when the ball enters the first start-up portion. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second start ball entering section, the player has great expectations. A first connection area having an area larger than a predetermined connection area is provided around the first connection terminal of the second connection means, and an area larger than the predetermined connection area is provided around the second connection terminal. A wide second connection area is provided. Therefore, in the process of soldering the specific board, it is possible to suppress the formation of a solder bridge between the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal, resulting in a short circuit. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion is not detected due to poor connection. It is possible to avoid disappointing an expected player due to poor connection.

Also, the first connection means for connecting the first detection means to the specific board and the second connection means for connecting the second detection means to the specific board are provided individually for the specific board. When a fraudulent board is used, it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraud in the game hall by setting many connection points necessary for connecting the fraudulent board to the specific board.

Feature M2. The first connection region and the second connection region have a length dimension in the arrangement direction in which the first connection terminals and the second connection terminals are arranged side by side, rather than in a direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction. The game machine according to feature M1, characterized in that it is formed so that the is large.

According to feature M2, in the specific substrate, the first connection region and the second connection region are provided while suppressing the influence on the substrate design in the direction orthogonal to the arrangement direction of the first connection terminals and the second connection terminals. becomes possible.

Feature M3. The first connection area is
a first peripheral region (small short-circuit prevention holes 891, 921) formed around the first insertion hole;
a first external region (large short-circuit prevention holes 892, 922) provided outside the first peripheral region in the specific substrate;
a first connection region (first passage regions 894, 924) that connects the first peripheral region and the first exterior region;
and
The second connection area is
a second peripheral region (small short-circuit prevention holes 891, 921) formed around the second insertion hole;
a second external region (large short-circuit prevention holes 892, 922) provided outside the second peripheral region in the specific substrate;
a second connecting region (first passage region 894, 924) connecting the second peripheral region and the second external region;
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature M3, it is possible to separate and hold the molten solder in the first external region separated from the first peripheral region with the first connection region interposed therebetween, and to separate the molten solder from the second peripheral region. It is possible to separate and hold the melted solder in the second external regions separated by the second connecting region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the melted solder will move to the first peripheral region side and the second peripheral region side.

Feature M4. The first external region has a larger area than the first peripheral region,
The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the second outer area is wider than the second surrounding area.

According to feature M4, the first outer region has a larger area than the first peripheral region, so that the molten solder that accumulates in the first peripheral region is drawn toward the first outer region. Also, since the second outer region has a larger area than the second peripheral region, the melted solder accumulated in the second peripheral region is drawn toward the second outer region. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the melted solder will move to the first peripheral region side and the second peripheral region side.

Feature M5. the first connecting region is narrower than the first outer region;
The gaming machine according to feature M3 or M4, wherein the second connecting area is narrower than the second outer area.

According to the feature M5, the possibility that the molten solder held in the first outer region moves to the first peripheral region through the first connection region is reduced, and the molten solder held in the second outer region is reduced. The likelihood of solder migrating through the second connection region to the second surrounding region is reduced.

For the configuration of features M1 to M5, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H34, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K16, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the characteristic group K, the characteristic group L, and the characteristic group M, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine includes a main control device that controls the main game, and a sound emission control device that outputs sound and light for effects based on commands received from the main control device. The main control device, the sound emission control device, and the like are internally provided with a substrate, and the substrate is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs and resistors, connectors, and the like on a printed wiring board. Electronic components, connectors, and the like are fixed in a state of being electrically connected to wiring formed on a printed wiring board by soldering.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform soldering appropriately when mounting electronic components, connectors, and the like on the printed wiring board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Out mouth, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 31... General winning opening, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating opening, 34... Second operating opening, 52... Window panel, 60... Main controller 61 Main control board 62 MPU 63 Main side CPU 65 Main side RAM 92 Payout side CPU 102 Reading terminal 112 Management side CPU 116 Correspondence memory , 131... memory for calculation result, 151... light emitting part for notification, 213... first left/right dividing nail, 214... second left/right dividing nail, 215... first left/right dividing member, 216... fixing member, 217a... First distribution surface 218a Second distribution surface 228 Obstacle nail 231 Second left and right distribution member 232a First distribution surface 233 Game board 234a Second distribution surface 242 1st left/right distribution nail 243 1st left/right distribution member 244a 1st distribution surface 245a 2nd distribution surface 251 Reversing nail 254 Reversing member 254a First reversing surface 254b...Second reversing surface 255...Left guide member 262...Front/back distribution nail 263...Front/back distribution member 264a...First distribution surface 265a...Second distribution surface 271...Rear nail 291... Front priority member 292 Plate member 293 First support member 294 Second support member 322 Repulsion nail 333 Low repulsion member 334d High repulsion portion 351 Front/rear distribution table 354 Stage Unit 372 First downstream surface 373 Second downstream surface 391, 392 Front and rear distribution table 422 Passage forming member 422b Front side wall surface 423 Repositioning passage 441 Replacement passage forming member , 442 Replacement position changing passage 443a Back wall surface 443b Front side surface 461 Guide passage 462 Guide surface 471 Guide member 561 Replacement guide member 761 Short-circuit prevention hole 762 ...Joining hole 762c...Third joining hole 762d...Fourth joining hole 775...Terminal 781...2-pole connector 782...1-row connector 783...2-row connector 784a to 784t...Pins 793, 793a to 793t: Via hole 891: Small short-circuit prevention hole 892: Large short-circuit prevention hole 894: First passage area 851: GND solid 871: Separation type short circuit prevention hole 873: Back surface area for one row 874: Separation type Short circuit prevention hole 875 Upper left separated short circuit prevention hole 876 Lower left separated short circuit prevention hole 877 Upper right separated short circuit prevention hole 878 Lower right separated short circuit prevention hole 881, 884 Three-way separated short circuit Prevention hole, 886... Left side separated type short circuit prevention hole, 887... Right separated type short-circuit prevention hole 921 Small short-circuit prevention hole 922 Large short-circuit prevention hole 924 First passage area 938 First operation port 939 Second operation port 951 First operation port detection sensor , 951a... 1st harness, 952... 2nd operation opening detection sensor, 952a... 2nd harness, 955... connector for 1st operation opening, 956... connector for 2nd operation opening, B1... game ball, PA... game area.

Claims (1)

a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player;
a starting ball entry section into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry section;
a specific control means having a specific substrate provided with a connection means for electrically connecting a transmission means for transmitting information of a detection result of the ball entry detection means;
with
At least a first start-up ball entry portion and a second start-up ball entry portion are provided as the start-up ball entry portion,
As the ball entry detection means, a first ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start ball entry section and a second entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second start ball entry section. at least ball detection means;
As the transmission means, a first transmission means for transmitting information on the detection result of the first ball entry detection means, and a second transmission means for transmitting information on the detection result of the second ball entry detection means,
As the connection means, a first connection means to which the first transmission means is connected, and a second connection means to which the second transmission means is connected,
The first connection means and the second connection means are provided individually for the specific substrate,
The connection terminals provided on the second connection means are two, a first connection terminal and a second connection terminal,
The specific substrate is
a first insertion hole through which the first connection terminal is inserted;
a second insertion hole through which the second connection terminal is inserted;
a first connection area provided around the first insertion hole;
a second connection area provided around the second insertion hole;
a predetermined insertion hole through which a predetermined terminal of a predetermined attachment component is inserted;
a predetermined connection area provided around the predetermined insertion hole;
with
The first connection terminal and the first connection region are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the first connection terminal is inserted through the first insertion hole,
The second connection terminal and the second connection region are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the second connection terminal is inserted through the second insertion hole,
The predetermined terminal and the predetermined connection area are electrically connected by soldering in a state in which the predetermined terminal is inserted through the predetermined insertion hole,
In the game area, the first starting ball entry part is provided at a position where the game ball shot when the shooting operation is performed at least in the first operation mode can reach,
In the game area, the second starting ball entering portion is a position where the game ball fired when the shooting operation is performed according to the first operation mode is impossible or difficult to reach, and the second operation mode is provided at a position where the game ball fired when the shooting operation is performed by
The specific control means is
a first acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the detection of a gaming ball by the first ball entry detecting means;
a first acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the first acquisition means;
a second acquiring means for acquiring special information based on the detection of a game ball by the second ball entry detecting means;
a second acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the second acquisition means;
addition determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means or the second acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined added information;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information; ,
Acceptance control capable of switching the second starting ball entry section between a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter or impossible to enter, and a second state in which game balls are more likely to enter. means and
with
The acceptance control means has a first mode and a second mode in which the second state is more likely than the first mode as control modes for the second start-up ball entry section,
The special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is subject to the addition determination rather than the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means is subject to the determination of addition. In the case of
The first connection region and the second connection region are formed to have a larger area than the predetermined connection region,
The first connection region is formed to have a larger area on a side different from the second insertion hole side with respect to the first insertion hole,
A gaming machine, wherein the second connection area is formed to have a larger area on a side different from the first insertion hole with respect to the second insertion hole.

Images